JP7061369B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a first special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes the first special result. ..

A pachinko machine is known as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device provided in the game area is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball at the start port provided in the game area. When the variable display game is started and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. In addition, the probability of deriving a special result is set to either a low-probability state or a high-probability state higher than the low-probability state, and if it is a high-probability state, a lottery is made to move to the low-probability state. A gaming machine that performs a fall lottery is also known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-121305

In the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the interest of the game has deteriorated due to the transition of the gaming state. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a first special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is the first special result.
Equipped with control means to control the game
The control means is
Based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first variable display game is executed as the variable display game, and the first variable display game is executed.
Based on the establishment of the second start condition, the second variable display game is executed as the variable display game, and the second variable display game is executed.
The first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time.
At least in the result of the second variable display game, there is a second special result in which the probability of being derived is constant regardless of the gaming state.
When the first variable display game that is the first special result is executed, the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first variable display game, so that the player can be informed. It is possible to generate an advantageous second special gaming state,
When the second variable display game that results in the second special result is executed, the first specific effect that suggests or notifies the change in the gaming state can be executed, and the first specific effect is executed during the execution of the first specific effect. When the first variable display game having a special result is executed, a change in the gaming state to the first special gaming state is suggested or notified in addition to or in place of the first specific effect. The second specific effect to be performed is characterized in that it can be executed so as to straddle the screen displaying the result of the second variable display game .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a front view of the special variable winning device. It is a top view of the special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the operation of the opening / closing member, and is (a) a closed state, (b) an open state. It is a bottom view explaining the operation of the opening / closing member unit, and is (a) a closed state and (b) an open state. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a change of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a change of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect on a display device. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the operation of a normal variable prize-winning device, and various times. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 3 switch processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the 4th specific game state setting process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a support management process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot system command processing. It is a figure explaining the kind of the fluctuation pattern in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the transition of the gaming state in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the kind of the fluctuation pattern in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect in the display device in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect in the display device in the 2nd modification. It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common process of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the variation start process in FIG. 1, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the variation start process in FIG. 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the middle of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of the probability setting value. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change processing in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the determination condition monitoring process in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the transition determination process in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability setting value in the 4th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in the 4th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the setting means and the game control device in the 5th modification of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in the 6th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 7th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in the 7th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 8th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in the 9th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation processing in the tenth modification of the second embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification mode in the eleventh modification of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the magnetic sensor in the twelfth modification of the second embodiment. It is an operation chart of the magnetic sensor in the twelfth modification of the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the radio wave abnormality monitoring and the magnetic anomaly monitoring in the twelfth modification of the second embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in the twelfth modification of the second embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in the twelfth modification of the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of a button effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a button effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a button effect and an example of notification. It is a figure explaining an example of payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of payout number notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of a production sound and an error sound. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation sound and an error sound. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation sound and an error sound. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation sound and an error sound. It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a front view of the special variable winning device. It is a top view of the special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the operation of the opening / closing member, and is (a) a closed state, (b) an open state. It is a bottom view explaining the operation of the opening / closing member unit, and is (a) a closed state and (b) an open state. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a change of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a change of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect on a display device. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the operation of a normal variable prize-winning device, and various times. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 3 switch processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining a support management process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the 4th specific game state setting process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot system command processing. It is a figure explaining the kind of the fluctuation pattern in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition of the gaming state in the 2nd modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the kind of the fluctuation pattern in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect in the display device in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect in the display device in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect in the display device in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition of the gaming state in the 3rd modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the kind of the fluctuation pattern in the 3rd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in the 3rd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in the 3rd modification of 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in the abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub-display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device moves the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 80. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the first starting winning opening 36. Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 19) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the right side of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 19) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). .. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 19). Further, in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, a second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. Has been done. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 19).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 is provided between the normal starting gate 34 and the second starting winning opening 97. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed by winning the winning opening (Public electric winning opening 37d) of the normal variable winning device 37, or the special drawing 1 start winning memory (first starting memory). ) Is stored. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning opening (Public winning opening 37d) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is the first starting winning area that gives the start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (the first special figure variable display game). be. Then, the game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 19), and when the game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a, the game control device 100 sets the game control device 100. Execute the special figure 1 variable display game immediately, or memorize the special figure 1 start winning memory. As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to the first starting winning area (starting opening in FIG. 1), and the second starting winning opening 97 is the second starting. It corresponds to the winning area (starting port of special figure 2).

The game control device (game control means) 100 controls the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be converted into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the normal fluctuation display game. Connect to (conversion control means) (see FIG. 19). The details of the configuration of the normal variable winning device 37 will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 moves back and forth (slides) by the normal variable winning device 37c to advance and retreat (slide) the normal variable winning device 37. It is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the mouth 37d (makes the game ball flow into the solenoid winning mouth 37d). As the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the ordinary electric winning opening 37d by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side is provided by the ordinary electric solenoid 37c. You may. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the game control device 100 opens the movable member 37b via the normal electric solenoid 37c so that the game ball can flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Change to an open state.

Further, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the game state, a time-saving state (general electric support (electric support) state) is generated.

A special variable winning device 38 is provided in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. As shown in FIGS. 15 to 18, the special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38d into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving back and forth (sliding) the opening / closing member 990 in the front-rear direction. The special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38d from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening 38d. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 19).

That is, the special variable winning device 38 of the present embodiment opens and closes from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) in which the opening / closing member 990 closes the large winning opening 38d depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The member 990 retracts and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. Then, the game ball arriving at the special variable winning device 38 is repeatedly guided diagonally backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992, and is guided diagonally forward by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964. It meanders back and forth and flows down from right to left. As a result, the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 is longer than in the case where the flow path 38f has no undulations such as the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 and flows straight down. become longer. Therefore, the game ball is always present on the opening / closing member 990, and even if the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. There is a high possibility that the player will fall and win the big winning opening 38d, and even with a short opening, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning.

Further, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened is bounced by contacting the protrusion 992 and guided in a direction away from the large winning opening 38d. Further, the bounced game ball may be further separated from the large winning opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the protrusions 992 are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the protrusions 992 may fall without contacting the protrusions 992. As described above, by providing the protrusion 992, the front wall protrusion 954, and the rear wall protrusion 964, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is opened becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. can. Further, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented. It should be noted that the configuration for retaining the game ball in the normal variable prize device 37, which will be described later, may be used as the configuration for retaining the game ball in the special variable prize device 38, or conversely, the game ball in the special variable prize device 38. The configuration for retaining the game ball may be used as the configuration for retaining the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37.

Returning to FIG. 2, the game area 32 below the first start winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting the game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like. Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal map variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32. The batch display device 50 is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 variable display for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for a game and a storage display unit 53 for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 1 variation display game composed of LED lamps are provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning device 38), and a method of hitting that is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying (a method of hitting corresponding to a game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of a special figure variation display game are provided. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.

Further, the normal map display unit 58 that displays the normal map fluctuation display game, the storage display unit 59 for notifying the start storage number of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is configured so that it is displayed that it is changing and it is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit result mode (special result mode) is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The storage display unit 53 is the number of undigested balls among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, which are the conditions for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (starting memory number = holding number). Is displayed by turning off and turning on (blinking) multiple LEDs. The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the special game state, the LEDs are turned on according to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

In the first game state display unit 56, for example, when the left-handed hit is more advantageous for the player than the right-handed hit (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and the right-handed hit is better than the left-handed hit. When the gaming state is more advantageous to the player (when hitting to the right), all the LEDs are turned on. The probability display unit 57 turns off all LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and all LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability change state). Turn on.

FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board 30 included in the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 constitutes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front component 600 constituting a front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear portion of the center case 40, and also plays a game. It includes a rear component 700 to which various members necessary for the board 30 are attached. The rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess opened in the front, and inside the recess, a board effect device 44 that operates to produce a game is formed. , Various movable accessory units are provided.

The front component 600 is provided with a general winning opening 35, a warp flow path forming member 614, a stage portion 620, and the like. Further, in the game board main body 80, in addition to the front component 600, the normal starting gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable A winning device 38, a batch display device 50, and the like are provided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a flow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is won. The game ball that fails (specifically, the game ball that has arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 but has not won the normal variable winning device 37) flows downward through the flow path 615. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The guide portion 616 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 617 descends to the left, and a game ball flowing downward on the flow path 615 is received by the upper surface 617, and a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38 exist. It is designed to guide you to the left.

[Normal variable winning device]
Next, an example of the configuration of the ordinary variable winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 12. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the ordinary variable winning device 37. Further, FIG. 5A is a top view of the normal variable winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and FIG. 5B is an upper surface of the normal variable winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the open state. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 5, the ordinary variable winning device 37 has a flow path rear wall 373a arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and a flow path front wall 371a arranged in front of the flow path rear wall 373a. It is provided with a flow path 37f in which game balls can flow down in a row. The flow path 37f is inclined so as to go down to the right when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down to the right in a row. Further, the normal variable winning device 37 allows the game balls to pass in a row inside the normal variable winning device 37 (specifically, the inside of the base portion composed of the front base member 373 and the rear base member 375). It is provided with a substantially U-shaped detour 37g. As shown in FIG. 4, the inlet 37g1 (one end of the detour 37g) and the exit 37g2 (the other end of the detour 37g) of the detour 37g are formed on the rear wall 373a of the flow path, and the game ball. Inflow from the detour 37f to the detour 37g one by one through the inlet 37g1, and flow out from the detour 37g to the detour 37f one by one through the outlet 37g2.

As shown in FIG. 4, the flow path front wall 371a has a protrusion 371b that projects rearward and penetrates the flow path rear wall 373a. The protrusion 371b is a position where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f collide with each other, and is arranged at a position between the inlet 37g1 and the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g. Therefore, the protrusion 371b blocks the flow of the game ball in the flow path 37f on the way (that is, before flowing into the end point (downstream end) of the flow path 37f), thereby causing the game ball to detour 37g. It is designed to guide you. Since the protrusion 371b is provided in the middle of the flow path 37f, the game ball cannot flow into the end point of the flow path 37f unless it passes through the detour 37g.

As shown in FIG. 5, the bottom surface of the central portion and the right end portion of the flow path 37f and the bottom surface of the detour 37g are configured by a movable member 37b slidable in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 5A, the movable member 37b protrudes forward and is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (Pixel 5a winning opening 37d), and FIG. 5B. As described above, it can be converted into an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in the Pixel 5a winning opening 37d by evacuating to the rear. That is, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b and cannot flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, and the movable member 37b is in the open state. If this is the case, it is possible to flow into the Fuden winning opening 37d.

Specifically, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. That is, it flows down the flow path 37f to the protrusion 371b, collides with the protrusion 371b, and flows into the detour 37g. Further, when the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 37b collides with the protrusion 371b, or when the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f flows into the upper surface of the movable member 37b. If the movable member 37b is in the open state at that time, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and has flowed into the end point of the flow path 37f flows into the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the open state. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and has flowed into the end point of the flow path 37f does not flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, but is a normal variable winning device 37. It advances to the outside and flows down to the guidance unit 616 through, for example, the flow down path 615. That is, the game ball corresponds to a game ball that failed to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (a game ball that did not win in the normal variable winning device 37 even though it arrived at the normal variable winning device 37). .. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, there is a gap between the movable member 37b and the flow path front wall 371a, but the gap is such that the game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 4, the ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch 37a and a movable member unit 374 having a movable member 37b and a universal solenoid 37c. Further, the normal variable winning device 37 includes a front decorative member 371 having a flow path front wall 371a, a front base member 373 having a flow path rear wall 373a, a rear base member 375 to which a movable member 37b and the like are attached, and a rear base. A rear cover member 377 that covers the rear surface of the member 375, a front substrate holder 372 for fixing the front LED substrate 372a and the front LED substrate 372a to the rear surface of the front decorative member 371, and a rear LED substrate 376a and the rear LED substrate 376a. Is provided with a rear board holder 376 for fixing the rear base member 375 to the rear surface.

At least the front decorative member 371, the front base member 373, and the rear base member 375 are made of a material capable of transmitting light. A front LED substrate 372a is arranged behind the front decorative member 371 as a decorative means, and a rear LED substrate 376a is arranged behind the rear base member 375 as a decorative means. It is possible to decorate.

The front decorative member 371 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion 371c. The front surface of the front surface portion 371c is arranged close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game ball does not flow down in front of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front surface portion 371c is a surface visible to the player and is decorated. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 371c is a flow path front wall 371a forming a side wall on the front side of the flow path 37f.

As shown in FIG. 5, on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) upstream side front wall protrusions 371d are provided. The upstream front wall protrusion 371d is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces. The upstream front wall protrusion 371d has a function of guiding the game ball flowing to the right to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a downstream side front wall protrusion 371e projecting rearward is provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The downstream front wall protrusion 371e is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces. The downstream front wall protrusion 371e has a function of guiding the game ball flowing to the right to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing into the end point of the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other. Further, in the downstream side front wall protrusion 371e, the game ball flowing down around the normal variable winning device 37 (outside of the normal variable winning device 37) is downstream to the inside of the normal variable winning device 37 (flow path 37f). It has a function to prevent intrusion from the end point side).

FIG. 6A is a back view of the front decorative member 371. As shown in FIG. 6A, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 371f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped front portion 371c are provided on the rear surface side of the front decorative member 371. The function of the extending wall 371f is different depending on the place where the wall is provided, and the bottom surface portion 371f1 forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the start point (upstream end portion) of the flow path 37f). Fuden winning opening forming part 371f2 forming the side wall or bottom of the Fuden winning opening 37d, guiding flow path forming part 371f3 forming the guiding flow path 37e for guiding the game ball winning in the Fuden winning opening 37d, starting port 2 switch It has a function as a switch mounting portion forming portion 371f4 forming a mounting portion for mounting the 37a, and a peripheral wall 371f5 for preventing the intrusion of the game ball flowing down around the normal variable winning device 37 into the inside.

The bottom surface portion 371f1 forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f is an inclined surface inclined to the left side when viewed from the rear surface side. The Fuden winning opening forming portion 371f2 is inclined so as to collect the game balls flowing into the Fuden winning opening 37d into the induction flow path 37e. Game balls can flow into the guide flow path 37e in a single row, and a start port 2 switch 37a is provided at the inflow portion into the guide flow path 37e. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the Fuden winning opening 37d will flow into the induction flow path 37e after being detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a. The guidance flow path 37e formed by the guidance flow path forming portion 371f3 is a flow path for guiding the game ball from the general electric winning opening 37d to the rear surface side of the game board 30, and the game ball is placed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 371c. Ribs 371g for guiding backward are formed.

The front LED substrate 372a and the front substrate holder 372 are arranged inside the peripheral wall 371f5 of the rear surface of the front decorative member 371 (a portion surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5). Further, a portion of the rear surface of the front decorative member 371 surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5 is subjected to processing for scattering light (concavo-convex processing in the example shown in FIG. 6A). This makes it possible to effectively decorate the normal variable winning device 37 with the light from the front LED board 372a and the rear LED board 376a, and also front-decorate the front LED board 372a itself, the front board holder 372, and the like. It is difficult to see through the front decorative member 371 from the front of the member 371. Further, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), there are a plurality of holes for releasing heat such as the front LED substrate 372a in the lower portion of the front base member 373 (seven in the example shown in FIG. 6 (b)). It is provided. These holes are also made difficult to see from the front of the front decorative member 371 due to the processing applied to the front decorative member 371 to scatter the light.

As shown in FIG. 4, the front base member 373 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b. A front decorative member 371 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b that is not hidden by the front decorative member 371 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface portion 373b is a flow path rear wall 373a forming a side wall on the rear side of the flow path 37f. Further, at a position at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 373a, a movable member insertion portion 373c is formed which penetrates the movable member 37b back and forth for inserting the movable member 37b from the rear surface side of the front base member 373.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the front surface side of the front base member 373, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) rear wall protrusions 373d projecting forward are provided. The rear wall protrusion 373d is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and is behind each of the upstream front wall protrusions 371d provided on the flow path front wall 371a, and the upstream front wall. It is provided so as to be located slightly downstream of the protrusion 371d. The rear wall protrusion 373d has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other.

FIG. 6B is a back view of the front base member 373. As shown in FIG. 6B, the guide flow path 37e is located on the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b in the central portion of the rear surface portion 373b, which faces the portion of the front decorative member 371 in which the guide flow path 37e is formed. A penetrating portion 373e that penetrates back and forth is formed so as to communicate with the side. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 373f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b are provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The extending wall 373f has a different function depending on the place where it is provided, and functions as a guiding flow path forming portion 373f1 forming the guiding flow path 37e and a peripheral wall 373f2 forming the periphery of the normal variation winning device 37. Have.

The guide flow path forming portion 373f1 forms the guide flow path 37e so as to guide the game ball flowing into the penetration portion 373e backward. Further, a rib 373g for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the lower end portion of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1. The lower end of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1 and the rib 373g formed at the lower end portion have an inclined surface whose upper surface descends rearward, and the game ball flowing into the penetrating portion 373e is received by these upper surfaces and rearward. It is designed to guide you to. The guided gaming ball flows into the discharge flow path for discharging the gaming ball to the outside of the gaming machine 10.

The peripheral wall 373f2 is formed in accordance with the shape of the penetrating portion that penetrates back and forth formed in the portion of the game board main body 80 to which the normal variable winning device 37 is attached, and the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. At that time, the peripheral wall 373f2 is in a state of being inserted through the penetrating portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b located outside the peripheral wall 373f2 is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear base member 375 includes a peripheral wall 375a that coincides with the peripheral wall 373f2 of the front base member 373 in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a pair of movable members 37b that operate in the front-rear direction are guided and supported at positions facing the movable member insertion portion 373c formed in the front base member 373 of the rear base member 375. The movable member holding portion 375b of the above is provided. The pair of movable member holding portions 375b are arranged at a predetermined interval (gap 375c) so that they can abut on the lower surface of the movable member 37b and can guide and support the movable member 37b. It is provided so as to extend along the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 4, a movable member unit 374 provided with a movable member 37b and an operating mechanism (driving mechanism) for operating the movable member 37b is attached to the front surface side of the rear base member 375. The movable member unit 374 has a movable member 37b that can slide in the front-rear direction, a normal electric solenoid 37c for operating the movable member 37b, and a slider 374a that transmits the driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. And a crank 374b.

The movable member unit 374 has a closed state in which the movable member 37b is projected forward as shown in FIG. 5 (a) and an open state in which the movable member 37b is retracted rearward as shown in FIG. 5 (b). It is convertible. The movable member 37b can appear above the general electric winning opening 37d via the movable member holding portion 375b formed on the rear base member 375 and the movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. There is.

7 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable member unit 374, and FIG. 7 (b) is a front view of the movable member 37b. 8 (a) is a top view of the movable member 37b, and FIG. 8 (b) is a bottom view of the movable member 37b. As shown in FIG. 7A, the movable member 37b is located at a position lower than the upper portion 37b1, the first middle stage portion 37b2 provided at a position lower than the upper stage portion 37b1, and the first middle stage portion 37b2. The second middle stage portion 37b3 provided and the lower stage portion 37b4 provided at a position lower than the second middle stage portion 37b3 form a stepped shape arranged in the left-right direction. The upper part 37b1, the first middle part 37b2, the second middle part 37b3, and the lower part 37b4 are arranged in this order so that the upper part 37b1 is arranged on the leftmost side and the lower part 37b4 is arranged on the rightmost side. The ball is designed to flow down from left to right.

The upper portion 37b1 has a front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and is a flow path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f. The flow path forming portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 is one step lower than the portion other than the flow path forming portion of the upper stage portion 37b1. Further, the lower wall projecting portion 37b5 extends forward from the right end portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 other than the flow path forming portion. The lower wall protruding portion 37b5 has a slope on the left side surface, and is provided so as to gradually narrow the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the flow path forming portion. The lower wall protrusion 37b5 has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other.

In the first middle stage portion 37b2, the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state is a flow path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f, and the front end thereof. A portion other than the portion (that is, a portion other than the flow path forming portion) is regarded as a detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. Of the first middle stage portion 37b2, the boundary portion between the flow path forming portion and the detour forming portion is arranged directly below the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The first middle stage portion 37b2 is inclined so that the rear end is located below the front end. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the game ball is likely to roll from the front side to the rear side in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. Further, on the upper surface of the first middle stage portion 37b2, a meandering left ridge portion 37b6 that protrudes upward and extends back and forth is formed. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the detour 37g can be meandered to suppress the ball power.

In the second middle stage portion 37b3, the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state guides the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f to the detour 37g. It is placed directly under.

In the lower portion 37b4, the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state forms the bottom surface of the detour path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the end point of the detour path 37f). It is a detour forming portion, and a portion other than the front end portion (that is, a portion other than the flow path forming portion) is a detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. Of the lower portion 37b4, the boundary portion between the flow path forming portion and the detour forming portion is arranged directly below the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The lower end portion 37b4 is inclined so that the rear end portion is located above the front end portion, and the rear end portion is flush with the rear end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the game ball is likely to roll from the rear side to the front side in the downstream portion of the detour 37g. The rear end portion of the lower portion 37b4 may be provided at a position lower than the rear end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2. Further, on the upper surface of the lower portion 37b4, a meandering right ridge portion 37b7 that protrudes upward and extends back and forth is formed. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the detour 37g can be meandered to suppress the ball power.

As described above, the movable member 37b is provided with a rising portion such as a lower wall protrusion 37b5, a left protrusion 37b6, and a right protrusion 37b7. Further, the front decorative member 371 is provided with a raised portion such as the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the front base member 373 is provided with a raised portion such as the rear wall protrusion 373d. .. With such a rising portion, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, a sliding portion 37b8 extending downward is formed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the movable member 37b. The sliding portion 37b8 is formed so as to extend along the front-rear direction, and the movable member 37b is placed on the holding portion 373h by abutting on the upper surface of the pair of holding portions 373h formed on the front base member 373. It becomes slidable.

As shown in FIGS. 7 (b) and 8 (b), a connecting pin 37b9 projecting downward is provided in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 7A, a penetration portion 374b1 through which the connection pin 37b9 can be inserted is formed in the crank (drive arm) 374b that transmits the driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. The movable member 37b and the crank 374b are connected by inserting the tip end portion (lower end portion) of the connection pin 37b9 into the penetration portion 374b1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 7 (b) and 8 (b), in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b, the front side and the rear side of the connection pin 37b9 project downward and extend along the front-rear direction. The guide rib 37b10 is provided. The guide ribs 37b10 include a gap 373i (see FIG. 6B) formed along the front-rear direction between the pair of holding portions 373h of the front base member 373, and a pair of movable members of the rear base member 375. It can be inserted into the gap 375c (see FIG. 4) formed along the front-rear direction between the holding portions 375b. By inserting the guide ribs 37b10 of the movable member 37b into these gaps 373i and 375c from above, it is possible to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the movable member 37b in the front-rear direction. That is, by fitting the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b into the gap 373i of the front base member 373 and the gap 375c of the rear base member 375, the movement of the movable member 37b in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the movable member 37b moves. Can be limited to movement in the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the crank 374b that transmits the driving force from the universal solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is a substantially L-shaped member, and the connecting pin 37b9 of the movable member 37b is attached to one end thereof. A penetrating portion 374b1 that can be inserted is formed, and a convex portion 374b2 is formed at the other end portion. Further, the slider 374a that transmits the driving force from the general electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is formed with a concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted, and the convex portion 374b2 is inserted into the concave portion 374a1. The slider 374a and the crank 374b are connected with each other. Further, a rotation shaft 374b3 along the vertical direction is formed in the bent portion of the crank 374b, and the crank 374b can rotate around the rotation shaft 374b3. The rotation shaft 374b3 is sandwiched from above and below by the rear base member 375 and is rotatably held.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the slider 374a has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 374a2 orthogonal to the vertical direction, a left wall portion 374a3 connected to the left end of the main body portion 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, and a main body portion. It is configured to include a front wall portion 374a4 connected to the front end of the 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, and a protruding piece 374a5 projecting forward from the front wall portion 374a4. The concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted is formed in the main body portion 374a2.

The left wall portion 374a3 of the slider 374a is engaged with the drive shaft 37c1 of the solenoid solenoid 37c, and the drive shaft 37c1 of the slider 374a is extended (in the present embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the right). Then, it is pushed by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the right, and when the drive shaft 37c1 retracts (in the case of this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the left), it is pulled by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the left. do.

As shown in FIG. 6B, a recessed portion 373j extending in the left-right direction is provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The protruding piece 374a5 of the slider 374a can be inserted into the recessed portion 373j, and the protruding piece 374a5 is inserted into the recessed portion 373j from the rear to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the slider 374a in the left-right direction. be able to. Further, the front wall portion 374a4 of the slider 374a comes into contact with the rear surface of the front base member 373 when the protruding piece 374a5 of the slider 374a is inserted into the recessed portion 373j of the front base member 373 from the rear. As a result, the front-rear position of the slider 374a with respect to the front base member 373 is set to a predetermined front-rear position.

When the movable member 37b is converted from the open state to the closed state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the normal electric solenoid 37c is extended. When the drive shaft 37c1 is extended, the slider 374a slides to the right and the crank 374b rotates counterclockwise with respect to the rotation shaft 374b3 when viewed from the upper surface side, so that the connection pin 983a faces forward. The movable member 37b protrudes forward. As a result, the movable member 37b is closed (the state shown in FIG. 5A), and the game ball cannot be won in the general electric winning opening 37d.

On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is converted from the closed state to the open state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the normal electric solenoid 37c is retracted. When the drive shaft 37c1 retracts, the slider 374a slides to the left, and the crank 374b rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 374b3 when viewed from the upper surface side, so that the connection pin 37b9 faces backward. The movable member 37b moves and retracts backward. As a result, the movable member 37b is in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 5B), and the game ball can be won in the general electric winning opening 37d.

9 to 12 show the rolling mode of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37. Note that, in FIGS. 9 to 12, some members are omitted for the sake of explanation. The game ball arriving at the normal variable winning device 37 (the game ball that has flowed into the starting point of the flow path 37f) is first guided diagonally to the rear side by the upstream side front wall protrusion 371d located on the upstream side, and then to the upstream side. It is guided diagonally to the front side by the rear wall protrusion 373d located at, and flows into the front end portion of the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b.

The game ball that has flowed into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b is guided diagonally to the rear side by the upstream side front wall protrusion 371d located on the downstream side, and then the rear wall protrusion 373d and the movable member 37b located on the downstream side. It is guided diagonally forward by the lower wall protrusion 37b5 and flows into the front end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b. That is, the game ball meanders back and forth and flows down the flow path 37f. As a result, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b as compared with the case where the flow path 37f has no starting parts such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the rear wall protrusion 373d and flows straight down. The time will be longer.

The game ball that has flowed into the first middle stage portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b collides with the protruding portion 371b and is guided to the rear side by the protruding portion 371b and the first middle stage portion 37b2 that is inclined backward. As shown in (a), it flows into the detour 37g from the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g. As shown in FIG. 10, inside the rear base member 375, a first guide piece 375d for guiding a game ball rolling a detour 37g from the first middle stage portion 37b2 to the lower stage portion 37b4, and a lower stage portion 37b4. A second guide piece 375e that guides the top from the rear side to the front side is provided. When the game ball rolls on the first middle stage portion 37b2 and flows into the rear base member 375 as shown in FIG. 10, it is guided to the right side by the first guide piece 375d as shown in FIG. 11 and is guided to the lower stage. It flows into the portion 37b4.

As shown in FIG. 12, the game ball that has flowed into the lower portion 37b4 of the movable member 37b is guided forward by the second guide piece 375e and the lower portion 37b4 that is inclined forward, and is shown in FIG. 9 (b). As such, it flows from the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g to the end point of the flow path 37f (the front end portion of the lower portion 37b4). Here, since the meandering left ridge portion 37b6 is formed in the first middle stage portion 37b2, the game ball meanders left and right and rolls the upstream portion of the detour 37g to the rear side. Further, since the lower right protrusion portion 37b7 is formed in the lower portion 37b4, the game ball meanders left and right and rolls forward in the downstream portion of the detour 37g.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the front base member 373 is provided with a partition wall 373k that separates the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g, and is upstream of the detour 37g in the rear end portion of the partition wall 373k. An intermediate protrusion 373k1 is formed in the portion corresponding to the portion. Therefore, the game ball collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces while rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle stage portion 37b2) of the detour 37g, and is once pushed back to the entrance 37g1 side. Is done. As a result, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is longer than in the case where the detour 37g has no starting parts such as the left protrusion 37b6, the right protrusion 37b7, and the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and rolls linearly. become longer.

As described above, the flow path 37f is provided with a lower wall protrusion 37b5, an upstream front wall protrusion 371d, a rear wall protrusion 373d, and the like, and the detour 37g is provided with a left protrusion 37b6 and the like. Since the starting portion such as the right protrusion portion 37b7 and the intermediate protrusion portion 373k1 is provided, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b becomes long. Further, by providing these starting parts, the rolling mode of the game ball rolling on the movable member 37b becomes various, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, by providing these starting parts, it is possible to shift the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the movable member 37b to the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is opened. It is possible to prevent ball clogging in the winning opening 37d.

The game ball arriving at the normal variable winning device 37 flows down the flow path 37f and first flows into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b. When the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flows down the flow path 37f and heads toward the protrusion 371b. If the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, if the movable member 37b is not opened before the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b, the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b and heads for the detour 37g.

Even if the movable member 37b is in the open state while the game ball is rolling the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the open state while the game ball is rolling the detour 37g. Even if not, the game ball continues to roll on the detour 37g and heads for the exit 37g2. Then, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d. On the other hand, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g and the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball does not flow into the general electric winning opening 37d and is normally a variable winning device 37. It becomes a game ball that has advanced to the outside (game area 32) and failed to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37.

Here, the intermediate protrusion 373k1 (see FIG. 6B) formed on the partition wall 373k of the front base member 373 has a function of meandering the game ball to prolong the residence time of the game ball on the movable member 37b. Not only that, it also has a function of ensuring a sufficient residence time even when the movable member 37b operates (moves back and forth) while the game ball is rolling around the detour 37g. For example, when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the game ball is rolling in the downstream portion (that is, on the lower portion 37b4) of the detour 37g, the game ball is with the movable member 37b. The game ball is rolling in the downstream part of the detour 37g because it is pulled back to the rear side (upstream side) in the downstream part of the detour 37g due to frictional resistance or contact with the right ridge portion 37b7 or the like. The residence time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is longer than when the movable member 37b does not change its state during the process.

On the other hand, for example, when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle stage portion 37b2) of the detour 37g, the game ball is movable. The game ball rolls on the upstream part of the detour 37g because it is pulled to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream part of the detour 37g due to frictional resistance with the member 37b or contact with the left protrusion 37b6 or the like. The residence time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is shorter than when the movable member 37b does not change its state during movement. On the other hand, since the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment is provided with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, the game ball moves to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. When pulled in, it collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces. That is, the game ball collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 while being drawn to the downstream side, and is once pushed back to the front side (upstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, so that the game ball is upstream of the detour 37g. Even when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the portion is rolling, it is possible to secure a sufficient residence time on the movable member 37b of the game ball.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a gaming board main body 80 in which a gaming area 32 in which a gaming ball can flow down is formed on the front side, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (the present embodiment). In the case of, the gaming machine is provided with a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80 and a gaming area. An opening / closing member (movable) that can be converted into a winning area (in the case of this embodiment, the Fuden winning opening 37d) in which a gaming ball flowing down 32 can be won, a closed state in which the winning area is closed, and an open state in which the winning area is opened. Member 37b), a flow path (flow path 37f) on which the game ball can roll, a retention area (detour 37g) for retaining the game ball, and a game ball rolling (flowing) in the flow path. It is provided with a guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides the region. The flow path is formed on the front surface side of the mounting wall portion by the opening / closing member in the closed state, and when the opening / closing member is in the open state, the flow path is formed when the opening / closing member is in the closed state. The game ball is configured to win a prize in the winning area through the space, and the retention area is formed on the rear surface side of the mounting wall portion regardless of the state of the opening / closing member, and has a plurality of communication ports communicating with the flow path. , The game ball that has been guided by the guiding unit and has flowed in from the flow path through the communication port (entrance 37g1) of one of the plurality of communication ports is combined with the one communication port of the plurality of communication ports. Is configured to be able to flow out into the flow path through different communication ports (exit 37g2).

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a gaming board main body 80 in which a gaming area 32 on which a gaming ball can flow down is formed, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (the present embodiment). In the case of, the gaming machine is provided with a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80 and a gaming area. The winning area (Public winning opening 37d) where the gaming ball flowing down 32 can win, and the closed state where the gaming ball cannot win or is difficult to win by sliding back and forth, and the gaming ball in the winning area. A slide member (movable member 37b) that can be converted into an open state in which a winning ball can be won, a first flow path (flow path 37f) and a second flow path (detour path 37g) in which a game ball can roll, and a first It is provided with a guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides a game ball that rolls (flows down) in the flow path to the second flow path. The first flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall portion by the slide member when the slide member is in the closed state, and when the slide member is in the open state, the slide member is in the closed state. In some cases, the game ball is configured to win a prize in the winning area through the space in which the first flow path is formed, and the second flow path is formed by the slide member of the mounting wall portion regardless of the state of the slide member. It is a communication port formed on the rear surface side, and both ends communicate with the first flow path, and is guided by the guiding portion and flows in from the first flow path through one of the communication ports (inlet 37g1) at both ends. The game ball is configured to be able to flow out to the first flow path through the communication port (outlet 37g2) of the other end of the both ends.

That is, the ordinary variation winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a detour 37g (retention region, second flow path) is added to the flow path 37f (flow path, first flow path). By adding the detour 37g in this way, the residence time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the movable member 37b (opening / closing member, slide member) becomes longer than when the detour 37g is not present. Therefore, it becomes easy for the game ball to win a prize in the winning opening (in the case of the present embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d), and the decrease of the gaming ball in the predetermined gaming state (in the case of the present embodiment, the time saving state) is suppressed. Because it becomes possible, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the normal variable winning device 37 having the game ball retention function is arranged in the right game area (the area on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32), the player can play the game ball in the right game area. You can enjoy the rolling mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the front decorative member 371 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and the rolling mode of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is sufficiently visible, so that the game ball is in the right game area. You can enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball more.

The variable winning device provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the ordinary variable winning device 37, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special variable winning device 38 may be used. Specifically, the variable prize-winning device is, for example, one in which a detour 37 g (retention region, second flow path) is added to the flow path 38f (flow path, first flow path) of the special variable prize-winning device 38. You may. Further, the opening / closing member that can be converted into a closed state in which the winning opening is closed and an open state in which the winning opening is opened is not limited to the slide member, and can be appropriately changed. In the case of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, a slide member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by sliding back and forth is provided as the opening / closing member. For example, as shown in FIG. 13B, it may be a rotating member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by rotating around the rotating shaft Z.

Further, the retention area for retaining the game ball is not limited to the detour 37g (second flow path), and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the retention region is, for example, a space in which the upstream portion and the downstream portion are not separated, that is, a space in which the partition wall 373k separating the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g is removed from the detour 37g. , The space may be a space in which a portion other than the front end portion (the portion separating the inlet 37g1 and the outlet 37g2) from the detour 37g is removed from the partition wall 373k.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the game ball flowing from the first flow path (flow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through one communication port (inlet 37g1) is the other communication. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball flows from the first flow path (flow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through the mouth (outlet 37g2), and one of them communicates with the slide member (movable member 37b). It is possible to configure the mouth so as to provide a height difference (in the case of the present embodiment, a step or an inclination) so that the mouth is arranged at a position higher than the other communication port. With this configuration, the game ball can smoothly roll on the first flow path (flow path 37f) and the second flow path (detour path 37g), so that the first flow path and the second flow path can be smoothly rolled. It is possible to prevent ball clogging.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the ball power of the game ball rolling on the first flow path (flow path 37f) or the second flow path (detour 37g) on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b). (In the case of the present embodiment, the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the left ridge 37b6, and the right ridge 37b7) can be provided. With such a configuration, the residence time in which the game ball stays on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b) can be further prolonged, so that a predetermined gaming state (in the case of the present embodiment, a time saving state) can be further extended. ) It is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls in the game, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, as a ball power suppressing portion, a lower wall protrusion 37b5, an upstream front wall protrusion 371d, a rear wall protrusion 373d, and other rising parts (convex parts) are provided on the flow path 37f, and a detour 37g is provided. A rising portion (convex portion) such as a left protrusion portion 37b6, a right protrusion portion 37b7, or an intermediate protrusion portion 373k1 is provided on the surface, but the ball power suppressing portion is not limited to these and can be appropriately changed. Further, as the ball power suppressing portion, a hidden portion (recess) may be provided in the flow path 37f or the detour 37g. Specifically, for example, a groove that meanders may be formed on the upper surface of the movable member 37b as a prone portion, and the game ball may be configured to roll while meandering along the groove. Further, as the ball power suppressing portion, undulations (both the undulating portion and the undulating portion) may be provided in the flow path 37f and the detour 37g so that the game ball rolls while meandering due to the undulations. Further, the ball power suppressing portion is not limited to the rising portion (convex portion) and the prone portion (concave portion), and can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game area 32, in addition to the retention device having the game ball retention function (ordinary variable winning device 37), the members for suppressing the ball power (obstacle nail, windmill, flow path 615, guide portion 616). Etc.), that is, a retention member having a game ball retention function is arranged. Therefore, since the game ball can be retained in the right game area by the retention device and the retention member, the rolling mode of the game ball in the right game area can be further enjoyed. In addition, a method of retaining the game ball by providing unevenness on the surface, a method of retaining the game ball by using a material having a high coefficient of friction, and a method of performing a constant operation with the driving force of a drive source (solenoid, etc.) are used for the game. A predetermined member or device may be provided with a game ball retention function by a method of retaining a ball, a method of retaining a game ball by providing a distribution device, or the like.

Further, since the normal variable winning device 37 can hold the game ball in the front-rear direction of the game machine 10 by the starting portion and the detour 37g, the holding member (a holding device other than the normal variable winning device 37 may be used). ) Is preferably configured so that the game ball can be retained in a direction other than the front-back direction (horizontal direction or vertical direction of the game machine 10). As a result, the pachinko machine can be three-dimensionally stagnated by the stagnant member (and / or the stagnant device other than the normal variable winning device 37) and the normal variable winning device 37, so that the stagnant time can be increased. At the same time, the interest in the rolling of the game ball is improved.

Further, an out opening 30c, a general winning opening 35, or the like (hereinafter referred to as "out opening 30c or the like") may be provided in the middle of the detour 37g. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not the game ball that has failed to win the normal variable winning device 37 comes out of the normal variable winning device 37. It is possible to adjust the rate so that it does not become too large, and to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the detour 37g.

Further, when the out port 30c or the like is provided in the middle of the detour 37g, the game ball may flow into the out port 30c or the like when the movable member 37b operates. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a through hole 37b11 is provided in a portion of the movable member 37b that forms a detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state (may be in the closed state), the positions of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c in the vertical direction coincide with each other (the through hole 37b11 is located directly above the out port 30c). When the game ball on the movable member 37b is in a state where it can flow into the out port 30c and the movable member 37b is in the closed state (may be in the open state), the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c move up and down. It is also possible to configure the game balls on the movable member 37b to be unable or difficult to flow into the out port 30c because the positions of the directions do not match (the through hole 37b11 is displaced from directly above the out port 30c). be.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. It also includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in reach and non-reach fluctuation display), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97, winning port switch 35a, and a plurality of (1 to x, 2 in this embodiment) large winning port switch arranged in the special variable winning device 38. 38a, connected to the gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, a negative logic signal such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches is input, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is input. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts to is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are the second inputs. Input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be obtained. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and is connected to the data bus 140 to output the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the special variable winning device 38 and the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37. An output port 134 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning opening 97 are not particularly limited. The switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a, the large winning opening switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and are non-contact to detect a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A type of magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 20.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A holdable FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. Is provided, and a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment. The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, a second specific gaming state ST3, a third specific gaming state ST4, and a fourth specific gaming state ST5. In addition to this, as the special gaming state, there are a first special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the main in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first start winning opening 36 by hitting left, and aiming for a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting winning opening 97 by hitting right. You can do it. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Further, in each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly advanced, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to play the game mainly in the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so that the game progresses. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. As will be described later, in this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST1. ..

The first specific gaming state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is high, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is a normal power support, there is also a time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special map is a special figure 1 variable display game, but the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the launch direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this first specific game state ST2, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST1, and a right-handed hit is performed to aim at the normal variation winning device 37, and the special figure 1 It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.

The second specific gaming state ST3 is the same as the first specific gaming state ST2 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state. In addition, in the third specific game state ST4, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is set to the probabilistic mode, and the end condition of the normal electric support is the start of the special figure change display game in which the fall lottery is won or the big hit is started. 1 It is the same as the specific game state ST2.

In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure probability is basically a high probability state. However, if the fall lottery is won during the 4th specific gaming state ST5, the 4th specific gaming state ST5 is maintained although the probability shifts to the low probability state. In addition, there is a short time to shorten the variable time of the special figure variable display game, which does not have the general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate the winning. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the small hit RUSH. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In this 4th specific game state ST5, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST1, and the special figure is aimed at the second start winning opening 97 by hitting right. 2 It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game. Since the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game, and the small hit has a higher probability of winning than the big hit, the small hit is higher in this fourth specific game state ST5. It occurs frequently and the player's ball increases. Since small hits occur frequently in this way, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

Of these five gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because it has a general electric support, and the first specific game state ST2 and the third specific game state ST4 are normal because they are in a high probability state. This is a state more advantageous to the player than the game state ST1 and the second special game state ST3. Further, since the fourth specific game state ST5 is a state in which the player's ball is increased due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific It is a state more advantageous for the player than the game state ST4.

The transition of the game state is the end of the special game state based on the derivation of the special result, the digestion of the specified number of games, the winning of the fall lottery which is the transition lottery to the low probability state, and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game which is a big hit. Is done by. Basically, if the special result that triggered the start of the special gaming state is a probabilistic jackpot that makes it a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 and the special If it is a normal jackpot that is set to a low probability state after the end of the gaming state, the process shifts to the second specific gaming state ST3.

When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (number of times of support) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the fall lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the second specific game state ST3. In this case, the period of staying in the second specific game state ST3 is the period from the end of the special game state to the execution of 100 special figure variation display games including the number of games executed in the first specific game state ST2. .. Since the effect mode of the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 is the same chance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the mode has changed.

If the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2 and the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the special result, the game shifts to the third specific game state ST4. Here, since the effect mode is the probability variation mode, the player can grasp that it is in a high probability state. If the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, if the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is started without winning the fall lottery in the third specific game state ST4, the game shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5.

The fourth specific game state ST4 stays only during the period in which the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, is executed. In the case of the special figure variable display game in which the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the period during which the special gaming state based on the small hit is executed after the small hit is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game is special figure 1. Since the variable display game is interrupted, the player will stay for a period that is the sum of the variable time and the interruption period of the special figure 1 variable display game.

By providing the fourth specific game state ST5, it is possible to provide a period for increasing the player's ball by a small hit before the special game state based on the big hit is started, and in the fourth specific game state ST5. By increasing the number of balls held in the game and the subsequent increase in the number of balls held in the special gaming state, it is possible to give a lot of benefits to the player. In particular, in the situation where the transition to the 4th specific game state ST5 is possible, the next big hit is not derived even if the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times after the special game state based on the probability change big hit is completed. It is a state, and by making it possible to give a profit to the player in such a situation, it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the big hit is not derived. On the contrary, it is possible to have an interest that is not found in conventional gaming machines, which is expected to be in a fitted state.

22 and 23 show an example of the progress of the game. FIG. 22A shows a case where the fall lottery is won before the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game is executed after the probability variation jackpot occurs. In this example, first, the normal game state ST1 is in a low probability state and there is no general electric support, and the effect is a normal mode effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. The result of the special figure 1 variable display game executed in this normal game state ST1 is a probabilistic jackpot that makes the first special result, and is in the first special game state after the end of the special figure 1 variable display game (t11). .. In the first special gaming state, the special variable prize device 38 is opened and a large number of prize balls can be obtained. In addition, the effect state is the first special game effect corresponding to the first special game state.

When this first special gaming state ends, it becomes the first specific gaming state ST2 which has a high probability state and has a general electric support (t12). In the first specific game state ST2, since it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is shorter than that of the normal game state ST1, and a large number of special figure variable display games can be executed in a short time. In this first specific game state, the effect state is the chance mode effect.

In this example, the fall lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, and based on this, the state shifts to the low probability state and becomes the second specific game state ST3 (t13). Fuden support will remain as it is. Since the second specific game state ST3 also facilitates winning in the normal variable winning device 37, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is shorter than that of the normal game state ST1, and a large number of special figure variable display games can be executed in a short time. Even in this second specific game state, the effect state is a state in which the chance mode effect is maintained, and it is difficult to grasp that the fall lottery has been won.

After that, when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end (t12) of the first special game state reaches the specified number in the second specific game state ST3, the normal electric support is terminated and the normal game state ST1 is set (. t14). In this example, the probability state is already in the low probability state, so the low probability state is maintained.

FIG. 22B shows a case where the fall lottery was not won even if the specified number of special figure fluctuation display games were executed after the probability variation jackpot occurred. The probability variation jackpot is derived in the normal game state ST1 to become the first special game state (t21), and after the end of the first special game state until the first specific game state ST2 is reached (t22) is the same as in FIG. 22 (a). Is.

In this example, the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the first special game state (t22) while the first specific game state ST2 remains is the specified number ( Here, it has reached 100 times) (t23). In this case, after the end of the special figure variation display game, which is the specified number, the game shifts to the third specific gaming state ST4.

Even in the third specific game state ST4, there is a high probability state and there is a general electric support, and in the second specific game state ST3, it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. do. Further, in the third specific game state, the effect state becomes the probabilistic mode effect, and it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the player is in the high probability state. After that, when the fall lottery is won in the third specific gaming state ST4, the low probability state is entered, the normal electric support is terminated, and the normal gaming state ST1 is entered (t24).

FIG. 23A shows a case where the first special result is derived in the first specific gaming state ST2. In this case, even if the special figure fluctuation display game that is the first special result is started (t31), the probability state is left as the high probability state and the normal electric support is also left as it is. In addition, the production state is also the same as the chance mode production. Then, when the special figure variation display game ends, the special gaming state is started (t23). With the start of the special game state, the probability shifts to the low probability state and the Fuden support ends (t32). Further, in this example, a normal jackpot that makes a first special result is derived, and when the first special gaming state based on the first special result ends, a second specific gaming state that has a low probability state and has a normal electric support is provided. It becomes ST3 (t33).

Similarly, when the first special result is derived in the second specific game state ST3, the probability state remains the low probability state even if the special figure variation display game that becomes the first special result is started. Fuden support is also left as it is. Furthermore, the production state is also left as the chance mode production. Then, with the start of the special gaming state, the low probability state is maintained and the Fuden support ends. That is, even if the special figure variation display game that is the first special result is started in the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3, the game state does not change.

FIG. 23B shows a case where the first special result is derived in the third specific gaming state ST4. In this case, when the special figure variation display game that is the first special result is started, the probability state remains the high probability state, but the normal electric support ends, and the fourth specific game state ST5 is reached (t41). .. When the normal power support ends, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second start winning opening 97, and in the fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, the effect state is a small hit RUSH effect corresponding to the fourth specific game state. This fourth specific game state ST5 is continued until the end of the special figure 1 variable display game.

The probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game. In the example of FIG. 23 (b), after the start (t41) of the fourth specific gaming state ST5, the second start winning opening 97 is won and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t42). This special figure 2 variable display game ends with a missed result. After that, a special figure 2 variable display game is started by newly winning a prize in the second start winning opening 97 (t43). In this special figure 2 variable display game, the result is a small hit that makes a second special result, and the second special gaming state is set upon the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t45 to t46). In this second special gaming state, the special variable prize device 38 is opened and a prize ball can be obtained.

The special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted due to the derivation of a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (t44), and the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the second special gaming state (t46). .. Since the variable time does not progress during the interruption, the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game is the stop display time of the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game in addition to the time set at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. And will be extended by the period of the second special game state. Further, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the first special result started in the third specific game state ST4 is longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game which is the first special result in the first specific game state ST2. It is said to be long. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of the fourth specific gaming state ST5.

After the second special game state is completed, when a game ball is newly won in the second start winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (t47). After that, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed a plurality of times and the second special game state is generated, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends, the first special result is stopped and displayed (t48), and when the stop display time ends, the special figure 1 variation display game ends (t49). Along with this, the fourth specific gaming state ST5 ends and the first special gaming state starts (t49). Further, as the first special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with the missing result (t48).

In this way, by setting the fourth specific gaming state ST5 before the first special gaming state, the prize ball that can be obtained based on the small hit generated in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 and the first special gaming state. The prize balls that can be obtained in the player can obtain a large number of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), in the third specific game state ST4, the general electric support is terminated with the start of the special figure fluctuation display game which is a big hit, and is shown in FIG. 22 (b). As described above, the change in the Fuden support is the same as when the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that either the fall lottery winning or the big hit winning event, which has a significantly different value for the player, will occur due to the end of the hobby support in the third specific game state ST4. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving a feeling of anxiety and expectation to the player.

In particular, it is constant from the start of the special figure variation display game regardless of whether the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit in the third specific game state ST4 is started or the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4. By executing a common transition effect for the time, it is possible to make it difficult to immediately grasp that the player has won the fall lottery or that it is a big hit, and it is possible to arouse the anxiety and anticipation of the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 24 shows an example of the display in the display device 41. FIG. 24A shows an example of the display in the normal game state ST1. In the center of the display area of the display device 41, the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit for displaying the decoration special figure variation display game related to the special figure 1 variation display game among the first decoration games forming the decoration special figure variation display game. 85a is provided. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of a combination of three identification information, and one of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss is displayed according to the result of the special figure variation display game. In the normal game state ST1, the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation, so the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the irregular variable special figure 2 variable display game is not displayed but is displayed. Is also good.

Further, in the lower center of the display area, a first storage display unit 83a for displaying the decorative special drawing start storage display corresponding to the first start storage is provided. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the order of storage. Here, there are three first start memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode. In addition, in FIG. 24A, a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is performed for the first start memory having the first digestion order.

On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, an execution storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start storage corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. The decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the first storage display unit 83a is transferred to the running storage display unit 84 at the start of the special figure variation display game, and the result or variation of the special figure variation display game to be executed. The pattern and the like are suggested by the display mode.

A first start storage number display unit 86a for displaying the first start storage number is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. The first start memory number display unit 86a displays the number of the first start memories numerically, and FIG. 24 (a) shows that there are three first start memories. Further, in the upper left portion of the display area, an effect mode display unit 87 for displaying the current effect mode is provided. Here, it is shown that the mode is the normal mode, that is, the normal game state ST1.

In this embodiment, since the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variation display game is not generated, the start memory display unit for displaying the second start memory is not provided, but the special figure 2 variation is provided. When the second start storage for suspending the start of the display game is to be generated, the second start memory is displayed in the same manner as the first storage display unit 83a and the first start storage number display unit 86a.

Further, although the background display and the arrangement position of each display unit are different in the display in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, they are basically the same as the display in FIG. 24 (a). The same display is performed.

FIG. 24B shows an example of the display in the fourth specific gaming state ST5. In the upper right part of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first start memory number display unit 86a that displays the number of first start memories, and a special figure 1 variable display among the first decorative game that makes a decorative special figure variable display game. Special figure 1 variable display game related to special figure 1 variable display game among the 1st decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a that displays the decorative special figure variable display game and the 2nd decorative game that makes up the decorative special figure variable display game. A second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a for displaying the above is provided.

The first start memory number display unit 86a displays the number of the first start memory numerically, and FIG. 24 (b) shows that the first start memory is 0. The first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85c displays the decorative special figure variable display game by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. The second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a displays the decorative special figure variable display game by displaying a plurality of identification information in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the information. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of one identification information, and one of "◯" indicating a big hit, "Δ" indicating a small hit, and "x" indicating a loss is displayed.

In the lower right of the display area, there is a first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b that displays the special figure 2 variable display game related to the special figure 2 variable display game among the first decorative games that make up the decorative special figure variable display game. A second decorative figure 2 game display unit 88b for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game related to the special figure 2 variable display game among the second decorative games forming the decorative special figure variable display game is provided.

The first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b displays the decoration special figure variation display game in the same manner as the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a. Further, the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b displays the decorative special figure variation display unit in the same manner as the second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a. In this embodiment, since the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated, the second start memory number display unit for displaying the number of the second start memories is not provided. , Special figure 2 When the second start memory for suspending the start of the variable display game is generated, the second start memory for displaying the number of the second start memory is displayed in the same manner as the first start memory number display unit 86a. A number display unit is provided.

Further, in the center of the display area, an effect display unit 89 for displaying an effect by a character or the like is provided. The effect display unit 89 mainly displays the effect according to the variation pattern and the result of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation, and the player can display the effect according to the effect display to show the progress of the special figure variation display game. And the result can be grasped.

In the fourth specific game state ST5, unlike the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 of FIG. 24 (a), the display that displays the identification information in a large size is not performed, but the result mode is only when the result is derived. May be displayed larger. For example, the identification information is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area from the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a or the first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b corresponding to the special figure variation display game from which the result is derived. Then, when the stop display time ends, the original display unit is displayed so that the identification information is reduced. Even during such display, the display of the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a and / or the first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b is maintained.

The effect mode display unit 87 indicates that the small hit RUSH mode is set, that is, the fourth specific gaming state ST5. Further, in the lower left of the display area, a prize ball number display unit 91 showing the number of prize balls acquired in the second special game state during the execution of the second special game state is provided. Here, it is shown that 30 prize balls have been won in the second special game state. Further, in the lower left of the display area, the cumulative number of prize balls obtained from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 accompanying the end of the third specific game state ST4 to the transition to the first special game state is shown. A display unit 92 is provided. Here, it is shown that 600 prize balls have been won so far.

In addition, the total number of prize balls displayed in the total prize ball display unit 92 is also set to add the number of prize balls acquired in the first special game state, and the first special game is started from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 accompanying the end of the third specific game state ST4. The number of prize balls acquired by the end of the state may be shown. Further, the number of prize balls acquired in the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the third specific gaming state ST4 is also added, and is acquired from the end of the normal gaming state ST1 to the return to the normal gaming state ST1. You may indicate the number of prize balls you have won. However, in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, although a certain number of prize balls are acquired, the possessed balls are consumed more than that, so that the first specific game state ST2 , The number of prize balls in the second specific gaming state ST3 and the third specific gaming state ST4 may not be added.

FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (i) show an example of a transition effect executed when a fall lottery is won or a big hit is obtained in the third specific game state ST4. When the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the variable display is started on the decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85, and then the transition effect is performed as shown in FIG. 24 (d). It will be started. This transition effect is an effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight each other, and the result of the special figure variation display game and the presence / absence of a fall lottery are notified based on the result of the battle. Further, the decorative special figure variation display game and the start memory display are performed in the same display as that shown in FIG. 24 (b).

As shown in FIG. 24 (e), the effect of fighting the characters is performed, and the result of the fight is shown after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the result is missed or a small hit in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 24 (f). After that, the process shifts to the production of the normal gaming state ST1 as shown in FIG. 24 (a). In addition, an instruction is displayed instructing the player to return to the left-handed strike when the production shifts to the normal game state ST1. On the other hand, if the result is a big hit in the special figure variation display game, the result is that the ally character 89a wins as shown in FIG. 24 (g). After that, the process shifts to the production of the fourth specific gaming state ST5 as shown in FIG. 24 (b).

Further, when the result is missed or a small hit in the special figure fluctuation display game without winning the fall lottery, the transition effect may be performed as a so-called ghost effect. In this case, after the character fights as shown in FIG. 24 (e), the result of the draw is made as shown in FIG. 24 (h). After that, the process returns to the production of the third specific gaming state ST4 as shown in FIG. 24 (c).

The timing of transition to the fourth specific gaming state is set at the start of the special figure variation display game that is a big hit, but it is sufficient as long as the special figure variation display game that is a big hit is being executed, and even after the start time. good. Further, regardless of the execution of the special figure variation display game that is a big hit, the transition to the fourth specific gaming state may be made when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Predetermined transition conditions include winning a transition lottery, executing a predetermined number of games, and deriving a specific result in a special figure variation display game.

Further, when a plurality of second start memories, which are the execution rights of the special figure 2 variable display game, can be stored, whether or not a big hit is made before the start of the corresponding special figure 2 variable display game for the second start memory. If it is found that there is a second start memory that is a big hit, the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory that is a big hit is entered into the fourth specific gaming state. You may make the transition.

In addition, although the high-probability state is terminated by winning the fall lottery, the high-probability state may be terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state. However, the high probability state may be set until the next derivation of the first special result.

From the above, a game in which a variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The machine can be converted into a control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won. , The normal variable winning device 37 capable of generating the execution right of the variable display game by winning, and the control means sets the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 to the first operating state and the first operating state. A low-probability state and a high-probability state higher than the low-probability state are defined as a second operating state in which a prize is easily won and a probability state in which the result of the variable display game is a special result controlled by any of the operating states. It is set to either one, and when it is in the high probability state, it is configured to perform a fall lottery to shift to the low probability state every time the variable display game is executed, and when it is in the second operation state, the fall lottery is won. In that case, it is possible to shift to the first operating state, and even if the fall lottery is not won in the second operating state, when the variable display game with a special result is executed, the first It is possible to shift to one operating state. Therefore, the change in the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 can be made the same between the case where the fall lottery is won and the case where the big hit is derived, making it difficult to distinguish, and improving the interest of the game. can.

Further, the control means can set the second operation state in a predetermined period from the end of the special gaming state to the execution of the variable display game a predetermined number of times, and after the lapse of the predetermined period, the control means has a high probability state. In a certain case, the second operating state can be set, and in a predetermined period, even if the fall lottery is won in the case of the second operating state, the first operating state is not entered and the second operating state is set. Even if you execute a variable display game that has a special result without winning the fall lottery, you will not shift to the first operation state, and if the high probability state continues after the lapse of a predetermined period, you will win the fall lottery. This means that the game shifts to the first operating state based on the condition of either the case where the game is executed or the case where the variable display game having a special result is executed without winning the fall lottery. Therefore, the change in the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 can be made the same between the case where the fall lottery is won and the case where the big hit is derived, making it difficult to distinguish, and improving the interest of the game. can.

In addition, the first starting winning opening 36, which is the starting winning opening, and the starting winning position located on the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37 so as to be able to win a prize via a route that can win the normal variable winning device 37. The second start winning opening 97 and the control means execute the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. , The second variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, and the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and at least the second variable display game can be executed. The result of the game has a second special result in which the probability of being derived is constant regardless of the game state, and the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first variable display game. When the second special gaming state that is advantageous to the person is executed, the first variable display game is interrupted during the execution of the second special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to execute a large number of second variable display games having a high probability of small hits based on the start of the special figure variable display game that is a big hit, and it is possible to give profits to the player. Can be improved.

Further, in the high probability state, the execution time of the variable display game is made shorter than in the low probability state, and the special result is the first special result that can change the probability derived according to the gaming state. , There is a second special result in which the probability of being derived regardless of the game state is constant, and the probability that the second special result is derived in the second variable display game is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. With a high probability, when the result of the variable display game is the first special result, the first special gaming state is executed as a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the result of the variable display game is the second special result. In that case, the second special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first variable display game, and the second special game When the state is executed, the first variable display game is interrupted while the second special gaming state is being executed, and the first variable display game is restarted when the second special gaming state ends. It will be configured. Therefore, it is possible to execute a large number of second variable display games having a high probability of small hits based on the start of the special figure variable display game that is a big hit, and it is possible to give profits to the player. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the other variable display game becomes the second special result and the second special gaming state is executed during the execution of one variable display game, the other variable display game is executed. One of the variable display games is interrupted from the time when the variable time of the second special result is stopped and displayed to the end of the second special gaming state, but the stopped display time of the other variable display game is interrupted. One of the variable display games may be interrupted from the time when the second special gaming state is started to the end of the second special gaming state. The same applies to the modified examples described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the other variable display game becomes the first special result and the first special gaming state is executed during the execution of one variable display game, the other variable display game is executed. When the fluctuation time of the first special result is stopped and displayed, one of the fluctuation display games is forcibly stopped due to the missed result, but the stop display time of the other fluctuation display game ends. When the first special gaming state is started, one of the variable display games may be forcibly stopped as a result of being missed. The same applies to the modified examples described later.

Further, the start time of interruption or forced stop may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and it is selected from the time when the special result is stopped and displayed and the time when the special gaming state is started. You can do it. Further, the interruption or the start of the forced stop is not limited to the time when the special result is stopped and displayed or the special gaming state is started, and may be started at other timings. The end of the interruption may be a timing other than the end of the special gaming state. Further, even when the result of the other variable display game becomes the first special result and the first special gaming state is executed during the execution of one variable display game, the interrupted state may be generated. Further, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether to suspend or forcibly stop when the first special result or the second special result is derived.

Since the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a game ball retention function of retaining a game ball on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, the game ball is placed on the movable member 37b while the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball can be swallowed (the game ball staying on the movable member 37b is dropped to win a prize in the general electric winning opening 37d). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the ordinary variable winning device 37, that is, the game balls that cannot win the general electric winning opening 37d even though they have arrived at the ordinary variable winning device 37.

Further, since the second start winning opening 97 is arranged below the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball that fails to win the normal variable winning device 37 can win the second starting winning opening 97. .. In the case of the present embodiment, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 reduces the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game state in which the main starting area is the normal electric winning opening 37d (No. 1). 1 In the specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4), it is possible to make it difficult for the second start winning opening 97 to win a prize.

The main starting area of the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the third specific gaming state ST4 is the general electric winning opening 37d, and the main starting area of the fourth specific gaming state ST5 is the second starting winning opening. Since it is 97, it is impossible to win a prize in the second start winning opening 97 in the case of the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the third specific gaming state ST4, that is, in the high / low probability support state. It is (difficult), and it is preferable that the second starting winning opening 97 can be won only in the case of the fourth specific gaming state ST5, that is, when there is no high probability support. When a game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97 and a small hit occurs in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, the ball output rate is calculated from the design value. There is a risk of large divergence.

The winning rate for the ordinary variable winning device 37 can be calculated using the following formula (1).
Winning rate [%] = Number of game balls that have won in the Fuden winning opening 37d / Number of game balls that have arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 (game balls that have flowed into the starting point of the flow path 37f) x 100 ... (1) )
In the present embodiment, the second starting winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right of the game area 32, and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is arranged above the second starting winning opening 97. Since the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37. Further, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to the start of the operation and the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 (the game ball rolls from the start point to the end point of the flow path 37f). By adjusting (time required for) etc., the failure to win the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure is made almost 0, that is, the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure is reached. It is also possible to make the winning rate almost 100%. By setting the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure to almost 100%, it is possible to make it difficult for the second starting winning opening 97 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37 to win a prize. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the desired performance (ball ejection rate).

On the other hand, when there is no high probability support (4th specific game state ST5), the normal variable winning device 37 does not open, so that the game ball can be won in the 2nd starting winning opening 97, and a small hit RUSH is realized. can do. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to configure the second start winning opening 97 to win a prize only when there is no high probability support (fourth specific gaming state ST5), and the desired performance can be realized. ..

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the normal map fluctuation time (that is, the normal map fluctuation time) is 200 msec, and the normal map stop time (that is, the normal map display time) is 100 ms. Yes, the time for operating the normal power (that is, the sum of the total normal power release time and the total wait time for each hit state of the normal figure) is 5800 msec, and the ending time (that is, the remaining normal power ball). When the sum of the processing time and the ending time of the normal figure is 700 msec, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is at least 1000 msec (= 700 msec + 200 msec + 100 msec). In this case, the length of the flow path 37f and the detour 37g, the number and shape of the undulations provided on the flow path 37f and the detour 37g, etc. are appropriately designed, and the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is 1000 msec. By approaching to, it becomes possible to make the winning rate of the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure almost 100%.

Of course, as in the example shown here, the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal drawing becomes almost 100% according to the time from the end of the operation to the start of the operation of the movable member 37b. , The residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be set, or conversely, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure according to the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The time from the end of the operation to the start of the operation of the movable member 37b may be set so that the winning rate of the movable member 37b becomes almost 100%.

That is, in the present embodiment, one of the residence time of the game ball in the ordinary variable winning device 37 and the time from the end of the operation to the start of the operation of the movable member 37b is the time corresponding to the other (substantially the same as the other). By setting the time, the time equal to or longer than the other, etc.), the winning rate of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 can be increased. In addition, by increasing the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 by increasing the part that suppresses the ball power such as the rising part and the prone part, it operates from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b during the interval of the normal electric power. (Until the start), more game balls can be retained on the movable member 37b, and when the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game balls accumulated on the movable member 37b are awarded a prize. Therefore, the winning rate of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ordinary variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, and a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38 are arranged below the ordinary variable winning device 37. Therefore, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the second start winning opening 97 or the special variable winning device 38 should be longer than when the normal variable winning device 37 does not have the game ball retention function. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an unrecommended striking method and increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening (opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990).

Left-handedness is recommended in the normal game state ST1, but when the game ball is hit right-handed in the normal game state ST1 and the game ball wins the second start winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. In the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set to be longer than that in the second specific game state, but by performing aiming (stop hitting, timing hitting, etc.), a big winning opening It is possible to aim for a prize. If the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state ST1. By aiming at the start of the small hit game state (start of opening the large winning opening) and starting to hit the game ball, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small hit game state. It is possible to make a prize in the winning opening. Therefore, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility that a non-recommended striking method (right striking) is performed.

On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has the game ball retention function, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state, even if the game ball is started to be hit at the same time as the start of the small hit game state (start of opening the large winning opening), the game ball is started. Cannot reach the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small hit game state. Therefore, since it is useless to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, it is not recommended in the hitting method of executing the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, that is, in the normal game state ST1. It is possible to avoid being hit. As described above, according to the present embodiment, an illegal winning by capture, that is, a small hit is generated by a right-handed hit in the normal game state ST1, and a small hit is won by aiming (to the large winning opening during the small hit period). It is possible to prevent winning).

Further, when the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, it prevents illegal winning due to capture (avoid unrecommended hitting methods). ), It was necessary to set a limit on the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, such as performing the short opening only once. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has the game ball retention function, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, even if the large winning opening is opened multiple times during the small hit game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state. can.

Here, for example, the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, and arrives at the special variable winning device 38 after the game ball is launched. It takes about 2 seconds. In such a case, if the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 25 (b), that is, the pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is performed only once, the small hit Even if you aim to hit the game ball at the start of the game state, the small hit game state is finished by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38, so the game ball will be in the big winning opening. I can't win.

On the other hand, in such a case, the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. 25 (c), that is, "0.5 second open state → 1.0 second closed state → 0". If the pattern is "5 seconds open state-> 1.0 seconds closed state-> 0.5 seconds open state", the small hit game state can be achieved by aiming at the start of the small hit game state and starting to hit the game ball. Since the game ball can be delivered to the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the game ball, the game ball can win a prize in the large winning opening. Therefore, in such a case, if an opening pattern for opening the large winning opening a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern for the large winning opening in the small hit game state, it is not possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. On the other hand, as an opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, an opening pattern in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times is adopted, that is, the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state is increased. If it can be done, it is possible to improve the small hit performance (increase the number of balls to be ejected in the small hit game state), but it cannot be realized due to illegal winning by capture.

In order to both prevent illegal winning due to capture and improve small hit performance, a retention device that delays the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (in the present embodiment). In this case, a normal variable winning device 37) or the like will be provided. If the retention device delays by 2 seconds (a delay time of 2 seconds is given), it will take about 4 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38.

As a result, the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. 25 (c), that is, "0.5 second open state → 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state". In the case of the pattern of "→ 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state", it takes 3.5 seconds (= 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.0) until the operation of the opening / closing member 990 ends. It takes about 4 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38. That is, in the present embodiment, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state. In addition, it can be configured to determine the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 according to the opening / closing pattern (opening pattern of the large winning opening) of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state.

The time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (this) rather than the time from the start of operation to the end of operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state (3.5 seconds in this example). In the example, by lengthening (about 4 seconds), even if you aim to hit the game ball at the same time as the start of the small hit game state, the small hit game will be played by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. The state is finished. Therefore, even if an opening pattern in which the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by providing a retention device or the like that gives a delay time to the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38, while preventing illegal winning due to capture. , Small hit performance can be improved. Further, the longer the delay time is, the longer the total time of the small hit game state can be extended, so that the small hit performance can be improved. Further, the longer the delay time is, the longer it takes to arrive at the special variable winning device 38, so that it becomes difficult to illegally win a prize by capturing. Further, providing such a retention device or the like is effective not only for aiming during normal electric support but also for aiming during small hit RUSH. In addition, the longer the delay time, the more difficult it is to aim, so it is necessary to keep hitting, and stable data can be acquired even in the operation of the hall.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, a right-handed hit is made to win a prize in the second start winning opening 97 to generate a small hit, and then the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 and is normally used. When the figure is correct, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game balls are arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. It is possible to make it difficult for the special variable winning device 38 to win a prize. That is, according to the present embodiment, it takes time for the game ball to arrive at the special variable winning device 38 due to the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37, so that it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. Furthermore, the game ball retention function of the normal variable prize device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable prize device 37 (it can be difficult to make the special variable prize device 38 win), so that the illegal prize can be won by capture. The damage caused by can be minimized.

In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state, it is possible not only to improve the small hit performance (increase the number of balls to be ejected in the small hit gaming state), but also to open the large winning opening 38d. Since it is possible to increase the number of times, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball flows into the large winning opening 38d, and the interest of the game is improved. The time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 is about 2 seconds when there is no retention device and about 4 seconds when there is a retention device. The arrival time is just the average value of the measured values, and of course, there is an error in the actual arrival time.

Further, the alert (error notification) to be performed when the player is hit right in the normal game state may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have won the second start winning opening 97 is satisfied. This may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is satisfied, or the number of game balls that have won in the second start winning opening 97 and the normal number of game balls have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. This may be performed when the condition that the sum with the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in interest and a decrease in motivation to play because the player is immediately alerted even if he accidentally hits the right side. Further, in the normal game state, the counter for counting the game balls that have won in the second start winning opening 97 and the counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 are configured to be cleared at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, it may be configured to update by -1 each time the first start winning opening 36 is won.

FIG. 26 shows the probabilities of big hits and small hits, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, and the specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, are shown in the figures. The probability is as shown in 26 (a). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state becomes high after the end of the special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the probability variation jackpot, and when the fall lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed is won, the probability state becomes low. It is configured to be. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 26 (b). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate.

Further, FIG. 26 (c) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the distribution probability of each jackpot type, and FIG. 26 (d) shows the selection in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. The possible small hit types, the opening time, the number of opening times, and the distribution probability of each small hit type are shown. It should be noted that the small hit may not be provided in the special figure 1 and may be set only in the special figure 2.

27 and 28 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 27A shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is out of order in the normal gaming state (low probability state). In the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation. In order for the player to proceed with the game according to this design, for Special Figure 2, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected regardless of which variation pattern is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 The execution of the variable display game is made inefficient in terms of time, and in the normal gaming state, the player is made to proceed mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game.

FIG. 27B shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is different in the specific gaming state (first specific gaming state ST2, second specific gaming state ST3, third specific gaming state ST4, fourth specific gaming state ST5). showed that. In this case, as the variation pattern without reach in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the variation pattern having a shorter variation time than in the normal gaming state is selected. In the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the third specific gaming state ST4, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the main variation, and the variation time is shortened as compared with the normal gaming state. Further, for the special figure 2 variable display game, only the variable pan without reach can be selected. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the main variation, and the variation time is shortened as compared with the normal game state.

FIG. 28A shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in the normal gaming state. For the special figure 2, only the fluctuation pattern that does not generate the reach state can be selected. In the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit is longer than the variable time which can be selected when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit.

FIG. 28B shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. Special Figure 1 For a variable display game, a variable time variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal gaming state is selected. Further, for the special figure 2 variable display game, a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time equivalent to the SP3 reach of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

FIG. 28 (c) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in the third specific gaming state. Special Figure 1 A very long fluctuation time is set for the fluctuation display game. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient time after shifting to the fourth specific gaming state, and it is possible to secure an opportunity to acquire a prize ball by a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game. Further, the longer the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is, the more chances of small hits are generated, so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained increases, which is advantageous for the player. For this reason, it is possible to select a plurality of types of time having different lengths as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the profits that can be obtained may be different to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game has a short variable time. In the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation occurs in the third specific game state, even if the game shifts to the fourth specific game state, the small hit cannot be frequently generated, so that the big hit can be swiftly made. It is designed to be derived. Since the 4th specific game state shifts when the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit in the 3rd specific game state is started, basically, the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is newly started. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in the fourth specific game state is not specified.

FIG. 28 (d) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in the normal gaming state. As for the special figure 2, the reach state is not generated, and the long fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. FIG. 28 (e) shows changes in the case where the result is a small hit in the specific gaming state (first specific gaming state ST2, second specific gaming state ST3, third specific gaming state ST4, fourth specific gaming state ST5). The pattern is shown. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected.

FIG. 29 shows a special variable winning device in a special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening and closing pattern of is shown. When the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1. In the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, the opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). After that, the rounds in which the interval period of 2000 ms and the open period of 29000 ms are set are repeated up to 10 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms has elapsed, the special gaming state ends. Further, when the jackpot type is a 4R probability variable jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 2. This opening / closing pattern differs from the opening / closing pattern of the 10R jackpot only in the number of rounds.

The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening / closing pattern is the time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the latter half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the latter half is the ending time.

The opening / closing pattern of the small hit is a fanfare period, an opening period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and the special variable winning device 38 is according to this. Is released. In addition, in both the opening and closing patterns of big hits and small hits, if a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point. The opening time of the small hit is shorter than the opening time of the big hit, and the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the special gaming state is small. Therefore, the small hit has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the big hit. That is, as special results, a first special result (big hit) capable of generating a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the gaming value that can be given to the player is lower than that of the first special gaming state are generated. The possible second special result (small hit) is included.

The opening / closing pattern of the small hit has different lengths of the fanfare period and the ending period depending on whether or not it is in the fourth specific gaming state, and is set to be longer in the case of the fourth specific gaming state. In the fourth specific game state, these times are secured in order to perform effects such as notification regarding small hits and notification of the number of prize balls by winning a prize. In addition, since small hits occur frequently in the 4th specific game state, the time required to digest the special game state is lengthened by lengthening the fanfare period and the ending period so that the number of prize balls per unit time does not become too large. I have to. Further, the opening time of the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the fourth specific gaming state. Here, in the opening / closing pattern of each small hit, only one opening is performed, but it is also possible to perform a plurality of opening. In this case, the interval time for temporarily closing the special variable winning device 38 is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the specific gaming state.

Although it is said that both the fanfare period and the ending period are different depending on whether or not the fourth specific gaming state is reached, only one of them may be different. Further, regarding the opening / closing pattern of the big hit, one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period may be different depending on whether or not the fourth specific gaming state is reached.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97, and the special variable winning device 38 are either won, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and are discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning slot 35, the first starting winning slot 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning slot 97, and the special variable winning slot 38, the number of winning slots is increased according to the type of winning slot. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 19) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed) to obtain the first starting winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for a prize in the general prize opening 35 arranged on the left side of the game, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the normal variable winning device 37 are special. It is possible to aim for winning in the variable winning device 38, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 arranged above the second starting winning opening 97.

The winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. As one start storage, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) is stored as a limit. Special Figure 1 When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 while the variable display game can be started and the first starting memory number is 0, the starting right is generated. Along with this, the first start memory is stored, the number of the first start memory is added by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately started based on the first start memory. At this time, the first start memory is stored. The number is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is added by 1 and the first start memory is one. It will be remembered. Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the end of the previous special figure 1 variable display game or the end of the special game state) in the state where the first start storage number is 1 or more, the first The start memory number is subtracted by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting opening 3 switch 97a provided inside. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state has been set. In addition, even if the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97, the second start memory does not occur. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second start memory is temporarily generated for the convenience of processing, but the second start memory is Since it will be digested immediately, the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a big hit random value, a big hit symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 19). The special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times for the first start memory). Then, the stored number of the special figure start storage is displayed on the storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Decorative special figure Displayed as a start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the first start memory, and is special based on winning a prize in the second start winning opening 97. FIG. 2 A special figure 2 variation display game is played on the display 52 (second variation display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure fluctuation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball to the general electric winning opening 37d (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). 1 It serves as a first execution control means for controlling execution of a variable display game (first special figure variable display game). Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area). It serves as a second execution control means for controlling the execution of.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). It becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the first variation in which the special figure 1 display 51 can display the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Make a display means. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97.

Further, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and the probability of hitting is high). It is possible to control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed by (with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device 41. The display game is now running. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special map variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 variablely displays the decorative identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (decorative variable display game). It is a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game, but in the case of the normal gaming state which is a low probability state, the variable time is used as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left to aim at the first start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game. The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

Based on the above, the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (1st starting winning opening 36, 2nd starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), and the result of the game is a special result. In the game machine 10 that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player in the event of such a situation, a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a special variable winning device that is opened in the special game state. (Special variable winning device 38), and the game control means includes a fanfare period, which is a period from the start of the special gaming state to the start of opening of the special variable winning device, and the final special variable winning device in the special gaming state. It is possible to set the ending period, which is the period from the end of the opening of the game to the end of the special game state, and even if the special game state is based on the same special result, when the special result is derived. It is possible to make the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different according to the game state of the game. Therefore, it is possible to make the execution mode according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening 97 forming the starting winning opening, and the first starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variable winning device 37. The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) that executes the first variable display game based on the winning of the prize, and the second variable display game are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97. The second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the specific game state (fourth specific game state) in which the execution time of the second variable display game is set to be shorter than the normal state can be generated. A game state generating means (game control device 100) is provided, and the game control means derives a special result from the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period in the special game state based on the same special result. It means that the game state when the special result is derived is longer when the game state is the specific game state than when the game state is not the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the execution mode according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, in the specific game state, the time for executing the effect can be secured, and in the case of not the specific game state, the game can be advanced quickly.

Further, the special results include a first special result in which the probability of being derived can be changed according to the gaming state, and a second special result in which the probability of being derived regardless of the gaming state is constant. The probability that the second special result is derived is set to be higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. Therefore, it is possible to make the execution mode according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, by making the lengths of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different for the second special result that does not change the probability, the derivation probability does not change, but the execution mode can be changed.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 30, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is the start address of an area for saving the value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that is a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the state of the first input port 122 is read before the start of the standby time to ensure that the initialization switch 112 is operated. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 may be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 may be operated from the power-on to the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Do (step X9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and is the timer value 0? Is determined (step X12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). When the timer value is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step X13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step X14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

When the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17), and it is normal. If (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step X20). When the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG. 31, and processing is performed when the checksum is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X25 in FIG. 31 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step X21 of FIG. 31, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The area to be initialized here is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is considered to be indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (step X22). The interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game means that the second special result (small hit) is derived while both special figure variable display games are being executed as described later. This interrupts the other special figure variation display game, and interrupts the special figure variation display game in the restart control that resumes after the end of the special gaming state. If it is interrupted, the special figure 1 game interruption flag or the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set according to the interrupted special figure fluctuation display game, and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped for these flags. It is designed to retain memory even while it is being played.

If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (step X22; N), the process proceeds to step X24. When the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (step X22; Y), a suspended command corresponding to the suspended special figure is set (step X23).

After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24), and the step. Proceed to X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X24, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command, and a suspended command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being executed, the customer is waiting. Send the command of the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X25, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X25), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X26), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X27). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X28). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X29), and the process proceeds to step X30. In the case of this embodiment, in step X29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and light and sound are displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). Send multiple commands such as (command to notify RAM initialization). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a production count information command and a support count information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with normal power support, are also transmitted.

In step X30, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step X30, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X31). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the winning symbol of the special figure). After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X32), interrupting is permitted (step X33). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X34) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step X34, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X35), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X36; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X34). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X34) (step X33), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X34, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, which causes the main process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X35 (step X37). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X37; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step X37; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X38) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step X39) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X40), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X41). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X42) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X43) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X44). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step X104) for controlling the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X105), the random number update process 1 (step X106), and the random number update process 2 (step X107) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and setting the prize ball, A winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X108) is performed to monitor errors such as opening the front frame and the glass frame and illegally winning the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning device 38.

Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97. Then, the special figure 1 game process (step X110) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that checks the detection signal from and determines whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step X494). Then, in the case of the normal gaming state (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. When not in the normal gaming state (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure start port 1 switch process is performed (step X498).

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform a right-handed strike by display, voice, or the like. Right-handed is more advantageous for the player when in a specific game state or special game state, and the first start winning opening 36, which is designed so that a prize is not won unless it is left-handed, is in a specific game state or special. When a prize is detected during the game state, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Next, the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) prepares a winning monitoring table (step X499), performs a hard random number acquisition process (step X500), and acquires a big hit random number based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning that is set in the case of (step X501).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97 (step X501; N), the process proceeds to step X509. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97 (step X501; Y), is the Fuden (ordinary variable winning device 37) operating, that is, It is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state where it is possible to win a prize (step X502), and when the normal electric power is operating (step X502; Y), step X504 Move to. On the other hand, when the normal electric power is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the normal electric power is being generated (step X503).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If a normal electric phone fraud is occurring (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X509. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more. Further, when the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step X503; N), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step X504). Then, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step X504; N), the process proceeds to step X507. Further, in the normal gaming state (step X504; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X507), the special figure start port 2 switch process is performed (step X508), and the process proceeds to step X509.

Based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform left-handed by display, voice, or the like. Left-handed is more advantageous for the player when in the normal game state, and left when a prize is detected in the normal game state by the normal variable winning device 37 which is designed so that the player does not win unless it is right-handed. I am trying to give a hit instruction notification.

Next, the starting port 3 (second starting winning opening 97) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X509), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X510). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X511).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step X512). Then, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step X512; N), the process proceeds to step X515. Further, in the normal gaming state (step X512; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X513), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X514). After that, a table for setting the hold information by the start port 3 is prepared (step X515), the special figure start port 3 switch process is performed (step X516), and the start port switch monitoring process is completed.

Based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform left-handed by display, voice, or the like. Left-handed is more advantageous for the player when in the normal game state, and when the prize is detected in the normal game state at the second starting winning opening 97, which is designed so that the player does not win unless it is right-handed. I am trying to give a left-handed instruction notification.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure start port 1 switch process (step X498) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the number of times the start port signal 1 is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times the prize is won to the first start winning port 36 is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (Step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X523). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 1 output count area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number). Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because it loops due to +1 update and becomes 0.

When the number of special figure 1 hold is less than the upper limit value (4 in this case) (step X525; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process described later is set (step X525; Y). Step X526), the number of reserved special figures 1 is updated by +1 (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is used as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the storage area (step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, the special figure hold information determination process (step X534), which is the look-ahead process, is performed, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step X535), and the effect command setting process is performed (step X535). Step X536), the special figure start port 1 switch processing is completed.

In the special start port 2 switch process (step X508) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process, in steps X521 to X524 regarding the start port signal, information regarding the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 is won is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. The process is the same as that shown in FIG. 34 except that the start port signal 2 output to the external management device is processed. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and the predetermined random number is used as the first starting memory. It is a first starting storage means that can store up to the maximum number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X534) in the above-mentioned special figure start port 1 switch process. The same process is performed in the special figure start port 2 switch process, which is not shown. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step X543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). Prepare a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551).

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop symbol information of the small hit is set (step X549), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step X550), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

After preparing the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), the effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, the special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing is performed (step X554).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step X556), and end the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are the processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal processing. Is similar to.

By the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory are included. A look-ahead variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is changed to the special figure 1 change based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game is started. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. Make the first possible decision-making measure. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment, etc.) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

Note that this special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Further, in the case of the fourth specific gaming state, the look-ahead processing may not be performed. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is the main body during the fourth specific game state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly derived by deriving a special result in this special figure 2 variable display game. This is because it is almost always stopped as a result of the loss. In other words, it is not so meaningful to notify the look-ahead result because most of them are out of order, and it is forcibly changed to the off-reading result after notifying the look-ahead result which is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because the contradiction may occur.

However, since the special figure 2 variable display game does not generate the start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure is as long as the first start memory is available during the first period of the fourth specific gaming state. There is a high possibility that only one variable display game will be played, and in such a case, a look-ahead effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memory that performs such look-ahead effect, the one that occurred before the start of the fourth specific gaming state is pre-reading, so the result is used and it occurs after the start of the fourth specific gaming state. For those that have been made, the look-ahead processing is performed for those that are the target of such look-ahead effect. Of course, the look-ahead process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead process in another process.

[Special figure start port 3 switch processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure start port 3 switch process (step X516) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 3 switch process, first, the start port signal 3 output number of times, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times of winning to the second start winning opening 97 is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X563). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 3 output count area of the RWM (step X564), and the start port 3 (second start winning port 97) wins. Determine if it is invalid.

The start opening 3 winning invalidity means that the special figure 1 variable display game that has a special result (big hit or small hit) is stopped (during processing during special figure display described later), during the first or second special gaming state, and Special Figure 2 The variable display game is being executed. When the start port 3 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special figure start port 3 switch process is terminated. If the starting port 3 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the special figure 2 hold number is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure start port 3 switch processing is completed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a start winning prize storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the second start winning opening 97. Since there are few types of fluctuation patterns in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is not used.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 game processing (step X110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. Special Figure 1 Variable display Controls the entire process related to the game and sets the display of Special Figure 1. In this special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption interruption flag, which is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, is set (step Y100). If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 Performs processing related to the variable display game. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game of steps Y101 to Y118. Is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Y119. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In step Y101, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being the big hit or the small hit. (Step Y101). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y102). Step Y103). Further, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening switch 38 is monitored and transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening. Performs processing to set the winning opening count command and processing to close the winning opening when a specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). Special figure 1 When the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in the above is set in the register (step Y105). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game are monitored. FIG. 1 Special figure 1 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 1 Performs normal processing (step Y108). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, and the like. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y109).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. The special figure 1 display processing (step Y110) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y112) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special drawing 1 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs is set, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare process (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y116) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. conduct.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed to perform the special figure 1 fluctuation control process. FIG. 1 Ends game processing. This special figure 1 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. This special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 interruption interruption flag, which is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, is set (step Y130). If this special figure 2 interruption flag is not set (step Y130; N), that is, if the special figure 2 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y131, and the subsequent special figure 2 Performs processing related to the variable display game. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 interruption flag is set (step Y130; Y), that is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 2 variation display game of steps Y131 to Y151. Is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Y152. As a result, while the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In step Y131, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit or the small hit. (Step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y132). Step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening switch 38 is monitored and transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening. Performs processing to set the winning opening count command and processing to close the winning opening when a specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). Special figure 2 When the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, is the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer 0? Is determined (step Y135).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is extended to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The variable timer value (here, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at one time even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for the specified time (here, 60,000 ms).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y138).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are monitored. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Ordinary processing (step Y139) is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y140).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. The special figure 2 display processing (step Y141) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y142). In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y143) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special drawing 2 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs is set, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare process (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. conduct.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed to perform the special figure 2 fluctuation control process. FIG. 2 The game process is terminated. This special figure 2 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing. The corresponding processing will be explained in parallel in.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 2 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 is not variable startable (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y204). After that, the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the second specific gaming state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal gaming state.

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y210), and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). , Performs the effect command setting process (step Y212). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates that there is a second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the fourth specific gaming state (step Y213). Then, in the case of the fourth specific gaming state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the player is not in the fourth specific gaming state (step Y213; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a state other than the fourth specific gaming state, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed during the period when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation. It is possible to confirm the execution of the game. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y139) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 is not variable startable (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is based on the prize when the second start winning opening 97 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. Special figure 2 This is temporarily generated to perform the start processing of the variable display game, and is not intended to suspend the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

Then, when the number of reserved figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 changing is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y227). Then, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step Y227; N), the process proceeds to step Y230. Further, in the case of the normal gaming state (step Y227; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started during the period when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes irregular fluctuation. As a result, it can be confirmed that the player intentionally executes the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which irregular fluctuations occur. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233), and when it has not been disclosed (step Y233; N), it is in the customer waiting state. Performs the processing related to the setting. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y231; N), when special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233; Y). , Step Y237.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y234), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235), and the effect is produced. The command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the information on the gaming state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). This makes it possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process. This special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. First, a fall lottery process for drawing a transition from the high probability state to the normal probability state is performed (step Y240). Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is lost. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting information, jackpot information, or small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. 1 Perform the information setting process (step Y244), and prepare the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y245).

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after this, a process for adjusting so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly removed regardless of the lottery result. As a result, it ends. In particular, since there is a high probability that the special figure 2 variable display game will be a small hit, if the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, there is a high possibility that such processing will be performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. .. Therefore, for example, even though the effect is highly expected in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result, and the player feels distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game that is about to start, measures such as preventing the production with high expectations from being selected are taken. I am trying to do it.

For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not the player is in the fourth specific game state (step Y248), and if the player is in the fourth specific game state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of the fourth specific game state, the game is progressed mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and the game is executed frequently, it is known that there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly stopped due to a missed result. , Special Figure 1 In the variable display game, since it is set in advance so that the effect with high expectation is not selected, no special processing is performed here.

Further, when the player is not in the fourth specific gaming state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249). When the special figure 2 is not changing (step Y249; N), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started from now on, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is a very long variable time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, no processing is performed here to prevent a highly expected effect from being selected.

When the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249; Y), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed is out of order (step Y250), and when it is out of order (step Y250; Y). ) Goes to step Y257. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped. Further, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is not out of alignment (step Y250; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier. Therefore, in order to prevent the production with high expectation from being selected. No processing is performed.

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 variable display to be executed from now on is calculated. It is determined whether the fluctuation time of the game is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends first, no processing is performed to prevent the production having a high expectation from being selected.

Further, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the variable time of the special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256), a fourth specific game state setting process for setting a fourth specific game state is performed (step Y257), and special figure 1 fluctuation start. End the process. This command also includes information on whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. Based on receiving a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer, the effect control device 300 regulates the selection of the effect with high expectation for the special figure 1 variation display game or performs a specific execution. Processing such as setting the mode is performed.

When the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of resetting the information regarding the variation pattern (first and second half variation pattern numbers, etc.) may be performed so that the effect control device 300 changes to the variation pattern that does not select the effect with high expectation. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process of preparing the command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Y255) may or may not be performed.

That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern processing (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100 determines the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal game state, the second variation display game. It is a first variation mode determining means capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Further, the process of resetting the above-mentioned variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means. Refers to the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation mode information of the second fluctuation display game, and provides information on the fluctuation pattern without changing the fluctuation time of the determined first fluctuation display game. It serves as a second variation mode determining means that can be redetermined.

Further, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed from now on when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The variation pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning by performing the process (step Y254) of determining whether the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the variation display game. You may do so.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process. This special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. First, a fall lottery process for drawing a transition from the high probability state to the normal probability state is performed (step Y260). Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting information, jackpot information, or small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. 2 Performs information setting processing (step Y264), and prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y265).

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y267) is performed, the fourth specific game state setting process for setting the fourth specific game state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the process for adjusting so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which can be executed at the same time is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, so that the special figure 2 variable display game is less likely to be forcibly terminated with a missed result. However, as in the case of the special figure 1 variable display game, if the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, the selection of a highly expected effect may be restricted.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 43 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y240, Y260) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y581), and if the probability is not high (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process is terminated. Further, in the case of high probability (step Y581; Y), a fall lottery random number is acquired (step Y582), and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery is won by referring to the determination value (step Y583).

If the fall lottery has not been won (step Y583; N), the fall lottery process ends. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. Further, when the fall lottery is won (step Y583; Y), a process for shifting to the low probability state is performed. First, the signal relating to the high probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal is set to OFF. Then, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). As a result, the probability of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is set to a low probability.

Next, the process of terminating the Fuden support is performed. In addition, when the fall lottery is won, the Fuden support is terminated when the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state. First, it is determined whether or not the Fuden support is in progress (step Y588), and if the Fuden support is not in progress (step Y588; N), the fall lottery process ends. Further, when the normal power support is in progress (step Y588; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be the normal power support is 0 (step Y589).

When the number of support times is not 0 (step Y589; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game has not been executed since the end of the special game state (in the case of the first specific game state). , The second specific game state is entered and the normal electric support is continued, so the fall lottery process is terminated. Further, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y589; Y), that is, a specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure variation display games are executed from the end of the special gaming state, but the third is not won in the fall lottery. When the game is in the specific game state, the process of terminating the general electric support after step Y590 is performed in order to shift to the normal game state.

In the process of terminating the normal power support, first, the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y590). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y591). Here, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Then, the special figure low probability and no time reduction number are saved in the game state display number area (step Y592), and the special figure low probability and no support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y593). After that, the low probability of the normal figure is set (step Y594), and the fall lottery process is completed. As a result, it becomes a low-probability state and a state without normal electric support, and shifts to a normal game state. Information on the end of the high-probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 44 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step Y273) from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y275), and if it is a jackpot (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y279) for determining the above is performed.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271. (Step Y281), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, the big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to 0.

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) for determining the above is performed.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. (Step Y301), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the large hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 46 shows the jackpot determination process (steps Y276, Y296) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process and jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, in the case of a high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). Further, in the case of not in the high probability state (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ..

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 47 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279, Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the judgment is for the special figure 1 variation display game. (Step Y322).

Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, when the judgment is about the special figure 2 variation display game, the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). , It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 1 Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y338). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and when it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 1. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and prepare the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and the effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), and the special figure The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the big hit symbol random number from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 2 Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y368). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and when it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and the decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y374), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 2. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and prepare the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and the effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. Clear the area to 0 (step Y381), and end the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 displays the result of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the variation mode information in the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. It is the first decision-making means that can be decided before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the result of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the predetermined random number. And, it serves as a second determination means capable of determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning opening 97 fires on the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and is in a normal state (normal game state). The variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the second variable display game by the second determining means is larger than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the first variable display game by the first determining means. It will be a long time.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the start storage number (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 forms the first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variable time in accordance with the start of the variable display game for each of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, and the measured time has elapsed. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, is off or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, the variation is set. The information about the time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, but a command indicating only the long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, the stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the variation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the burden of control on the effect control device 300.

[4th specific game state setting process]
FIG. 50 shows the fourth specific game state setting process (steps Y257, Y268) performed in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process. In this fourth specific game state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric power support is in progress (step Y1501), and if the general electric power support is not in progress (step Y1501; N), the fourth specific game state setting process is terminated. do. Further, when the normal power support is in progress (step Y1501; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be the normal power support is 0 (step Y1502).

When the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1502; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure variation display games has not been executed since the end of the special gaming state (first specific gaming state or second specific). In the case of a game state), the fourth specific game state setting process is terminated. Further, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1502; Y), that is, a specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure variation display games are executed from the end of the special gaming state, but the third is not won in the fall lottery. When the game is in the specific game state, it is determined whether the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is a big hit (step Y1503).

If the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is not a big hit (step Y1503; N), the third specific game state continues, so the fourth specific game state setting process is terminated. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is a big hit (step Y1503; Y), a process of terminating the general electric support after step Y1504 is performed in order to shift to the fourth specific gaming state.

In the process of terminating the normal power support, first, the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1504). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1505). Here, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Then, the special figure high probability and no time reduction number are saved in the game state display number area (step Y1506), and the special figure high probability and no support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1507). After that, the low probability of the normal figure is set (step Y1508), the fourth specific game state flag is saved (step Y1509), and the fourth specific game state setting process is completed. As a result, the state becomes a high probability state and there is no normal electric support, and the state shifts to the fourth specific game state setting.

The 4th specific gaming state flag is a flag set to make it recognizable that the 4th specific gaming state is present, and is cleared when the special gaming state starts. Since this 4th specific game state flag is not cleared even if the fall lottery is won during the 4th specific game state, the game state becomes a low probability state and there is no general electric support due to the fall during the 4th specific game state. Also makes it possible to recognize that it is in the fourth specific gaming state.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during change Transition setting processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In this special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step Y605). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Further, the initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

The initial value set in the symbol number area during special figure 1 change is 0, so that the change display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Transition processing during fluctuations Transition setting processing]
FIG. 52 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 normal process. In this special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step Y615). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, the initial value is set in the symbol number area during change in Special Figure 2 (step Y617), and the process shift setting process during change in Special Figure 2 is terminated.

Special figure 2 The initial value set in the symbol number area during fluctuation is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is said that all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variable display is started from at least the state in which the segment is lit. You may try to do it. Further, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always lit each time. Further, the lighting mode when the fluctuation is started in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same or different.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 53 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting process is performed. Do (step Y623).

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms in the case of a miss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. Further, if the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y643. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step Y629). ). If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y629; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (step Y640), and the special figure 2 interruption command is set. (Step Y641), the effect command setting process (step Y642) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y643.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a small hit. It should be noted that even if the variable display game of Special Figure 2 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1 big hit (step Y629; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is in progress (step Y630). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game has a special result, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. It should be noted that even if the variable display game in Special Figure 2 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of Special Figure 2 is in progress (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y632. Further, when the special figure 2 display is not being processed (step Y630; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y631), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. The display time of +4 ms is set (step Y632). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started.

Next, save the display time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y633), set and prepare the decorative special figure 2 off symbol command (step Y634), and send the symbol command to the decorative special figure 2 command area. Save (step Y635) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y636). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y643), and is the special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y644). In the case of a special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. If it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y645). ), Information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y646).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y647), the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y648), and the special figure 1 is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is performed. Do (step Y653).

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms in the case of a miss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Further, if the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; Y), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit or the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the special figure 1 interruption command is set. (Step Y671), the effect command setting process (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit. It should be noted that even if the variable display game of Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display processing is in progress (step Y660). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. It should be noted that even if the variable display game of Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of Special Figure 1 is in progress (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Further, when the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the process proceeds to step Y663.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), the decorative special figure 1 off symbol command is set and prepared (step Y664), and the symbol command is sent to the decorative special figure 1 command area. Save (step Y665) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y666). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and is the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y674). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675). ), Special figure 2 Loads information from the large winning opening opening information area and saves it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y676).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y678), and the special figure 2 is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y648) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), Special figure 1 Ends the process transition setting process 1 during the change.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), Special figure 2 Processing during change The transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 Displaying process Transition setting process 2]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1 (step Y704).

Up to this point, it is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information is set to obtain an outlier result. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y710), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2 (step Y724).

Up to this point, it is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information is set to obtain an outlier result. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y730), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

By the above processing of FIGS. 53 to 58, when one of the special figure variation display games becomes the first special result (big hit), the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss. Become. That is, the first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the disengagement result based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. Based on this, the second end control process is performed in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the deviation.

From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has the first special result, the first variation in which the execution control is performed. It is possible to end the display game as a result other than a special result, and the second variable display game execution control means is the first variable display game execution control means when the execution control of the second variable display game is performed. When the first variable display game for which execution control is performed becomes the first special result, the second variable display game for which the execution control is performed can be terminated as a result other than the special result. It will be. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variable display game, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped at the off result, so that no problem occurs even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed. Can be.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
59 and 60 show the process during display of the special figure 1 (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear one area (step Y752).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 area in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y753), and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, the special figure 1 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. Further, in the case of a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality change release command is prepared (step Y757), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit information (10 or 4 in the case of the present embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special diagram 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y763). After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y765).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). Then, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y770), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y771). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y755, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is the small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). Then, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), a support management process for managing the period for setting the normal electric support is performed (step Y780), and a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area. Prepare (step Y783) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y787).

When not in the normal gaming state (step Y787; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed.

On the other hand, in the normal gaming state (step Y787; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.

After that, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y793), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting is made. The process (step Y797) is performed, and the process during display of the special figure 1 is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), a support management process for managing the period for setting the normal electric support is performed (step Y800), and the special figure status is obtained. Clearing (subtracting information) during the change in the special figure 1 of the area (step Y806), performing the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1 (step Y807), and ending the special figure 1 display process.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
61 and 62 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y141) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. It should be noted that this special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear two areas (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 area in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815), and if it is not a big hit (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. Further, in the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality change release command is prepared (step Y817), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit information (10 or 4 in the case of this embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y823). After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). Then, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y830), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y831). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y834), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is the small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), a support management process for managing the period for setting the normal power support is performed (step Y840), and a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area. Prepare (step Y843) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y847).

When not in the normal gaming state (step Y847; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed.

On the other hand, in the normal gaming state (step Y847; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.

After that, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y853), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting is made. The process (step Y857) is performed, and the process during display of the special figure 2 is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), a support management process for managing the period for setting the normal electric support is performed (step Y860), and the special figure status is obtained. Clearing (subtracting information) during the change in the special figure 2 of the area (step Y866), performing the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1 (step Y867), and ending the special figure 2 display process.

That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the conditional device. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without the operation of the conditional device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 63 describes the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776, Y836) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display processing and special drawing 2 display processing. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, the signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special gaming state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by the big hit or the small hit is set to ON. Next, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is used. The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are set.

Next, the jackpot information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the game state display number 2 area is in the right-handed state. Save the number (step Y881).

After that, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process is terminated. That is, with the occurrence of a big hit, all the information related to the abnormal change in Special Figure 2 is cleared.

[Special figure 1 Small hit fanfare medium processing Transition setting processing]
FIG. 64 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y797) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893). Here, referring to the current gaming state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of the specific gaming state, and 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of not in the specific gaming state. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by the big hit or the small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process is completed. do.

[Special Figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903). Here, referring to the current gaming state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of the specific gaming state, and 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of not in the specific gaming state. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by the big hit or the small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process is completed. do.

[Support management process]
FIG. 66 shows the support management processing (steps Y780, Y800, Y840, Y860) performed in the special figure 1 changing process and the special drawing 2 changing process. In this support management process, first, it is determined whether or not the support is being supported (step Y1521), and if the support is not being supported (step Y1521; N), the support management process is terminated. In addition, when the normal power support is in progress (step Y1521; Y), if the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be the normal power support is not 0, the support is updated by -1 (step Y1522). It is determined whether the number of times is 0 (step Y1523).

When the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1523; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure variation display games has not been executed since the end of the special game state (first specific game state or second specific). If the game state continues), the support management process is terminated. Further, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1523; Y), that is, when the specified number of special figure variation display games (here, the 100th time) from the end of the special gaming state ends, or when the special gaming state has already ended. If a specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure fluctuation display games have been executed, but the fall lottery has not been won and the third specific game state has been reached, it is determined whether the game is in a high probability state (step Y1524). ..

In the case of a high probability state (step Y1524; Y), the support management process is terminated because the transition to the third specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state continues. Further, when the probability is not high (step Y1524; N), a process of terminating the normal electric support after step Y1525 is performed in order to end the second specific gaming state and shift to the normal gaming state.

In the process of terminating the normal power support, first, the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1525). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1526). Here, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Then, the special figure low probability and no time reduction number are saved in the game state display number area (step Y1527), and the special figure low probability and no support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1528). After that, the low probability of the normal figure is set (step Y1529), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1530), and the left-handed instruction notification is given at the start of the next special figure variation display game, and the support management process is performed. To finish. As a result, the second specific gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
FIG. 67 shows the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and the production command setting process is performed. (Step Y953).

Next, the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). Then, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y958), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The opening time of the big winning opening is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, when it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

Then, the signal relating to the opening start of the large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y963). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y964), and the large winning opening is counted. The number of mouth counts is cleared (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 68 shows the processing during opening of the large winning opening (steps Y112 and Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this large winning opening opening process, first, the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. Further, in the case of the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is prepared. I do.

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011).

In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, when it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015). After that, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the large winning opening]
FIG. 69 shows the large winning opening residual ball processing (steps Y113, Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041).

Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the interval time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and the fanfare / interval processing 3 is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time, and further from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, so that the interval period is 2000 ms. Will be executed.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), the jackpot end processing transition setting process is performed (step Y1045), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step). Y1046), 6 related to the special figure 1 big hit end process or the special figure 2 big hit end process is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048). In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step). Y1050), the processing of the remaining balls in the big winning opening is completed. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is the period from the end of the final round to the lapse of the remaining ball processing time and the lapse of the remaining ball processing time to the lapse of the ending time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms, and in this ending period, the ending effect is produced by the display device 41 or the like. Will be executed.

[Big hit end processing Transition setting processing]
FIG. 70 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to OFF.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Clear the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special gaming state (step Y1074).

Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the opening information determination flag for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the jackpot is cleared (step Y1077), and the jackpot end processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 71 shows the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 big hit end process, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1104). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1105), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1106), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1106). Y1108). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1109).

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1109, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2 Variable display A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the game from being executed.

Next, it is determined whether the special result is a probabilistic jackpot (step Y1110), and if it is a probabilistic jackpot (step Y1110; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1111). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1112). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, the number with high probability and time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1114), and the special figure high probability and support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1116). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1117), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here, here) is the support number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not a probability variation jackpot (step Y1110; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1119). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1120). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, a number with a low probability and a time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1122), and a flag with a special figure low probability and a support is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1124). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1125), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here, here) is the support number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is ended.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 72 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. This special figure 2 big hit end process is the same process except that step Y1109 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process is not performed. First, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y1131), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1132).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1133). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1134). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1135), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1136), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1136). Y1138). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether the special result is a probabilistic jackpot (step Y1110), and if it is a probabilistic jackpot (step Y1139; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1140). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1141). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, the number with high probability and time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1143), and the special figure high probability and support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1145). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1146), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and the initial value (here, here) is the support number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 big hit end process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not a probability variation jackpot (step Y1139; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1148). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1149). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, a number with a low probability and a time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1151), and a flag with a special figure low probability and a support is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1154), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and the initial value (here, here) is the support number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 big hit end process is ended.

By these special figure 1 big hit processing and special figure 2 big hit processing, the first specific gaming state with high probability state and general electric support is set after the end of the special gaming state based on the probability variation big hit. In addition, after the end of the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot, a second specific gaming state with a low probability state and a normal electric support will be set. That is, the probability setting that the game control device 100 can set the probability that the result of the game becomes the first special result among the special results in the high probability state after the end of the special game state is higher than the low probability state. Make a means. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process (steps Y115, Y146) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in this small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1202). Next, the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1203). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory is set to ON. Then, the large winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1204), and the large winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1205).

After that, 8 related to the small hit middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y1206), and it is determined whether the small hit type is the small hit 1 (step Y1207). When the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1207; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1208), and the small hit opening time 1 (here, 48 ms) is set as special figure 1. Save in the game processing timer area (step Y1209), and end the processing during the small hit fanfare.

If the small hit type is not 1 small hit (step Y1207; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1210), and the opening time corresponding to the small hit type is set to the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the processing timer area (step Y1211), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is terminated. As the opening time corresponding to the small hit type, 1000 ms is set for the small hit 2, 1200 ms for the small hit 3, and 1600 ms for the small hit 4.

[Small hit processing]
FIG. 74 shows the small hit medium processing (steps Y116, Y147) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit middle process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1243), and 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244).

After that, it is determined whether the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1245). When the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1245; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1246), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is specified. FIG. 1 Saves in the game processing timer area (step Y1209), and ends the small hit middle processing.

When the small hit type is not 1 small hit (step Y1245; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1248), and the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type is set. Special figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (step Y1249), and end the small hit middle processing. As the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type, 600 ms is set in the case of the small hit 2, and 800 ms is set in the case of the small hit 3 or 4.

[Small hit residual ball treatment]
FIG. 75 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117, Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is a small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y1271). In the case of a small hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), 10 related to the special figure 1 small hit end process is set as the processing number (step Y1272), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

If it is not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 related to the special figure 2 small hit process is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Regardless of whether the small hit is in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, in the setting of the small hit ending time (steps Y1274, Y1277), the current gaming state is referred to, and in the case of the specific gaming state, the small hit ending 1200 ms or 1400 ms is set as the time, and 100 ms is set as the small hit ending time when it is not in the specific gaming state. As a result, the length of the ending period including the remaining ball processing time and the ending time is 2000 ms in the specific gaming state, and 700 ms or 900 ms in the non-specific gaming state.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to OFF. Further, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1306). ). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the normal gaming state (step Y1307), and if the player is not in the normal gaming state (step Y1307; N), the process proceeds to step Y1310. Further, in the normal gaming state (step Y1307; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1310).

When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1310; N), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms is used as the special figure 2 game wait time value. The value corresponding to (here, 2) is saved (step Y1314), and the special figure 1 small hit end process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1310; Y), the decorative special figure 2 restart command is prepared (step Y1311), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1312). After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), the value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms is saved as the special figure 2 game wait time value (step Y1314), and the special figure 1 The small hit end process is terminated.

As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, by saving the value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value, the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. FIG. 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 77 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the normal game state (step Y1337), and if the player is not in the normal game state (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. Further, in the normal gaming state (step Y1337; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

When the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y), the decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1342). After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device 100 is one of the variable display game execution control means of either the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the variable display game of the other is performed, and the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one of the variable display games is played. It serves as a restart control means capable of executing restart control for resuming one of the variable display games that was interrupted after the special gaming state based on the other variable display game was interrupted.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 78 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 78, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. C18), a movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the board effect device 44, a board effect setting process (step C20) that controls the effect, and a process of clearing the WDT. Return to (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 79 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to the process of step C204. When it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 80 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that the MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the start memory (holding) in which the special figure change display game has not been executed becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be used. It is a production such as performing a production display. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 81 shows a variable command process (step C236) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special symbol type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are changed. It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process is terminated. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol, a 4R jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent is when the variation command (variation pattern command) that is out of alignment is received, but the symbol command of the 10R jackpot symbol is received. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure change is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, "during special map change" means that the special figure is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
FIG. 82 shows the variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned variation system command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381). When the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode at that time is set (step C382). The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and is naturally different depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, and the like. Further, each mode is provided with a plurality of modes in which the distribution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the reserved number of MODE and special figure type is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of non-reach variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the advance notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the notice lottery that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (step C381; N), the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special symbol type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half is changing using the first half notice distribution group table. The notice lottery that appears in is performed (step C386).

Next, a lottery will be drawn for the advance notice of changes in the second half. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of multiple columns of the special figure is a big hit). Is stopped and variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second half is changing (during reach) using the second half notice distribution group table. A lottery for the notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the effect corresponding to the notice lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the production and notice of the variable time of the decorative special figure variation display game and the main reach contents will be determined. Further, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol is performed with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.), notice content, and game state of the special map variation display game (step C392).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is set (step C393), and the display setting of the advance notice effect is set (step C394). By these processes, it becomes possible to execute the effect and the advance notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decorative start memory display in response to the corresponding decrease in the start memory when the special figure variation display game is started.

Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is performed. Set the display (step C397). Further, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , Ends the variable effect setting process.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 83 shows the one-shot command processing in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing. In this one-shot command process, first, it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the model designation command including the information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), the model setting process for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and the single-shot command process is performed. To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step C261 that the MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Determination (step C263). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, RAM initialization scenario data is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

Further, when it is determined in step C263 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is given a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has recovered from the power failure without being initialized. It is determined whether they correspond to each other (step C265). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery process is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect at the time of power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that the MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo process is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the customer waiting demo process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demo, and the customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform the customer waiting effect.

Further, when it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is on hold in FIG. 1 (step C269). Then, when the MODE is in the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C270), the one-shot command processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271). Then, when the MODE is on hold in the special figure 2 (step C271; Y), the special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing the process corresponding to the generated hold is performed (step C272), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. do. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for displaying a start memory notification display that displays information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decorative start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

Further, in step C271, when MODE is not reserved in FIG. 2 (step C271; N), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). Then, when the MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), the probability information setting process for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C273, when MODE is not probability information (step C273; N), MODE determines whether it is an error / invalidity (step C275). Then, when the MODE is an error / invalid (step C275; Y), the error / invalid setting process for performing the corresponding process such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the error / invalid setting process (step C276), a notification process when a command related to an error or an error is received, a warning display process when a right-handed instruction notification command or a left-handed instruction notification command is received, and the like are performed. ..

Further, in step C275, when MODE is not an error / invalidity (step C275; N), MODE determines whether or not the effect mode is switched (step C277). Then, when the MODE is the effect mode switching (step C277; Y), the effect mode switching process for switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C277, when the MODE is not the effect mode switching (step C277; N), the MODE determines whether the symbol is stopped (step C279). Then, when MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. Further, when the MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In the determination of whether the command is normal, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decorative special figure stop command is the target of the currently changing special figure.

If the command is not normal (step C280; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure stop setting is made (step C281), and if all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , Ends single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 84 shows the jackpot command process (step C238) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this jackpot command process, first, it is determined whether the MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). When the MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare display image according to a big hit type and a small hit is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set to the fanfare. Set (step C403), and end the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. Then, when the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the round number display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. When the MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), the interval effect setting process for setting the effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminates system command processing. If the MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small hit.

When the MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect at the end of the big hit or the small hit is performed (step C411), and the P machine state is set during the ending (step). C412), the jackpot command processing is terminated. If the MODE is not the ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on winning a prize in the special variable winning device.

If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated. When the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), the count effect setting process (step C414) for setting the effect corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command process is terminated.

By the processing in the effect control device 300 as described above, the effect according to the effect state as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the effect display in the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 24, and the like are performed. ..

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the distribution of the variation time for the special figure variation display game which is a big hit started in the third specific gaming state ST4.

In this modification, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 85 is distributed instead of the variation pattern distribution when the result is a big hit in the third specific gaming state shown in FIG. 28 (c). In the distribution of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 85, the distribution is different depending on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game executed after the end of the special gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the case of the 101st to 150th games after the end of the special gaming state, that is, within 50 games from the start of the third specific gaming state, the shortest variation time is 150,000 ms. The fluctuation pattern is selected at the highest rate. Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), when it is the 151st to 200th games after the end of the special gaming state, that is, when it is the 51st to 100th games from the start of the third specific gaming state, the fluctuation time is the second. The short variation pattern of 250,000 ms is selected at the highest rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), when it is the 201st to 250th game after the end of the special gaming state, that is, when it is the 101st to 250th game from the start of the third specific gaming state, the fluctuation time is the third. The short variation pattern of 300,000 ms is selected at the highest rate. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), when it is the 251st game or later after the end of the special gaming state, that is, when it is 251 games or more from the start of the third specific gaming state, the fluctuation time is 450,000 ms, which is the longest. The fluctuation pattern is selected at the highest rate.

That is, the larger the number of games executed in the third specific game state, the higher the ratio of selecting a long fluctuation time. The longer the fluctuation time is selected, the longer the stay period in the 4th specific game state becomes, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained increases. The more profits can be given to the player. This makes it possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the big hit is not derived. On the contrary, it is possible to have an interest that is not found in conventional gaming machines, that is, it is expected that the fitted state will continue for a long period of time.

The distribution shown in FIG. 85 is an example, and the division of the number of games for changing the table, the distribution of the variable time in each table, and the like can be arbitrarily set. In order to achieve the above-mentioned effect, it is sufficient to increase the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game in which the longer the staying time in the third specific gaming state is, the larger the hit is. For example, the longer the cumulative value of the execution time of the special figure variation display game executed in the third specific game state, the higher the selection ratio of the long variation time for the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit.

On the contrary, the longer the staying time (number of games and execution time) in the third specific gaming state, the lower the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who was able to derive the special result at an early stage. Further, the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time may be the highest for the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit when the staying time in the third specific gaming state is within a predetermined range. For example, the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time may be the highest for the special figure fluctuation display game, which is a big hit when the game is 101 to 250 games from the start of the third specific gaming state. Further, a plurality of such periods may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to provide an advantageous period and an unfavorable period in the third specific gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the result of the variable display game is executed. Is a control means (game control device 100, effect control means 300) for controlling the game in the game machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained, and the first winning opening. 1 Starting winning opening 36, starting winning opening, closed state where the game ball cannot win, and open state where the game ball can easily win, can be converted into, and the right to execute the variable display game is generated by winning. A possible normal variable winning device 37 and a second starting winning opening that forms a starting winning opening arranged at a position on the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37 where a winning path can be made to the normal variable winning device. A mouth 97 is provided, and the control means sets the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 to either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state. The probability state in which the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is set to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state, and the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning is set. The first variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the device 37, and the second variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97. The first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time. In the high probability state, the execution time of the variable display game is shorter than that in the low probability state, and the special result depends on the gaming state. There is a first special result that can change the derived probability and a second special result that has a constant probability of being derived regardless of the gaming state, and the second special result in the second variable display game is derived. The probability of being played is set to be higher than the probability that the first special result is derived, and when the result of the variable display game becomes the first special result, the first special gaming state is set as a special gaming state advantageous to the player. Is executed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes the second special result, the second special gaming state is executed as a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the high probability state and the second operation state are obtained. When executing a variable display game that has a special result, the game shifts to the first operating state, and the execution time of the variable display game is selected according to the number of times the variable display game has been executed since the end of the previous special gaming state. It means that I tried to do it. Therefore, it is possible to make the profit given to the player different according to the number of times the variable display game is executed from the end of the special game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The game machine of this modification has a different transition of the gaming state.

FIG. 86 shows the transition of the gaming state in this modified example. In this modification, the third specific game state ST4 is not set, the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2, and the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a special result. Shifts to the fourth specific gaming state ST5. Then, when the fall lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the probability variation jackpot is derived in the fourth specific gaming state ST5, the transition to the first specific gaming state ST2 is performed after the special gaming state, and when the normal jackpot is derived, the second specific gaming state is after the special gaming state. It is designed to move to ST3.

FIG. 87 shows a variation pattern selected in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 of this modification. FIG. 87 (a) shows the fluctuation pattern of the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order and the fall lottery is not won, and FIG. 87 (b) shows the case where the result is a small hit and the fall lottery is performed. It is a fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game that does not win. In both cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal gaming state. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the same fluctuation time is used for the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is out of order or a small hit and the fall lottery is won, and the special figure fluctuation display game in which the big hit is obtained. At the same time as being set, a common specific effect is executed.

88 and 89 show the execution mode of the effect when the fourth specific gaming state ST5 ends. FIG. 88A shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order. In the state of the fourth specific game state ST5, the small hit RUSH effect is set. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game (t71, t72). Further, when the small hit is derived with a high probability (t73), the second special gaming state is set (t73 to t76), and the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t74 to t75). Will be.

Then, when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the fall lottery is won, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t76), and the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state ST1. A fixed time (here, 180,000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the fall lottery (t76 to t77), and the first specific effect is performed during the execution of this special figure fluctuation display game. After the end of this special figure variation display game, the normal mode effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is performed (t78).

FIG. 88 (b) shows the case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit. In this case as well, as in FIG. 88 (a), the fall lottery is won when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t81), and the gaming state is normal. The game state is ST1. A fixed time (here, 180,000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit (t81 to t82). During the execution of this special figure variation display game, the first specific effect is performed (t81 to t83). Then, after the end of this special figure variation display game, the first special game state is set and the first special game production is performed (t83). In the case of a big hit, a fixed time (here, 180,000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won, and the first specific effect is executed.

FIG. 89A shows a case where a fall lottery is won in a special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit. In this case as well, as in FIG. 88 (a), the fall lottery is won when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t91), and the game state is normal. The game state is ST1. For the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, a fixed time (here, 180,000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time (t91 to t92). During the execution of this special figure variation display game, the first specific effect is performed (t91 to t93). When the special figure variation display game ends, the second special game state is set (t93), but the first specific effect is continued even in this second special game state (t93 to t94). After that, the normal mode is set with the end of the second special gaming state (t94).

FIG. 89 (b) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit, and the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is started during the execution of the special figure variation display game. The case was shown. In this case as well, as in FIG. 88 (a), the fall lottery is won when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t111), and the game state is normal. The game state is ST1. For the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, a fixed time (here, 180,000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time (t111 to t113), and this special figure fluctuation display game is being executed (t111 to t114) and the second special. During the gaming state (t114 to t115), the first specific effect is performed. The content of this first specific effect is the same as that of the first specific effect shown in FIG. 89 (a).

In this example, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit during the execution of the first specific effect, has been started (t112). Along with this, a second specific effect for suggesting and notifying the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is added to the first specific effect and started (t112). The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t114), after which the second special gaming state is set.

The special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted due to the derivation of a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (t113 to t115), and the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the second special gaming state (t115). ). If the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit is not executed, the normal mode is produced with the end of the second special gaming state as shown in FIG. 89 (a), but here, the special figure that is a big hit is produced. The third specific effect is executed during the period in which the variable display game is executed (t115 to 116). As a result, it is possible to suggest or notify the player that the game will be a big hit, and it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped by winning the fall lottery. After that, with the end of the special figure 1 variable display game, the first special gaming state is set (t117).

As described above, by performing the first specific effect in the case of winning the fall lottery or in the case of a big hit, one of the events of greatly different value for the player, such as the transition to a low probability and the derivation of the big hit, will occur. It can be notified, and it is possible to give the player a sense of anxiety and expectation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, if a special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is started during the execution of the first specific effect, the fall lottery is won by the first specific effect by performing the second specific effect or the third specific effect. It is possible to notify the player of the possibility of a big hit even when the game is notified, and it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game due to a fall.

FIG. 90 shows an example of the display in the display device 41. 90 (a) to 90 (g) show an example of the first specific effect executed when the fall lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5 or when a big hit is obtained. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is started, the variable display is started in the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b. At the same time, the first specific effect is started. This first specific effect is an effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight each other, and the result of the special figure variation display game and the presence / absence of a fall lottery are notified according to the result of the battle.

As shown in FIG. 90 (b), the effect of fighting the characters is performed, and when the fluctuation time ends, the result of the fight is shown. If the result is out of order in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the result is that the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 90 (c). Further, the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b also display the result mode of the detachment.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the shutter display 93, which is a display imitating the shutter, is closed, and as shown in FIG. 90 (e), the shutter display 93 is completely closed and the fourth specific gaming state is displayed. The end of ST5 and the number of prize balls acquired in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 are notified. That is, the shutter display 93 forms an image notifying that the fall lottery has been won. Then, it shifts to the effect display of the normal game state ST1.

If the result is a small hit in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 90 (c), and the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b In the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b, the result mode of the small hit is displayed. After that, the second special gaming state is entered with the display of FIG. 90 (c), and the displays of FIGS. 90 (d) and (e) are performed at the end of the second special gaming state.

If the result is a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won, the character fights as shown in FIG. 90 (b) and then the ally as shown in FIG. 90 (f). The result is that the character 89a wins. In addition, the result mode of the big hit is displayed on the first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decoration special figure 2 game display unit 88b. And after this, the special game state is started.

In addition, when the result is missed or a small hit in the special figure fluctuation display game without winning the fall lottery, the first specific effect may be performed as a so-called ghost effect. In this case, after the character fights as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the result of the draw is made as shown in FIG. 90 (g). Further, the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b also display the result mode of the missed or small hit.

FIG. 91 shows an example of the second specific effect and the third specific effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), an example of the case where the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit is shown, but the same applies to the case where the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit during the execution of the first specific effect, is started, “Warning! The band 94 displayed as "!" Is displayed. This band 94 is also displayed when the result is shown in the first specific effect as shown in FIG. 91 (b), so as to suggest that there is a result different from the result shown by the first specific effect. ing.

As shown in FIG. 91 (c), the band 94 is not displayed during the execution of the second special gaming state. Then, when the second special game state ends and the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is restarted, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), as the third specific effect, "waiting for intense heat !!" The band 95 is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the shutter display 93 is opened so that the normal mode effect can be seen, and as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the band 95 is also displayed when the variable display is performed in the normal mode effect. Continues to be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the result mode of the big hit is displayed and the first special gaming state is set.

Although the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed in a band shape, other displays may be used. In addition, although the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first specific effect, the second specific effect and the third specific effect are performed instead of the first specific effect. Is also good. Further, only one of the second specific effect and the third specific effect may be performed.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the result of the variable display game is executed. Is provided with control means (game control device 100, effect control means 300) for controlling the game in the game machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained, and the control means is the first. When it is decided to change the gaming state with the fulfillment of one condition, the first specific effect for notifying the change in the gaming state can be executed, and the second condition is satisfied during the execution of the first specific effect. When it is decided to change the gaming state in accordance with the above, in addition to the first specific effect or in place of the first specific effect, a second notifying the change of the gaming state due to the fulfillment of the second condition. It means that a specific effect can be executed. Therefore, even if the second condition is satisfied after the start of the first specific effect, the change in the gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) and a second starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) forming a starting winning opening are provided, and the control means is the first starting. The first variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth, the second variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting mouth, and the first variable is executed. The display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and when the first condition is satisfied and it is decided to change the gaming state with the execution of one of the variable display games, the change in the gaming state is notified. When it is possible to execute the first specific effect to be performed, and it is determined that the second condition is satisfied and the gaming state is changed due to the execution of the other variable display game during the execution of the first specific effect, the first specific effect is to be executed. In addition to or in place of the first specific effect, it is possible to execute a second specific effect that notifies a change in the gaming state due to the fulfillment of the second condition. Therefore, even if the second condition is satisfied after the start of the first specific effect, the change in the gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even when two variable display games are changed at the same time, it is possible to notify the change of the game state based on the execution of each variable display game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the control means executes a third specific effect for notifying the change in the gaming state due to the fulfillment of the second condition in the period from the end of the first specific effect to the change in the gaming state due to the fulfillment of the second condition. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to notify the change of the game state based on the establishment of the second condition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. In addition, the configurations of the above-mentioned modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 having a form different from that of the first embodiment will be described again with reference numerals for parts having the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.
Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Second Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 93) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations and effects are provided, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed as an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game ball paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation handle 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub-display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the hitting ball launching device moves the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 93). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. In the area (display area) where the image on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left and right portions of the center case 40, a board effect device 44, which is a movable effect device for producing a game including a special figure variation display game, is provided by an operating movable effect member. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 93 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, in the lower left of the center case 40, a sub that displays the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game separately from the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the starting memory number. An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting unit composed of a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. A second sub composed of a sub-game display unit 91 and a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. A game display unit 92 is provided. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by the two light emitting units, and the second special figure variation display game are executed by the two light emitting units. A second sub-display unit 94 indicating the number of second start-up memories, which is the right to do so, is provided.

In the first sub-game display unit 91 and the second sub-game display unit 92, the light emitting unit turns off, blinks, and lights a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in variable display and a display indicating the result. Can be displayed by. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 turn off the two light emitting units, respectively, for the number of the first start storage (holding in FIG. 1) and the second starting memory (holding in special figure 2). It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied by displaying the fourth symbol on the display device 41, and the display area is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operating range of the board effect device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board effect device 44. ..

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (a normal figure start gate, a start area, an inflow area) that gives a start condition of a normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 94).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal drawing start gate 34. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won a prize in these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 94).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a starting condition for the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 94).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a starting condition for the second special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 94) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 94). It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may win a prize in the closed state rather than in the open state.
Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, there is a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.
The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The big winning opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 94) as a driving device, and is provided in a special gaming state or a small hit game. During the state, by converting the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It has become. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 94) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball flowing into the large winning opening is detected by any of the large winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player can adjust the firing force and launch the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for a prize in the start winning opening 36, and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called left-handed). By hitting right), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal fluctuation winning device 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming region, and is launched into the right gaming region. The resulting game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map fluctuation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display unit (normal figure display) 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp. It is provided with storage display units 54, 55, 56 for notifying the start storage number of each variation display game composed of.
Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit (first game state display, right-handed notification unit) 57, which notifies that the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed game state. The second game state display unit (second game state display, time reduction state notification unit) 58 that lights up when a state occurs to notify the occurrence of a time reduction state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. A third game status display unit (third game status display, probability status display unit) 59 that displays that the game has been set, and a round display unit 60 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed). Is provided.
The batch display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display device) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven to change. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
Then, when the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment is turned on as the result mode of the loss, and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode of the hit (special result mode) is not. The game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode.

The normal figure display 53 blinks the lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the normal figure hold display 56 displays the start storage number (= hold number) of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 53, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 determines the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, with a plurality of LEDs. It is displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 sets the number of start storages (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, by turning off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting.

The first game status display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off when the left-handed is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed (normal hit). When the game state is such that right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed (when right-handed), the lamp is turned on.

The second game status display unit (time reduction status notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off in the normal gaming state (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated) in which the time reduction state does not occur. When the time saving state has occurred (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and when the probability state of the jackpot is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned off. If the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probability change state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in progress, the lamp is turned off, and in the special game state, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn it on. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 94 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. It also includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, it is a backup storage means capable of holding the data stored in the game control device 100 even when the power is cut off. Then, when the power is restored, control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in reach and non-reach fluctuation display), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of start storages, and the like. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the like. It is connected to the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the starting gate 34, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a logic signal is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. .. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 is changed to a set value that serves as a detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting a probability set value to which a probability value that is a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that forms the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole for inserting the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it goes off.

The set value change switch 151 detects the operation of the set value change button forming the second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and turned off when the set value change button is not pressed.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is a game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability values assigned to each probability setting value are 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, 1/280 for setting 5, and setting 6 for setting 6. It is said to be 1/270. This probability value is a probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and then the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value change state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

Further, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is pressed. When it is turned to the second position, the probability setting value currently selected is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

The probability set value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value by a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated depending on the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like. Further, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability set value information may be displayed by using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. In this case, the information of the probability setting value is displayed while the operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), and other than that, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed. Give priority to display.

In this embodiment, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, and the like, and the probability value used by the game control device 100 for the lottery of the special figure variation display game. Is used as a setting means that allows the assigned probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by the operation of the operation unit. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signal of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 so that the game control device 100 changes the probability setting value, or the setting sub-board side may change the probability setting value. The probability setting value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152, and the determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24). Signal based on), out ball detection switch signal (signal based on detection by the out switch that detects all game balls fired in the game area 32 and finished the game), and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 A first input port 122 is provided.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be obtained. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, in the output unit 130, a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting the opening / closing data of the above is provided. Further, the second output port 134 outputs the display data of the status display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 that displays the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. , A fifth driver 138e is provided to receive the display data output from the second output port 134 and display it on the status display device 160.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 95.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A holdable FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and a sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and a frame forming a movable effect device for producing a game including a special figure variation display game by an operating movable effect member. An effect device may be provided, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. Is provided, and a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38 is won, or the game flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning opening is the payout control device 200 ( From the payout unit controlled by (see FIG. 94), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 94) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the game area 32 is provided. When the game ball driven inside passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start storages is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in ROM 111B. The stored number of the normal map start prize is displayed on the normal map hold display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory for starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is judged. Then, the process of starting the normal map fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process for executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the ordered order, the process of displaying the normal map fluctuation display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the normal figure display 53 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the fluctuations for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. It may be configured.

If the result of the solenoid fluctuation display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that has a special result mode is displayed on the solenoid display 53 according to the type of hit. Along with displaying the stop, the solenoid solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map display 53 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the out of alignment.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition to storing, the second start memory, which forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the big hit random value, the big hit symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted randomness The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. The number of stored start storages is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory. Displayed as a display. It is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game becomes ready to start, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The hit / miss random value for jackpot determination is compared with the determined random value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability set value, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the first special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display device 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After the display during the change of the special figure 1 is performed, the process of displaying the first special figure change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Further, when the second special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After the display during the change of the special figure 2 is performed, the process of displaying the second special figure change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display game and has a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters). Displaying decorative special figures that change the display of symbols, etc.) Performs processing to display the game. Further, the sub-game display unit of the sub-information display device 90 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game that changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit in response to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area ( In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that makes it difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs various effect displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing is performed to generate a special game state or a small hit game state. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the game is entered into the large winning opening. Controls to allow the inflow of balls. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. Is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game results in a high probability state, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state of normal figure, second operation state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. It has become. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) should be a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the probability of normal drawing is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state. That is, the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 is configured to be controlled by either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state. ..

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second hit stop symbol and opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the third hit stop symbol 3 times), it is possible to set.

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal electric opening number of times, and the normal electric opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game to be a second variable time shorter than the first variable time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time-saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) for the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal map, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display may be performed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices or different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, if there is a start memory of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is played. It is designed to be executed (priority is executed). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game is equipped with a coil for magnetic detection, and the game ball utilizes the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used to detect. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 98 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that is a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The signal from the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and the signal from the main body frame opening detection switch are input to the third input port 124, and the third input port 124 is set before the start of the standby time. By reading the state of the input port 124, the state of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 at the time of turning on the power and the open state of the front frame 12 (main body frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an open / close detecting means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front frame 12. As described above, when the power is turned on with the front frame 12 open and the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value can be changed in the probability setting value change state. Will be. Further, when the power is turned on while the setting value change button is pressed without turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing. Since the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the opening of the front frame 12 is a condition.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue to operate the set value change button from the power-on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power is not accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / writeable RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16), and if it is normal (step S16; Y), the power failure in the RWM. It is determined whether the value of the inspection area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determining means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on. When the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S21). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set.

In the case of the probability set value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is cut off during the probability setting value change state and the RAM data is normally backed up. In this case, the probability setting is set again. The value is changed. Further, when the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for a probability setting value, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, an area for game control, and an area for displaying a state are set in order from the beginning. In the area for the probability setting value, a probability setting value area for storing the information of the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. Will be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. Further, in the area for the initial value random number, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number, which are updated at any time, are stored. Further, the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 that are updated at any time are stored in the variable pattern random number area. Further, in the game control area, a work area and a stack area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control are stored are set. Further, in the work area for displaying the status, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying a base value, a bonus ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the number of payouts based on the winning in the winning area. The information to be calculated and necessary for displaying the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected by the outswitch and information on the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the bonus ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize opening from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present, during the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by character).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the area for the variable pattern random number are performed. The area for game control will be cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. Further, the RAM clear start address 1 described later is the start address of the area for the probability setting value, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are performed. The area for, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared. Further, the RAM clear start address 3 described later is the start address of the game control area, and the game control area is cleared by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set. Become.

The area for status display is initialized when the validity is judged in the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing described later and it is abnormal, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 set in the case is set, the area for displaying the status may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the entire area of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. In addition, one or a plurality of the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, the area for the game control, and the area for displaying the state may be targeted. When targeting multiple areas, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the validity may be judged individually, or the checksums of each area may be added up to determine the validity. It may be judged collectively.

When the main body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24 and the state of the third input port 124 read earlier. It is determined from (step S24) whether the set value change switch is in the ON state.

When the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S30, and processing is performed when the power is normally restored from the power failure. When the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area. Perform processing. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 has data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. It is an initialization means to initialize.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S16; N or step S17; N), and when it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S19; N), step S25. And the process of initializing all the RAM areas is performed. That is, the RAM area for the probability setting value and the RAM area for the status display are initialized only when a RAM error occurs. Further, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). When the main body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. As will be described later, in steps S35 and S36, the RAM is initialized. In this case, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are used. Area, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial value is saved. The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

When the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), a command (specific information) for instructing the setting change is issued to the effect control board (effect control device). It is transmitted to 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is shut off. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and operates the board effect device 44, based on receiving the command for changing the setting. , By outputting voice from the speakers 19a and 19b, etc., a notification prompting the change of the probability set value is performed. This notification continues until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this case, if the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the front frame 12 is opened, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, and then the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. It is determined that the switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), and the process proceeds to step S35 to perform a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. When the control is stopped in step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened after the power of the gaming machine is turned off, or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the probability setting value cannot be changed to the changed state, so that the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is performed by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may perform the notification. For example, the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100 may be used for notification, and the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be used to perform a display that is not used as identification information. Alternatively, a display device for notifying the abnormality may be provided.

As a process when the power is normally restored from the power failure, in step S30 of FIG. 97, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The area to be initialized here is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is considered to be indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S31).

Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S31; N), steps S32 and S33 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S34. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S31; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is provided. On (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Proceed to. In the case of this embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the screen designation. Send multiple commands such as commands (for example, a customer waiting demo command when waiting for customers, and a recovery screen command in other cases). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the effect of the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

The screen specification command sends a command according to the state of the restarted game. When resuming the special figure fluctuation display game that was interrupted due to the power cutoff due to the resumption of control, a recovery screen command that provides recovery information is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the special figure variation display game to be restarted is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, when resuming the special game state interrupted by power interruption due to the resumption of control, a special game state resumption command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 97, the RAM area to be cleared should be cleared to 0 (step S35) and initialized as the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). Here, when the backed up information is normal and the game is migrated from step S21 or S23, the RAM clear start address 2 is set, so that the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the game control are used. The RAM area (work area and stack area) of is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number.

On the other hand, when the backed up information is abnormal and the process is migrated from step S27, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the variation pattern random number are set. And the area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared and the initial value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

Further, the area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 in the area for the probability setting value. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability, it is possible to minimize the damage to the amusement store even if the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or fraudulent activity. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process of setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the probability set value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). This makes it possible to display the information of the probability set value currently set in the probability set value display device 153.

Then, the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command during the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , Step S45. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and displays the panel effect device 44. Notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is performed by the operation, the output of voice by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. Although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, settings for outputting a security signal are also made. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability set value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized yet, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be made.

Further, as the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, in step S41 of FIG. 97, the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the game is initialized. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the power area (step S43). As a result, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the RAM initial stage. Multiple commands such as a conversion command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the effect of the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

In step S45, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). RWM is specified as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal map (win symbol random number)). After saving in the area (step S47), the interrupt is permitted (step S48). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the game. Further, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be increased by continuously incrementing the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main process. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. Also, depending on the model, there are some gaming machines that do not have a random number with the initial value of the winning symbol.

Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the case of big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S49, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S50), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S49) (step S48), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S49, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, which causes the main process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S53) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization operation unit. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time. Will be.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after the process of step S28 is performed, the process may be returned to the process of step S26, and the processes of steps S26 to S28 may be repeated until the setting key switch is turned on. .. That is, the control of the game may be stopped and the setting key switch may be turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124, not the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, if the state in which the processes of steps S26 to S28 are repeatedly performed continues for a certain period of time, the process may proceed to step S29 and wait for the power to be cut off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state. The open state of the frame 12 does not have to be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition.

Further, it may be possible to shift to the probability setting value change state only on the condition that the setting value change switch is on without providing the setting key switch. That is, if the process of steps S22 and S23 is not performed and the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y), the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. 97. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 of FIG. 97 for initializing the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control by terminating without doing or setting the same probability setting value. By shifting to the probability set value change state only on the condition that the set value change switch is on, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be diverted.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state that gives a game value to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). The control means includes a setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the control means is a storage means (RAM111C) capable of holding the stored contents even in the power cutoff state. ), The validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on, and the operation unit for selecting the probability set value. A probability setting is provided when the storage means is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means, and the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate. It means that the notification prompting the selection of the value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state. Further, when the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but it is initialized by performing a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state.

Further, the control means is configured so that the probability set value can be selected when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is stored by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the value is not valid, the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is continued until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability set value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

Further, the game control means includes a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means. When the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means has the specific information. It means that the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed based on the reception of. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

Further, when the effect control means receives the specific information, the effect control means continues the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the control means can retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off. If the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, the storage means (RAM111C) is provided, and when the power is turned on, the first operation unit and the second operation unit are restored based on the information stored in the storage means. 1 When the operation unit is operated, the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means, and when only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, the storage means is initially set. It means that it was made to become. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, it is possible to perform an operation of selecting a probability set value and an operation of selecting initialization using the same operation unit, and it is possible to improve work efficiency in a game store. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the control means includes a legitimacy determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on, and is stored in the storage means by the legitimacy determining means. When it is determined that the information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, the notification prompting the initialization of the storage means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to be in a changeable state in which the probability set value can be changed by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If it is determined by the validity determination means that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate and the first operation unit is not operated, the first operation unit is operated. This means that a notification is given to prompt the user to turn on the power. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. A plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change)) are assigned to the control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned. Necessary for controlling the game by the setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the switch 151)) and the control means including the information of the probability set values selected by the setting means. A storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information is provided, and the control means initially stores the storage means when the power of the game machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit is operated among the plurality of operation units. It means that it was made to become. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 98 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for controlling the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, the random number update process 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process, the special figure. 1. Random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 2 is performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a of the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and monitoring of errors ( Performs a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.).

Next, the probability setting value change process (step S108) for changing and confirming the probability set value is performed, and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S109). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process related to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, special The special figure game process (step S112) for performing the process related to the figure variation display game and the normal figure game process (step S113) for performing the process related to the normal figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, in the case of the probability setting value change state (step S109; Y) or the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above processing related to the game. That is, in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed.

In the case of the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the normal figure game process (step S113) should not be performed. However, it may be done for one or more of these. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed so that the prize balls are paid out. Further, a process other than the above-mentioned process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, do not perform random number update process 1 (step S105) or random number update process 2 (step S106) in the probability setting value change state, and do not update random numbers in the probability setting value change state or probability setting value confirmation mode. You can do it. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S116) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and a base value is obtained from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. The status display edit output process is performed (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c is synthesized and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step). S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame opening" data, "security signal" data) is digitized / external information output port. Output to 136 (step S146).

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, a plurality of light emitting display units provided in the batch display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (for example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, and "big hit signal" are combined. 4 ”data,“ symbol confirmation count signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and launch permission output data are combined (step S150), and the combined data is combined. Output to the output port 137 for outputting external information / emission permission signal (step S151).

Next, the off-output data of the probability setting value display is set as the display content in the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag is a flag set when the probability setting value display device 153 is permitted to display the probability setting value.

When this probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the display data is output as the probability setting value display. Output to port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability set value display device 153 is displayed regarding the probability set value. On the other hand, when the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 of the probability set value display (step S155). In this case, the off-output data set in step S152 is set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S158). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability set value display data is loaded as the test signal output data from the probability set value display data area. That is, as for the information regarding the probability set value among the test signals to the test firing device, the display data of the probability set value display device 153 is used as it is. This simplifies the processing and makes it possible to output accurate information without changing the information of the probability set value. Of course, the data for display may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S162), and if it is not in the ON state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. Further, in the case of the on state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. After that, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device (step S164), and the output process is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize ball, and the prize has not yet been sent. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information regarding the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas has a prize number counter area for each prize ball set for each prize opening (in the case of this embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 prizes can be stored in each of the 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. , The 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to store up to 255 prizes, respectively.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, "0" is set in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count count. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Determination (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. When it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value in the main prize ball signal output frequency region is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processes of steps S181 to S191 are processes for updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processes of steps S192 to S201 are processes for transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state). Will be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, instead of transmitting the payout command for each timer interrupt, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. It is configured to send a payout command when it is in a state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy state) are, for example, during the payout operation, ball lending operation, shoot ball out error, overflow error, frame radio wave fraud, and payout ball detection switch (payout). Counting the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls) during an abnormality (switch for monitoring the balls), an error of insufficient payout, an error of overpayment ) Is present (when it is not 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, "0" is set in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count count.

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determination (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 Acquire the payout number command corresponding to the address of (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and is backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be achieved without having the function to do so.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, which has a problem of increasing the cost. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball with different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the game ball to the winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38) provided in the game area 32. The game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the prize, and the payout control means (payout control device) that controls the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. 200), and the game control means issues a prize ball command based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. When a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without transmitting to the payout control means. I am trying to do it.

Further, a plurality of winning areas (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, and the game control means (game control device 100) is provided. A prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of a game ball has not been transmitted is provided for each prize ball number, and a status signal can start payout control. When there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal is sent by the payout control means. Whether or not the payout control can be started is specified before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command.

In addition, the game is controlled comprehensively, and a prize ball command is issued based on the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38). The game is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting the game and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The control means issues a prize ball command when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) to be transmitted to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area. The external information output means (game control device 100) is provided, and the external information output means can start the payout control by the state signal output from the payout control means. It means that the prize ball signal is output regardless of the presence or absence.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is issued by the payout control means (payout control device 200). ), The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the game to the predetermined winning area. By updating when the ball wins and updating in response to transmission to the prize ball command to the payout control means, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored, and the external information output means can be used. It is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area, and output the prize ball signal to the outside of the game machine every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The ball signal counter can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, updates the winning ball when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and the winning ball by the external information output means. By updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been cumulatively processed yet.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. It is configured so that the main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted). The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of outputs.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the schedule and the result can be matched. It is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc., and even if the payout is made after the big hit is completed, the hall control (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judgment).

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 101 shows a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the changed state (step S299). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S299; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S300). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processes after step S301 are performed as the processes related to the progress of the game. On the other hand, in the case of the probability setting value change state (step S299; Y) or the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed without processing related to winning.

In the case of the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the special variable winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the normal dynamic winning device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and the winning slot is always available for winning. We have decided not to monitor the winnings, but you may do so for one or more of these. For example, fraudulent monitoring of the special variable winning device 38 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be performed. Further, a process other than the above-mentioned process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the large winning opening is large even though the large winning opening is not open. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraudulent monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, a fraudulent winning error notification command, and a fraudulent winning Information on the upper limit of the number (number of fraud occurrence judgments), the address of the winning slot switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. Further, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, in addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are displayed for each switch. Information on the lower address of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning opening device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning opening is not open even though the large winning opening is not open. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S304) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the mouth and detecting a normal winning is executed.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden (step S305), and monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the Fuden even though the Fuden is not open. At the same time, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S306) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for a winning opening switch (for example, a winning opening switch 36a of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and a winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize is prepared (step S307), and the winning number counter is updated to update the number of winnings. The process (step S308) is performed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches for monitoring the status and the signal to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 1, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch error is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. The state monitoring based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", the state monitoring based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. To.

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the game machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch 63. The status monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", the status monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines the status such as whether an error has occurred. The state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to to the game machine status monitoring table 3, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. 2 Condition monitoring based on the signal is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. Since the processes of steps S315 to S317 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", they are executed once for every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 102 shows the probability setting value change process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value change process, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value is changed (step S401), and if it is not the probability setting value change state (step S401; N), the probability setting value can be confirmed. The probability set value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability set value change process is terminated.

Further, in the case of the probability setting value change state (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, the probability setting value extinguishing timer is updated by -1 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0. .. When the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability set value information is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output process (see FIG. 99) described above. If the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403; N), the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the output processing described above.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability set value has been changed (step S405). The probability setting value changed is a state in which the probability setting value used in the game is newly set by performing the confirmation operation described later, and in this case, the probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability set value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406).

Then, in the determination of whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether or not the input state from the set value change switch has changed to the on state. That is, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value change button is pressed. If there is no input from the set value change switch (step S406; N), the process proceeds to step S411.

Further, when there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5. The values of 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to the settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value will change sequentially. In addition, when the value of the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the probability setting value area for work is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value used for the game does not change. The probability setting value selected based on the confirmation operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Further, although the number of probability setting values is set to 6 here, it is possible to set the number to any other value.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes the information of the newly selected probability setting value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and a blank display is performed in which nothing is displayed, and then new probability setting value information is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as a specific display, but other displays may be used. For example, when the probability setting value is displayed by a number from 1 to 6, a display other than this number may be used as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as a display of the probability set value. Further, when the display of the probability setting value is displayed in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability setting value may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the specific display has elapsed. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode in which blinking is performed, a display mode in which the blinking cycle is different from that in the non-specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from that in the non-specific display. ..

Further, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED light emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. The specific notification, which is the notification that the selected probability set value has been changed, may be performed by the operation of the above, the output of the voice by the speakers 19a, 19b, and the like. That is, the specific notification may be performed together with the specific display or instead of the specific display. Further, the display device 41, the special figure 1 display device 51, and the special figure 2 display device may be displayed in the same manner as the probability set value display device 153.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411). The touch switch is a sensor that can detect the contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. When there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value change process ends. When there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). As a result, the selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used for the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a confirmation operation for determining the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be a confirmation operation, and an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), the command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value change process is completed. .. Based on receiving the command to change the probability set value, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and displays the panel effect device 44. It notifies that the probability set value has been changed by the operation, the output of the voice by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). When the setting key switch is not off (step S416; N), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position, the probability setting value change process is terminated. When the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (step S417), and the clear target is set. The RAM area of is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S419).

As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number may be cleared. In addition, the area related to the change work, such as the probability setting value area for work that temporarily stores the information of the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state and various flags in the area for the probability setting value, is cleared. To. Therefore, since the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared, the display on the probability setting value display device 153 ends. In addition, since the flag for changing the probability setting value is cleared, the probability setting value change state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and the command for completing the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (the effect control device 300). Step S421), the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. 97. Based on receiving the command to change the probability set value, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and displays the panel effect device 44. It notifies that the change of the probability set value is completed by the operation, the output of the voice by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the probability setting A plurality of commands such as a command for ending the change (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the effect of the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played on a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which the player is given a gaming value. Probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery are assigned are set to multiple types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from the above is provided, and the setting means includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value, based on the operation of the operation unit. When the display of the display unit is updated with the selection operation of the probability set value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means is configured to display a display that is not used as a display of information on the probability set value as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means is configured to display the updated information for a certain period in a manner different from that after the lapse of the certain period as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
FIG. 103 shows the probability set value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability set value change process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (step S431). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. In the case of this probability setting value confirmation mode, it can be determined from the fact that the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

When the mode is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed is set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153. After that, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S433).

The term “during the game” means that the game is being executed, the special map variation display game is being executed, the normal map variation display game is being executed, the special game state is being played, or the normal map variation display game is being executed, or the normal map is being hit. That is, it is a case where the state of the game is a prohibited state in which it is prohibited to start the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. In this case, information indicating that the mode cannot shift to the probability set value confirmation mode because the game is being played may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 to notify the effect.

The conditions for determining that the game is in progress (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. One or more states selected from the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, the execution of the normal figure fluctuation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the normal figure may be a condition, for example, the special figure. It may be said that the game is being played when it corresponds to either during the execution of the variable display game or during the special gaming state. Further, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, even if the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been fired in the game area 32 and finished the game detects the game balls, it is assumed that the game is being played for a predetermined period, and the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. good. Further, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode during the power saving mode that shifts after a certain period of time has passed without the game being performed. This power saving mode is released when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

Further, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state, that is, whether the operation unit is operated to set the predetermined state (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (step S435), and the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S436). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the probability setting value currently set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is displayed.

After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437), the command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process is performed. finish. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. Further, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and produces a board effect based on receiving the command during the probability setting value confirmation. The operation of the device 44, the output of voice by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like are used to notify that the probability set value is being confirmed.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. In this case, the probability set value confirmation mode continues.

When the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S439; N), the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is set. Then, a command to end the probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S442), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed based on the command of the probability set value confirmation end.

That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position while the power is turned on, and ends by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value is changed.

As described above, by not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is in progress, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress. , The fairness of the game can be ensured. In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. If becomes, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

In addition, the condition for not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode is set to be during the game, but the condition is not limited to this, and the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100. Anything can be used as long as it selects whether or not to do so. For example, in the case of a high probability state, it is possible not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the probability setting value confirmation mode may not be entered when a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played on a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is based on the fact that the operation unit is operated to set a predetermined state. , It is possible to set the confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is the prohibited state in which it is prohibited to start the confirmation state, the operation unit It means that even if it is in the predetermined state, it is not in the confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being shown.

Further, the prohibited state is a state in which the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, the prohibited state is a state in which a special gaming state is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and the right to execute the game can be generated by winning, and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. The hit state (normal map hit state) in which the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state when the normal variable winning device 37 is executed and the result of the normal figure game becomes a specific result is determined based on the above. A normal variable winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated is provided, and the prohibited state is a state in which the normal figure game is being executed or a hit state is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, in the setting means, when the operation unit is set to the predetermined state in the state where the state of the game controlled by the control means is the prohibited state, and the prohibited state ends while the predetermined state is set, the prohibited state is set. It will be in the confirmation state based on the end. Therefore, if the game does not progress, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and special features based on the winning. Figure Fluctuation display Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The game result pre-judgment is performed.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been timed up, it is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

If the special figure game processing number is "0" in step A7, the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change are in progress. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
When the special figure game processing number is "1" in step A7, the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A12) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big hit end processing are performed. The large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the big hit end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. The small hit fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A16) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. ..
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing are performed. The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end processing (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special drawing normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. .. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. , End the special figure game processing. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and subsequent processing is performed. conduct.

The small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 105, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the first step. 1 It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the starting port (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the first starting port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time reduction is in progress (during normal electric support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special time reduction is not in progress (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special time reduction is in progress (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform a notification (warning) instructing the effect to strike by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table for the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning to the second starting port. Determination (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variation. When it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning of the game ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step. The process proceeds to the process of A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step A113 that the electric power fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special feature. Figure The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), information on the starting port to be monitored without winning is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 107, in the special start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is input to the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of output times overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A135; Y). Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) has been won (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol of the RWM is extracted and prepared. Save in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and is the starting right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a starting storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of memories. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting storage up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 108, first, the start opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special drawing start opening switch common process is checked, and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize. (Step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A152; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is not in progress or the small hit is not occurring (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the player has won the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not to the first start port (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A158; Y), whether or not the jackpot random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to the process of step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A167).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, which are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing. That is, the determination is made according to the set probability setting value. Further, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing.

Through the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command containing the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment, etc.) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 109, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started (step A309), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (step A309). A309; N) sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and an effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special figure normal processing is terminated. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command forming the standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A309 (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

If the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" in step A301 (step A301; N), a decorative special figure reserved number command corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 is prepared (step A302). Next, the effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.
If the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" in step A305 (step A305; N), a decorative special figure reserved number command corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 1 is prepared (step A306). Next, the effect command setting process (step A307) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, if the special figure 2 hold number is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 110A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321), and the first step is made. To set the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit, and to determine whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the misalignment information and the small hit information in the small hit flag of is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A324) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step A332). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A333). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 110 (a). It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 110 (b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed hit flag 2 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step A352). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A353). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. This makes it possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process performed in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 111, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability set value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value, the jackpot judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A382), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value is different depending on the probability setting value or the probability state. Is also good. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be collectively used as a judgment value table.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it is determined as a small hit in a later small hit determination process. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A384). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is acquired (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). ). Further, in the case of not in the high probability state (step A384; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). .. The upper limit determination value to be acquired here is acquired with reference to the upper limit determination value table set in step A381 described above.

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A358), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 112, in this small hit determination process, first, the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit determination value is set for each probability set value. In addition, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value in the same probability set value do not overlap. The range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit determination value is the same even if the probability setting value is different. When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A405), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

As in the case of the big hit judgment, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. , The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively specified in the judgment value table provided for each probability set value. Further, although the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if it is a different probability setting value, the small hit lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value. In this case, it depends on the probability setting value. And select the lower limit judgment value for small hits.

Further, the probability setting values referred to in the process of setting the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381) and the process of setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401) are shown. If the value is an abnormal value that does not correspond to any probability setting value, the setting may be made assuming that it is a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred. The game may be stopped and an error notification may be performed. In addition, although the probability setting value is referred to for each judgment of big hit and each judgment of small hit, the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value when the probability setting value is set in the probability setting value change state. Or, a process of setting a small hit upper limit determination value may be performed, and this may only be referred to when determining a large hit or determining a small hit.

[Processing during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 113, in the special figure fluctuation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag (special figure 1 fluctuation flag or special figure 2 fluctuation flag) is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting is performed. Processing is performed (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command forming the stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variation time of the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. Upon receiving this symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game, and stops and displays the result.

After that, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 msec regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop symbol pattern. .. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, the process number "2" related to the process during display of the special figure is set as the process number (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606).

Next, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol) is saved. 2 Save the fluctuating signal (OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A608), and set the symbol for the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. Save the value (eg 256 ms) (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the processing during the special figure change is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM The process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the process of clearing the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, when it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705) and it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game is started. (For example, ON the signal during operation of the condition device, ON the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device, ON the signal per special symbol 2) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708). The round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706), and the jackpot is a jackpot (step A706). If it is determined to be A706; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on, (Turn on the signal per special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. Save in the upper limit area of the number of rounds of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step) is prepared. A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of this embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned OFF otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are set. It is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A724) for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It is a means for generating a special game state that generates a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), a high probability fluctuation number region for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state. The probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high by performing the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A726) for updating the value (high probability fluctuation number) and the effect mode information check process (step A727) for setting the effect mode. It is determined whether it is a stochastic state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special map is not high (step A728; N), the decorative special map command is loaded from the decorative special map command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command is set. The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of a small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, "7" related to the small hit fanfare processing is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is output as ON (big hit + small hit). )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A737), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A739), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (turning on the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the process of displaying the special figure is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state. The high probability fluctuation number update process (step A743) for updating the area value (high probability fluctuation number) and the effect mode information check process (step A744) for setting the effect mode are performed, and the remaining rotation for switching corresponding to the effect mode number is performed. A number is set (step A745), and it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A746). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
When it is determined in step A746 that the production remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A746; N), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A747). ), The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A750), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A746 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command is set. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to the process of step A749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the Fuzu game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. Perform the monitoring process (step B2). Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, it is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and the effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the normal map fluctuation are in progress. Performs normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power release time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display processing (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "3", the normal figure hitting process is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process (step) related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53. Perform B15) to end the normal map game processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process shifts to the process of step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed. conduct.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 117, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is “0” (step B301), and when the normal figure holding number is “0” (step B301; Y). ) Set "0" for the normal processing of the normal figure as the processing number (step B322), and save the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing of the normal map is terminated.

When the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the hit random number storage area (for the number of holds 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holds 1) of the RWM. The loaded area, that is, the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game is It is determined whether the normal probability (that is, the low probability of the normal figure) is higher than the high probability of the normal figure, that is, the time is shortened (step B303).

When the normal probability is not high (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the low probability of the normal figure is set (step B304), and when the normal probability is high (step B303). ; Y) sets the lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of high probability in the normal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (step B306), and if the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is step B304 or B305. It is determined whether or not it is less than the lower limit determination value set in (step B307).

When the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the hit flag Save the outlier information in the area (step B308), set the outlier stop symbol number (step B309), save the outlier symbol information in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B310), and stop the stop symbol number in the normal symbol. Save in the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the hit loaded in step B302. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save to the area (step B314).

In the case of this embodiment, the probability of hit at the time of low probability of normal map is 0/251, the probability of hit at the time of high probability of normal map is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the lower probability judgment value is low probability. "251", the high probability lower limit determination value is "1". Therefore, when the probability is low, the value of the hit random number will be different in all cases of "0" to "250". Further, at the time of high probability in the normal figure, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the hit random number is "0" is out of the question.
Further, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, a process of moving up the ranks of the number of reserved numbers 2 to 4 held after the number of reserved numbers 1 by one as the game for displaying the fluctuation of the number of normal figures related to the oldest number of reserved numbers 1 is executed. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 in the random number storage area for the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B320). Then, the normal map changing process transition setting process (step B321) for shifting to the normal map changing process is performed, and the normal map normal process is terminated. That is, the game execution means by which the game control device 100 executes the normal map variation display game as the variable display game (based on the normal map start memory) based on the detection of the game ball at the normal map start gate 34 (inflow region). Make a game.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, the fluctuation time is set to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. ..

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 118, in the normal map changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" related to the normal map display process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display 53, is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B403), and the fluctuation of the normal map ends. The signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and the stop flag indicating that the normal figure fluctuation display game is stopped is set in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area. Save (step B405), and end the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 119, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" related to normal processing is set as the processing number (step B515), and the processing number is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area (step). B516). After that, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process of displaying the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (for example, "0"). Or "5") and save it in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (for example, “4” or “7”) is acquired and saved in the normal figure hit end pointer area (step B506). Next, the normal power release time (for example, 1700 msec or 2600 msec) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B507).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal processing per map (step B508), and the processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B509). After that, a signal relating to the start of hitting the solenoid fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the normal symbol 1) and a signal relating to the start of operating the solenoid (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the solenoid electric accessory 1) are set as test signals. The on-data is saved in the output data area of the solenoid solenoid (step B511) in order to save the data in the output data area (step B510) and output the signal for driving (on) the solenoid solenoid.

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the illegal winning number area (step B513). Then, a flag (a flag outside the fraud monitoring period) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing during display of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 120, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (Step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B603), and the value of the control pointer per normal figure (step). Branch processing is performed according to the value before updating by +1 in B603 (step B604).
Further, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the process per normal control pointer area in step B603 is not updated by +1 and is hit the normal figure. Branch processing is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B604).

When the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The wait time after the 37 is closed is saved in the normal-figure game processing timer area (step B605), and the off-data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area (step B606) in order to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c. End the process during drawing.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is used. The opening time of the normal power is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B607), and the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B608). Ends the process during normal operation.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is "6", it is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer in order to move to step B609 and control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37. To save the normal power release time in the normal power release time in the normal power game processing timer area (step B609) and turn on the normal power solenoid 37c, save the on-data in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B610), and hit the normal power figure. End the process.

If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B612), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the solenoid solenoid 37c, the off-data is saved in the output data area of the solenoid solenoid (step B614), and the process of hitting the drawing is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B605, the wait time is 300 msec, in step B607, the normal power release time is 1700 msec, in step B609, the normal power release time is 2600 msec, and in step B613. It saves 600msec as the processing time for the remaining spheres of the Fuden.
Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 119, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "1700 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, the normal power release time is "1700 msec", so that the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then, since the control pointer is "0", the wait time is 300 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "1", so that the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "2", so that it takes 300 msec. The wait time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so 600 msec. The remaining ball processing time of the normal electric power is set.

Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 119, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "2600 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, the normal power release time is "2600 msec", so that the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then, since the control pointer is "5", the wait time is 300 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "6", so that the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "7", so that it is 600 msec. The remaining ball processing time of the normal electric power is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes a normal figure game (normal figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the normal figure game becomes a specific result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened. It serves as a control means for a normal variable winning device that can generate a hit state (normal figure hit state) to be converted.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S111), winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116) are used. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N), , The off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally transmitted. It is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to the process of step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (. Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is cleared in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810 is performed. Move to the processing of. Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process of step S810 is performed without the process of step S809. Transition.

Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), and the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), it is common. When the electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y) or when the big prize opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S814; Y). Step S817), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), panel radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S811; N), frame radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S812; N), and general electric wave fraud has not occurred. (Step S813; N), when the large winning opening fraud has not occurred (step S814; N), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality has occurred (step S815).
When a switch error is occurring (step S815; Y), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If the switch error is not occurring (step S815; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S820) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
Next, if the symbol confirmation count control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process is terminated.
If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). S824), the external information editing process is terminated.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 123 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 123, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, the sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and the control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 are performed. The decorative control process (step C18) to be performed, the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 124 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to the process of step C204. When it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 125 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that the MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the start memory (holding) in which the special figure change display game has not been executed becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be used. It is a production such as performing a production display. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

In addition, commands related to power-on and commands related to probability setting values are processed by single-shot command processing. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for recovering from a power failure and commands for initializing RAM. Examples of the command related to the probability setting value include commands for changing the probability setting, changing the probability setting value, ending the probability setting change, checking the probability setting value, and ending the confirmation of the probability setting value.

In the above second embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode, but the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in the case of, the probability setting value may be changed to the changed state. However, since the RAM is initialized when the probability setting value change state ends, either the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the normal figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the special game state is being played, or the normal figure is being hit. It may be a condition that it does not correspond to. Further, it may be a condition that the customer is waiting. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may not be possible to shift to the probability set value change state.

Further, although the initialization of the RAM 111C is performed when the probability setting value change state ends, the initialization of the RAM 111C may not be performed except when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the data of the RAM 111C.

Further, although the probability values corresponding to each probability setting value are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 126 (a) shows the probability setting value in this embodiment. The value in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C is set to take a value of 0 to 5. The same applies to the working probability setting value area. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The display of the probability set value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability set value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in settings 1 to 6.

FIG. 126 (b) shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the probability values of settings 1 to 3 are assigned as settings 4 to 6. Therefore, it is practically possible to switch the probability value in three stages. Other than this, it is the same as in FIG. 126 (a). By doing so, when the 6-step probability value is unnecessary, only the probability value needs to be different, and the design can be easily changed.

It should be noted that it is free to assign which probability value to which probability setting value, and for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value in the probability setting value area (working probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by operating the setting value change button, the order of the probability values that change when the setting value change button is operated differs by changing the assignment. It becomes an order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to the two probability setting values, the change stage can be set to 4 stages, and any stage of 1 to 6 can be set.

FIG. 126 (c) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the settings 4 to 6 in FIG. 126 (b) are set to the settings 1 to 3, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 is also set to 1 to 3 correspondingly. As a result, the display of the probability set value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible to make it easier for the person in charge of the work to grasp the probability value.

FIG. 126 (d) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, it is possible to set only one probability value substantially, and even if the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to deal with it only by setting the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, the same display is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 even if the setting value change button is operated, but the operation can be performed by performing the specific display (for example, blank display) as described above. It will be easier for workers to know that it has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value region is set to 6, any number other than this may be used. For example, in the case of FIGS. 126 (b) and 126 (c), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 126 (d), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be one. Further, in order to make it possible to set a larger number of steps, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be 7 or more. Further, although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the selected probability value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

In addition, the probability value of the big hit is assigned according to the probability setting value, but the probability value of the small hit is also assigned, and the probability value of the small hit is also changed in response to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The probability value of the big hit and the probability value of the small hit corresponding to each probability set value can be determined independently. However, when only big hits and small hits are made as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small hit according to the probability value of the big hit. Further, the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game may be set according to the probability setting value that defines the probability value of the big hit, or may be set independently.

Further, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. This setting sub-board may be removed, and a sub-board or the like that has undergone termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion with the setting sub-board of the game control device 100. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and it is possible to reduce the cost. Further, in a gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, an operation probability M may be provided for each probability set value.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the gaming control device 100 transmits a command to instruct the payout control device 200 to pay out when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in this modification is provided with a storage means capable of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off. The storage means stores information on the payout command received from the game control device 100, and pays out based on the information stored here. In this way, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits the payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. .. Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage means of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 127 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. 96. In this process, when the setting change instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the payout instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). The payout control device 200 starts paying out based on the information backed up in its own storage means based on receiving the command of the payout instruction. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be performed based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from being impaired. can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to the notification prompting the change of the probability set value, the notification that the payout may be performed is also performed. May be. Further, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200 not only in the above case, but for example, in the case of transmitting the command whose probability setting is being changed in FIG. 97 to the effect control device 300 (step). S40) or when the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), the payout instruction command (specific information) may be transmitted to the payout control device 200.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game are assigned. A setting means (setting means) that enables the selected probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The game control device 100) and the payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information from the game control means, and the game control means stores the stored contents even when the power is cut off. A storage means (RAM 111C) capable of holding the information, a validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on, and a probability set value are selected. The information stored in the storage means is not legitimate by the validation means, including the initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for performing the operation. When the determination is made, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means notifies the selection of the probability set value based on the reception of the specific information. The payout control means is provided with a payout information storage means that can retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off and can store the payout information received from the game control means, and when the specific information is received, it is stored in the payout information storage means. It means that the control to pay out the game medium is performed based on the payout information. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and not to impair the profit obtained by the player. Further, when the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but it is initialized by performing a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is prepared with a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability set value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value change process shown in FIG. 128 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. 102. In this probability setting value change process, a confirmation condition monitoring process (step S450) for monitoring whether or not the condition for determining the selected probability setting value is satisfied is performed.

[Determining condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 129, in the determination condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and when there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end wait flag (step S457), performs the processes of steps S412 to S415, and ends the confirmation condition monitoring process.

That is, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first definite condition on condition of the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end wait flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second confirmation condition as described later, and here, the second confirmation condition is satisfied because the first confirmation condition on the condition of input from the touch switch is satisfied. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor, the end wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, when there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, when the first determination condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not there is an end waiting flag (step S451). If there is an end wait flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, the monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end wait flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

If the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. When the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is saved in the change end timer area (step S453), and the end wait flag is set (step S454).

After that, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. When the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing after step S457 is performed, and the confirmation condition monitoring processing is terminated. That is, the second definite condition is satisfied and the selected probability setting value is set when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch performing the second operation is performed. It has become so.

As described above, in this modification, the probability setting value selected by satisfying either the first definite condition or the second definite condition is set as the probability setting value used for the game. Until these confirmation conditions are satisfied, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. not. Therefore, if the power is cut off before the determination condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In the probability setting value change state, the operation handle 24 may be touched to notify that the selected probability setting value is set. This notification may be always performed in the state where the probability setting value is changed, or may be performed only in the state where the end wait flag is set. Further, the first definite condition and the second definite condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the second confirmation condition may be set only when the setting key switch is turned off. Further, a probability setting value selected by preparing three or more definite conditions and satisfying any of them may be set.

Further, although it is assumed that the original probability setting value is set when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, if the information in the probability setting value area is set to the initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the start of the probability setting value change state, and the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, this initial value. May be set. In this case, an arbitrary probability setting value can be set in advance as the initial value, but for example, the same probability as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be a set value.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means satisfies any one of a plurality of determination conditions. It means that the probability setting value selected based on is set. Therefore, it is possible to surely change the probability set value. In addition, by providing a plurality of definite conditions, the degree of freedom of work can be increased, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.

Further, if the power supply is cut off before any one of the plurality of determination conditions is satisfied, the setting means does not set the selected probability setting value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Further, the plurality of definite conditions include a first definite condition and a second definite condition, the first definite condition is that a predetermined first operation has been performed, and the second definite condition is the first operation. Is that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to surely change the probability set value.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification does not have a setting key operation unit in the setting means, and does not have a setting key switch 152. In addition, the conditions for transitioning to a changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 130 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. 96. In this process, when the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), is the setting value change switch turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier? Is determined (step S61).

When the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 97 in order to perform processing when the power is normally restored from the power failure. Further, when the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S61; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination process, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability setting value change state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. ..

When the flag for changing the probability set value is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the figure is used to perform the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the set value can be changed. The process proceeds to step S35 of 97. In this modification, since the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 does not have to be performed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N), the process proceeds to step S41 of FIG. 97 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is not normal, is the set value change switch turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier after setting the RAM clear start address 1 (step S25)? Is determined (step S64). When the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S64; N), the setting change instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28) to prohibit RAM access. (Step S29), the control is stopped and the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

Further, when the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as in step S62. When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y), in order to perform the RAM initialization process and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. The process proceeds to step S35 of FIG. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition judgment processing]
FIG. 131 shows the transition determination process (steps S62, S65) in the above-mentioned main process. In this transition determination process, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

In this modification, the staff can shift to the probability set value change state by putting the game balls into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the game area 32 is provided. From the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input, it is determined whether or not this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y), the probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination process is terminated. As a result, the probability setting value is changed.

If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), the transition standby timer is updated by -1 if it is not 0 (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). .. If the transition wait timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination process ends. That is, if the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, if the backed up data is normal, the process proceeds to step S41 in FIG. 97 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, and if the backed up data is abnormal. Will stop the control after the processing of steps S28 and S29 is performed.

The transition conditions may or may not be changed at the amusement store. Further, although the transition condition is set to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, a predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be a transition condition. In this case, it may be a condition that only the detection by the detection means has been detected, or it may be a predetermined condition that the detection means has detected a plurality of times in a predetermined mode (number of detections, detection interval, etc.). ..

Further, although the detection sensor in the winning region is used as the detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the set value change switch 151 may be enabled. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection means that the player cannot freely operate during the game, such as a detection sensor in the winning area.

Further, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and are used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, the keyboard may be provided at a position where the keyboard can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened and used as a detection means used to establish the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by the password input from the keyboard. ..

In addition, only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the establishment of the transition condition is monitored and the transition to the probability setting value changing state is possible, but the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Even when the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, it may be possible to monitor the establishment of the transition condition and shift to the probability set value change state. In this case, the period for monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may always be set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition when the setting value change switch 151 is operated after the power is turned on. You may start a period to monitor the establishment of.

From the above, in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives the player a game value when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. The detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, large winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned. , Setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The setting means enables the selection of the probability setting value when the detection means detects a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously execute the probability setting value change work is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on multiple gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

In addition, it is used in a game in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, which gives the player a game value. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, large winning opening switch 38a) and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned. A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). In addition, the setting means enables selection of a probability setting value when a plurality of detection means detect a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously execute the probability setting value change work is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on multiple gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

The setting means makes it possible to select the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode within a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Further, the plurality of detection means cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value is changed by the set value change operation unit configured by the DIP switch.

The DIP switch forming the set value changing operation unit is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and the input state thereof is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 132, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as set value change operation units, and the state of the DIP switch corresponding to each probability set value is defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value change process shown in FIG. 133 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. 102. In this probability setting value change process, it is determined whether the state of the set value change operation unit has changed (step S461), and if it has changed (step S461), the value in the work probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). As a result, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Will be.

By using the DIP switch in this way, the work of setting a desired probability set value becomes easy, and the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided. Further, a cover covering the DIP switch may be attached so that the state of the DIP switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Further, in order to make it easier to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch so that it lights up when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be turned on all the time, or may be turned on only in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

In addition, the set value change operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary type switch, and any switch can be used as long as the probability set value can be grasped by visually recognizing the state of each switch. Anything is fine.

Further, although the probability setting value is changed depending on the state of the setting key switch 152, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value change state depending on the state of the setting value change switch 151 as in the third modification described above, and the predetermined time is set. The probability setting value change state may be terminated with the passage of. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

In addition, when the probability setting value is not changed, the currently set probability setting value is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be performed at all times when the probability set value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure fluctuation display game is started. In addition, it may be performed regularly at regular intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, the notification that an abnormality has occurred may be given, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification cannot play a game when the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A for enabling the change of the probability setting value is broken. ..

In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as a setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, and the like is provided, and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It has become like. For example, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154. The setting value change switch 151 is not shown here.

FIG. 134A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is set to LOW, and the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state. Based on this, the probability setting value is not changed and the game can proceed. Further, in the gaming machine of this modification, an LED is provided as a confirmation means that makes it possible to visually recognize the state of the setting key switch 152. In the state of FIG. 105A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state.

FIG. 134 (b) shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is opened and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

As described above, the probability setting value is changed on the condition that the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 constitutes the specific operation information to be input based on the fact that the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, and is based on the input of this specific operation information. The probability setting value can be selected and the probability setting value is changed. In this probability setting value change state, the game cannot be progressed, and the game can be progressed by ending the probability set value change state.

FIG. 134 (c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 134 (d) shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. In either case, the input to the CPU 111A is set to HI, and it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

That is, since the state is the same as when the probability setting value can be changed, the specific operation information is input in this case as well. As a result, the probability set value is changed and the game cannot proceed. In this way, by making it possible to input specific operation information even when the wire is broken or the connector is disconnected, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the case of an abnormality. Further, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Although the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 is given here, the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 may be directly connected without going through the connector 154. Further, although it is said that the setting auxiliary board provided with the setting key switch 152 and the like is provided separately from the game control device 100, the game control device 100 is provided with the setting key switch 152 and the like to provide the setting means. May be integrated with the game control device 100, and in this case as well, it is possible to detect disconnection between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A and disconnection of the connector by the same configuration.

Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is lost, but the specific operation is performed when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is lost. Information may be entered. Further, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 or the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output specific operation information.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value connected to the control means and assigned the probability value used for the lottery of the game are set by the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability setting value can be selected, and the control means does not proceed with the game while the specific operation information is input. If the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability set value.

Further, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability set value.

[Sixth variant]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 135 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 103. In this probability set value confirmation process, when the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. Further, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434), and when it is not in the on state (step S434; N), the off state confirmation flag is set. (Step S473), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. This off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch was in the off state when the game was not in progress.

Then, when the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471). When there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472), the processing after step S435 is performed, and the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, when there is no off state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, if the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and the setting key switch is turned off when the game is not in progress. When it changes to the on state, it shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

In this way, by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains on during the game, it is intended during the game in which the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be transitioned. If the setting key switch is turned on without doing so, it can be prevented that the game is not in progress (not prohibited), the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and the probability setting value is displayed. .. That is, it is possible to make it possible to confirm the probability set value only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) is an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) in a state where the state of the game controlled by the control means (game control device 100) is not prohibited. It means that the confirmation state is set only when the state of is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[7th modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has a RAM clear button as a third operation unit in addition to a setting key operation unit forming the first operation unit and a setting value change button forming the second operation unit. The signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100. Further, the RAM clear button, like the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button, cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 136 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. 96. In this main process, the process proceeds to step S41 when the RAM clear switch is on (the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y). That is, the RAM clear switch forms an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Further, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 102, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 137 is performed. In this probability setting value change processing, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the processing after step S412 is performed, and the processing for determining the selected probability setting value is performed. conduct.

In this way, the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed, and the probability set value can be confirmed by this RAM clear button, so that the RAM can be initialized. The work of determining the probability set value can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

In addition, when the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed. Since it is possible to only initialize the RAM without shifting to the state, if you want to only initialize the RAM, you may need to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability setting value change state. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in the amusement shop.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch). )) Of the storage means (RAM111C) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) is operated. ) Can be initialized. Further, by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability setting value can be determined.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). Setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change button (setting value change switch 151)) and the third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), and setting. A storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling a game by a control means including information of a probability set value selected by the means, and a closed state and an open state covering the front surface of the game machine 10. The main body frame (front frame 12) that can be converted and the open / close detecting means (game control device 100) that can detect the open / closed state of the main body frame are provided, and the control means is the open / close detecting means when the main body frame is in the open state. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit is being operated, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized to initialize the main body. When the open / close detection means detects that the frame is in the open state and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the third operation unit is operated, the probability set value cannot be changed. It means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, when only the initialization of the RAM is desired, it is not necessary to change the probability set value, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved.

Further, when the control means is detected by the open / close detecting means when the main body frame is in the open state and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, the control means is used. The probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized. When the main body frame is closed, it is detected by the open / close detecting means, and the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in this state, the storage means is initialized without making it possible to change the probability set value. Therefore, even if the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated at the same time, the probability set value can be changed to the changed state, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operation unit is operated, the probability setting value change state does not occur, so that fraudulent activity can be prevented.

In addition, in FIG. 136, by performing the state of the setting key switch before confirming the state of the RAM clear switch, even if the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are operated at the same time, the probability setting value is changed. However, it may be a condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state that the setting key switch is on and the RAM clear switch is on. By making the operation of a plurality of operation units a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention of shifting to the probability set value change state.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine of the second embodiment not provided with the RAM clear button, it is detected by the open / close detecting means that the main body frame is in the open state, and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and when the main body frame is closed, it is detected by the open / close detection means, and , When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the storage means is initialized without making the probability setting value changeable. It can be said that. In this case as well, the fact that the setting key switch is on and the setting value change switch is on may be a condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit. Further, the setting means can determine the selected probability setting value by operating the third operation unit.

In FIG. 137, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be exchanged. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing after step S407 is performed, the selected probability setting value is changed, and when there is an input from the setting value change switch, the processing after step S412 is performed. , The process of fixing the selected probability setting value may be performed.

[8th modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the operation of confirming the probability set value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In this modification, the probability setting value change process shown in FIG. 138 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. 102. In this probability setting value change processing, when the setting value change switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the processing after step S407 is performed to change the selected probability setting value. Further, when the set value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processes after step S412 are performed, and the process of determining the selected probability set value is performed.

The first input mode here is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined time, and there is a first input mode when the pressing is completed. I try to judge. That is, the probability set value is changed when the set value change button is released (when the set value change switch 151 is changed to the off state) in a short pressing operation. The reason why the setting value change button is released is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed in a predetermined time or longer, and there is a second input mode when the specified time has elapsed. I try to judge. That is, the probability set value is fixed when the pressing operation for a long time exceeding the specified time is performed (when the set value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or more).

In this way, the probability setting value can be selected and confirmed by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the setting value change button is pressed. The work of changing, confirming, and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced. The first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-mentioned operations, and may be any operation as long as they can be discriminated from each other.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined operation unit among a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value changing button (setting value changing switch 151)). When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM111C) can be initialized, and the selected probability setting value can be determined by operating a predetermined operation unit. Will be.

[9th modification]
Next, a ninth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 139 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 103. In this probability setting value confirmation process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred when the game is not in progress (step S433; N) (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated and the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode.

A predetermined abnormality can be arbitrarily set, but here, it is a magnet fraud, a panel radio wave fraud, a frame radio wave fraud, a general electric wave fraud, and a big prize opening fraud. If any of these abnormalities is occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These anomalies are abnormalities caused by fraudulent activity, and by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when such anomalies occur, the probability setting value is known to the person who commits the fraudulent activity. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Further, the switch abnormality, the shoot ball breakage error, the overflow error, the payout abnormality error, and the glass frame opening error due to the occurrence of the connector disconnection are not included in the predetermined abnormality, but these may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened to operate the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 121, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside, so that the game store side is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known until the person in charge confirms the notification of the occurrence of this abnormality.

It should be noted that this security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or when the probability set value confirmation mode is started to prompt the confirmation of the gaming machine. In the device outside the gaming machine, it becomes possible to grasp that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the output of the security signal for a predetermined time.

In addition, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, but the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred. If all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the state is on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, by applying the configuration of the sixth modification described above, the probability setting value confirmation mode is shifted only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You can do it. In this case, the off state confirmation flag is cleared when the game is in progress (step S433; Y) and when a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y).

In this way, by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains on from the state where a predetermined abnormality has occurred, it is prohibited to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. If the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on while a predetermined abnormality is occurring, the probability setting value will be changed to a state in which all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved (a state that is not a prohibited state). It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed after shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, it is possible to make it possible to confirm the probability set value only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is based on the fact that the operation unit is operated to set a predetermined state. , It is possible to set the confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation unit is in the predetermined state. Even so, it means that it is not in the confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being shown.

Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormalities, and the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine. If any of the predetermined abnormalities occurs, the predetermined abnormality is present. It means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all are resolved. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to notify the outside that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed, and the probability setting value is shown. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by this.

Further, a storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling a game is provided, and the control means stores specific external information for a predetermined period when the storage means is initialized and when the confirmation state is started. It means that it is output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

Further, in the setting means, when the operation unit is set to a predetermined state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has occurred and all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the predetermined state is maintained, all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved. Based on this, it will be in the confirmation state. Therefore, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when a predetermined abnormality does not occur, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, the setting means is set to the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[10th modification]
Next, a tenth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 140 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 103. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S511). If the game is not in progress (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

On the other hand, when the game is in progress (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. As a result, it is possible to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game, and the game is interrupted during the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, after performing the process of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the probability set value confirmation process ends. If there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, the game restart is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability setting value is set. End the confirmation process. As a result, the game that has been interrupted with the end of the probability set value confirmation mode will be resumed.

In the state where the game is interrupted, the display of the batch display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the interruption may be continued. Further, if the game is interrupted during the variable display of the special map variable display game or the normal map variable display game, the variable display on the batch display device 50 may be continued. Further, the batch display device 50 may be displayed to indicate that it is in a suspended state.

Further, when the game is interrupted, the interruption command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is resumed, the resume command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, so that the display device 41, voice, LED, etc. A light emitting member or a movable accessory may be used to produce an effect corresponding to the interruption. Further, the display or the like on the display device 41 when the game is restarted may be the same as the display or the like on the display device 41 when the power failure is restored.

Further, even during the interruption of the game, the winning to the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35, and the special variable winning device 38 may be valid or invalid. Further, even if the game is interrupted, the payout of the game ball may be continued.

[11th modification]
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is designed to output a sound accompanying a change in the probability set value.

FIG. 141 (a) shows an example of changing the probability set value. When the power of the gaming machine is off, turn the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position to turn on the setting key switch (t11), and turn on the power of the gaming machine in this state. The value is changed (t12). Based on the setting value change state, the game control device 100 sends a command for which the probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value is in the change state based on the reception of this command. Outputs the notification voice during change. The changing notification voice may be any voice, and examples thereof include a voice saying "The probability setting value is being changed" and a specific music or alarm sound. Further, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 also notify that the probability set value is in the changed state. Is also good. For example, the display device 41 may display "The probability setting value is being changed". That is, the effect device used in the game is used to notify that the probability set value is in the changed state. By notifying using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the clerk of the amusement store or the surroundings It can be noticed by the player and can prevent an illegal game from being performed.

Then, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position to turn off the setting key switch, the probability setting value change state ends (t13). Based on the end of the set value change state, the game control device 100 sends a command to end the probability setting change to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 sets the probability setting change over a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) based on the reception of this command. The probability set value notification voice for notifying the information of the set probability set value is output (t13 to t14). After that, the sound is output according to the state of the game (t14).

The probability set value notification voice may be any voice, and for example, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), a voice corresponding to the set probability set value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the voice "Probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, it may be a voice other than this, or it may be a specific music or an alarm sound. Further, the display device 41 also displays according to the probability setting value set in the same manner. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the display "The probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, the display may be other than this.

In addition to this, the display of the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 are notified as corresponding to the set probability setting value. You may do so. That is, the probability set value is notified by using the effect device used in the game. By notifying using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the clerk of the game store or the surrounding games. A person can be aware of it, and it is possible to prevent an illegal game from being performed.

In addition, when the probability setting value is changed, the external information indicating that the probability setting value is changed is output so that the external device (such as a hall computer) can grasp that the probability setting value is changed. Is also good. Also, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, similarly, the external information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode is output is output so that the external device (hall computer, etc.) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be possible to grasp. By doing so, the game store can immediately grasp the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, and can prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, the game may not be allowed to proceed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability set value change state. Further, the probability set value notification voice may be output during the period during which the game cannot proceed. By doing so, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally. Further, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device indicate that the probability setting value confirmation mode is used. It may be notified by a production device such as 44.

Further, the voice corresponding to the updated probability setting value may be output every time the probability setting value is updated by the operation in the probability setting value change state. Further, the other effect device may similarly notify the updated probability set value in response to the update of the probability set value. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability setting value.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. A control means (game control device 100) for controlling and a setting means (game control) capable of selecting a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating an operation unit. The device 100) and an effect device (speakers 19a, 19b, display device 41, sub-information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, board effect device 44) for producing a game are provided and selected. The probability set value can be notified by the effect device. Therefore, fraudulent activity can be prevented. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be changed. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be confirmed.

In addition, after the end of the probability set value change state, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally.

[12th variant]
Next, a twelfth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting postponement function, an initial setting cancellation function, an output ON holding function, and an output OFF holding function.
FIG. 142A shows an internal circuit and a connection diagram of the magnetic sensor 61 in this modified example.
The magnetic sensor 61 detects the magnetic state in the arrangement environment and detects fraudulent acts (magnet fraud) by magnets or radio waves. The magnetic sensor 61 is installed so that, for example, the distance from the surface (the surface on the player side) of the cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 to the detection surface of the magnetic sensor 61 is 40 mm to 60 mm.

As shown in FIG. 142A, for example, the magnetic sensor 61 includes a SEL-IN terminal, and the sensitivity of the magnetic sensor 61 is set by the value of the resistance Rd connected to the SEL-IN terminal. That is, the magnetic sensor 61 can switch the sensitivity in a plurality of stages (for example, 4 stages). The sensitivity of the magnetic sensor 61 is selected by the resistance Rd connected to the SEL-IN terminal, set at the time of initial setting of the magnetic sensor 61, and is configured to be internally held until the power is cut off, and the sensitivity is changed in the power supply state. Is not possible.
The SEL-IN terminal is connected to the GND via a resistance value corresponding to the sensitivity used (ie, via a resistor Rd). The GND to which the resistor Rd is connected is common with the GND of the magnetic sensor 61 (that is, the GND connected to the GND terminal of the magnetic sensor 61).

Further, as shown in FIG. 142A, for example, the magnetic sensor 61 includes a magnetic sensor main circuit 61a that detects a magnetic state and determines the occurrence of an abnormality.
The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a includes a circuit for detecting magnetism, a reference magnetic state storage means for storing the magnetic state in the arrangement environment of the magnetic sensor 61 as a reference magnetic state, and a reference magnetism for instructing the start of storage of the reference magnetic state. When the state storage command means and the reference magnetic state and the magnetic state in the current arrangement environment of the magnetic sensor 61 are compared and a difference outside the predetermined allowable range is detected, it is detected as abnormal magnetism. It is provided with an abnormal signal output means for outputting an abnormal signal as a signal.

The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a turns off the output transistor 61b and turns on the OUT terminal when abnormal magnetism is detected. Further, when abnormal magnetism is not detected (when not detected), the output transistor 61b is turned ON and the OUT terminal is turned OFF. As a result, the game control device 100 can detect whether or not abnormal magnetism has been detected depending on the state of the OUT terminal of the magnetic sensor 61. That is, the magnetic sensor 61 serves as an abnormal magnetic detection means for detecting the generation of abnormal magnetism.
Here, "abnormal magnetism" is generated, for example, by the approach of a magnet or the emission of radio waves, and if abnormal magnetism is generated, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act (magnet fraud) has been performed. It is in a high state.

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 performs an initial setting (calibration) operation for storing the reference magnetic state based on the power of the gaming machine 10. In the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, when the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value, the reference magnetic state storage command means stores the reference magnetic state in the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a with respect to the reference magnetic state storage means. It is started by instructing the start of.
That is, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting function for performing an initial setting (calibration) operation in order to correct the influence of peripheral magnetism. This initial setting operation automatically adjusts the detection area, and the automatically adjusted set value is internally retained until the power is cut off. The initial setting operation requires, for example, a maximum time of 1.5 seconds. If an electric drive source such as a solenoid or a motor is driven or a magnet is brought close to it during the initial setting operation, it will be affected by magnetism and cause the detection area to fluctuate. Care must be taken not to be affected by magnetism.

From the above, the magnetic sensor 61 (abnormal magnetic detection means) includes a reference magnetic state storage means for storing the magnetic state in the arrangement environment of the magnetic sensor 61 as a reference magnetic state, and the reference magnetic state and the current magnetic sensor 61. Abnormal signal output that outputs an abnormal signal as a detection signal to the game control device 100 as if abnormal magnetism was generated when a difference outside the predetermined allowable range was detected by comparing with the magnetic state in the arrangement environment of A means and a reference magnetic state storage means are provided, and the reference magnetic state storage means starts storage of the reference magnetic state based on the power-on of the game machine 10.
By providing such a magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to set the reference magnetic state according to the difference between models and the installation environment of each gaming machine in a gaming store, and to perform more accurate fraud detection. Can be done. Further, since the reference magnetic state storage means starts to store the reference magnetic state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the reference magnetic state can be changed even if the reference magnetic state changes due to the movement of the gaming machine or the remodeling of the gaming store. It is possible to always perform accurate fraud detection.

Further, as shown in FIG. 142A, for example, the magnetic sensor 61 includes a DOOR-IN input terminal (door signal input terminal), and the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is Hi. In the state, the magnetic sensor 61 is configured not to function.
The initial setting operation when the power is turned on is when both the condition that the power is supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 and the condition that the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is in the Low state are satisfied. Will be executed.
Therefore, when the door signal is in the Low state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is immediately started (see FIG. 143 (a)).
On the other hand, when the door signal is in the Hi state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is started after the door signal is in the Low state (see FIG. 143 (b)). That is, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting postponement function that executes an initial setting operation after the door signal is in the low state when the door signal is not in the low state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting canceling function of canceling the initial setting operation when the door signal is in the Hi state during the initial setting operation. When the initial setting operation is stopped, the initial setting operation is restarted when the door signal is returned to the Low state while the power supply to the magnetic sensor 61 is maintained.
Further, the magnetic sensor 61 outputs the output transistor 61b to the output ON state (that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected (that is, non-magnetism)) when the door signal is in the Hi state after the initial setting operation is normally performed. It has an output ON holding function that holds it in the same state as (at the time of detection) (see FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b)).
Further, when the initial setting operation cannot be normally performed due to the influence of magnetism around the magnetic sensor 61, the magnetic sensor 61 outputs the output transistor 61b in the output OFF state (that is, the same state as when abnormal magnetism is detected). It has an output OFF holding function (see FIG. 143 (c)). In order to cancel the output OFF state of the output transistor 61b, it is necessary to shut off the power supply of the magnetic sensor 61 once and restart it while considering the influence of the surrounding magnetism so that the initial setting operation can be performed normally.

The details of the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, the output ON holding function, and the output OFF holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 will be described with reference to the operation chart shown in FIG. 143. The "initial setting time" in FIG. 143 is the time from when the power supply of the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on to when the detection state is accurately output.
FIG. 143 (a) shows an operation chart when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed) and the initial setting is normally performed. An example is shown.
The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a starts the initial setting operation when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value (t21). The initial setting operation ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) from the start (t22). Further, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a outputs the output transistor 61b in the output ON state (that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected) from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22). Hold in the same state as (when not detected).

If the door signal is in the Hi state during the initial setting operation, the initial setting cancel function is executed. Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a cancels the initial setting operation, for example, when the door signal is in the Hi state from the start to the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22). The door signal becomes the Low state again, and the Low state of the door signal is maintained until the initial setting operation is completed, so that the initial setting operation is completed for the first time. The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a keeps the output transistor 61b in the output ON state from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22) even when the initial setting operation is stopped. do.

When the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is in the Hi state after the initial setting operation is completed, the output ON holding function is executed (t23 to t25, t26 to t29). Specifically, in the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a, while the door is open (t23 to t24, t26 to t28), until a predetermined standby time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the door is closed. During (t24 to t25, t28 to t29), the output transistor 61b is held in the output ON state.
When the abnormal magnetism is detected (t31), the output transistor 61b is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected (t32), the output transistor 61b is returned to the ON state. However, since the output transistor 61b holds the output ON state during the execution of the output ON holding function, if an abnormal magnetism is detected during the execution of the output ON holding function (t26 to t29), the output transistor 61b is executed. Does not turn off when abnormal magnetism is detected (t27), but turns off when the execution of the output ON holding function ends (t29).

FIG. 143 (b) shows that the door is closed (front frame 12 and glass) after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on when the door is open (at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is open). An example of an operation chart when both of the frames 15 are closed) and the initial setting is normally performed is shown.
If the door signal is in the Hi state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the initial setting postponement function is executed (t41 to t43). Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a is when the door signal is in the Hi state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value (t41). Starts the initial setting operation at the time (t43) when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the door signal is in the Low state. The initial setting operation ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) from the start (t44). Further, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a outputs the output transistor 61b in the output ON state (that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected) from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t41 to t44). Hold in the same state as (when not detected).

If the door signal is in the Hi state during the initial setting operation, the initial setting cancel function is executed. Specifically, in the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a, for example, when the door signal is in the Hi state between the time when the door signal is in the Low state and the time when the initial setting operation is completed (t42 to t44), the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a is in the Hi state. Cancel the initial setting operation. The door signal becomes the Low state again, and the Low state of the door signal is maintained until the initial setting operation is completed, so that the initial setting operation is completed for the first time. Even if the initial setting operation is stopped, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a keeps the output transistor 61b in the output ON state from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t41 to t44). Hold.
Then, when the door signal is in the Hi state after the initial setting operation is completed, the output ON holding function is executed (t45 to t47, t48 to t51).

In FIG. 143 (c), when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed) and the initial setting becomes abnormal, the door is opened. After the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on in the state (at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is open), the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed). An example of the operation chart when the initial setting becomes abnormal is shown.
If the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not normally completed, the output OFF holding function is executed (t62 to t68, t72 to t77). Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a automatically adjusts the detection area by, for example, the initial setting operation, but at that time, when the automatic adjustment cannot be performed normally due to the influence of magnetism around the magnetic sensor 61 or the like. Is the same as when the output transistor 61b is in the output OFF state (that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected) from the end of the initial setting operation to the time when the power of the magnetic sensor 61 is cut off (t62 to t68, t72 to t77). Hold in state).

That is, when the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not normally completed, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a turns off the output transistor 61b and turns on the OUT terminal as in the case of detecting abnormal magnetism. As a result, the magnetic error is notified, so that the clerk of the amusement store can be made aware that the problem has occurred. In this case, for example, the clerk of the amusement shop determines that the output OFF holding function is being executed because the magnetic error is notified even though the magnet is not fraudulent, and executes the output OFF holding function. In order to release the above, the power of the gaming machine 10 is once shut off and then turned on again while considering the influence of the surrounding magnetism and the like so that the initial setting operation can be performed normally.

As shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b), in order to use the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61, the signal input to the DOOR-IN input terminal ( It is necessary to switch the door signal) between the Low state and the Hi state. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), the DOOR-IN input terminal is connected to the GND via a transistor Tr that turns ON / OFF according to the opening / closing of the door (front frame 12 or glass frame 15). The initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 can be used.

The transistor Tr serves as a switching means for switching between connection and non-connection between the DOOR-IN input terminal and GND. Specifically, the transistor Tr is turned on when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed) to connect the DOOR-IN input terminal and the GND. When the door is in the open state (at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is in the open state), the door is turned off and the DOOR-IN input terminal and the GND are disconnected.
Therefore, the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is in the Low state because the DOOR-IN input terminal and GND are in the connected state when the door is closed, and the DOOR- Since the IN input terminal and GND are not connected, the Hi state is set.

The DOOR-IN input terminal is a terminal used to reduce the influence of peripheral magnetism. That is, the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 are functions used to reduce the influence of peripheral magnetism.
For example, if the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is executed when the door is open, there is a possibility that the ambient magnetic field environment may deviate between the initial setting state and the usage state, but the initial setting is postponed. By executing the function or the function of canceling the initial setting so that the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not performed when the door is opened, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a deviation.
Further, for example, when a detection signal (abnormal signal) is output from the magnetic sensor 61 when the door is open, the detection signal may be a detection signal due to a change in the ambient magnetic field environment due to the opening and closing of the door. There is. That is, there is a risk that the detection signal (abnormal signal) will be output even though the magnet is not fraudulent, but the output of the detection signal (abnormal signal) when the door is opened by executing the output ON holding function is output. By canceling, it is possible to avoid erroneous fraud detection.

However, when the initial setting postponement function or the initial setting cancellation function is executed, the initial setting of the magnetic sensor 61 is performed during the period when the door is open and the time when the predetermined waiting time elapses after the door is closed. Since the operation is not executed, there is a problem that it takes time from turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 until the gaming can be performed.
Further, when the output ON holding function is executed, magnet fraud is detected during the period when the door is open and the time when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the door is closed. However, since the output of the detection signal (abnormal signal) is canceled, magnet fraud is performed aiming at the time when the door is open or the predetermined waiting time elapses after the door is closed. There's a problem.
Therefore, in this modification, in order to solve these problems, it is decided to disable the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61.

Specifically, in this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), since the DOOR-IN input terminal is directly connected to the GND, the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is used. Is always in the Low state and does not switch to the Hi state. That is, in this modification, by connecting the DOOR-IN input terminal directly to the GND, the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancellation function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 are invalidated.
Therefore, in this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 144, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on regardless of whether the door is open when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. When the initial setting operation is started (t81) and the initial setting operation is completed, the monitoring of the magnetic abnormality by the magnetic sensor 61 becomes effective (t82). On the other hand, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the monitoring of radio wave abnormality by the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the frame radio wave sensor (not shown) becomes effective (t81). Therefore, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, radio wave fraud can be detected, but magnet fraud cannot be detected. Therefore, there is a possibility that the magnet is illegally performed while aiming at the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

Therefore, in this modification, in order to suppress magnet fraud aimed at during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, for example, as shown in FIG. 144, processing related to the probability setting value in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. It was possible to do.
The process related to the probability set value is a process performed according to the operation of the clerk of the game store. That is, since there is a clerk near the gaming machine while the processing related to the probability set value is being performed, fraudulent acts are unlikely to be performed. Therefore, by making it possible to perform the processing related to the probability setting value in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to suppress the magnet fraud aimed at during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main processing shown in FIGS. 145 to 146 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIGS. 96 to 97. In this main process, instead of the process related to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12), the process related to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93) is performed.
In the main processing shown in FIGS. 96 to 97, the processing after step S13 is performed after the power-on delay timer has timed up (for example, after 3 seconds have elapsed from the power-on). Therefore, the processing after step S13 is performed after the initial setting operation (within 1.5 seconds) of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed.
In the main processing shown in FIGS. 145 to 146, the processing after step S48 is performed after the calibration timer has timed up (for example, after 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the power-on). Therefore, the process executed before step S48 is performed during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145, for example, the game control device 100 sets an initial value in the calibration timer immediately after the process of step S6 (step S91), and starts updating the calibration timer. (Step S92), the process proceeds to step S8. By the process of step S92, the process of updating the calibration timer (for example, -1 update) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).
Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 146, immediately before the process of step S48, it is determined whether the calibration timer has timed up (step S93), and when it is determined that the time has not been timed up (step S93; N). Repeats the process of step S93. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is up (step S93; Y), the process proceeds to step S48.

In the case of this modification, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 requires a maximum time of 1.5 seconds, so in step S91, a value corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set as the initial value. As a result, when the calibration timer times out, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is surely completed.
In this way, by performing the processing related to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93) instead of the processing related to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12), the probability is set during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. It is possible to perform predetermined game control processing (for example, steps S1 to S47) including processing related to the value (processing for shifting to the probability set value change state (steps S37 to S40)). As a result, a predetermined game control process including a process related to the probability set value is executed in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, so that the game can be played after the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. You can save time. Further, since the processing related to the probability setting value can be executed in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to suppress the magnet fraud aimed at during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

A command (command at the time of power failure recovery) transmitted to the effect control device 300 during the update of the calibration timer (that is, between the time when the initial value is set in the calibration timer and the time when the calibration timer is timed up). (Step S34), the command during the probability setting change (step S40), the command at the time of RAM initialization (step S44), etc.) and the command transmitted to the payout control device 200 are when the calibration timer is timed up. You may send it. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed.

Further, after the determination that the calibration timer has timed up (step S93; Y), a command for notifying the end of the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 can drive an electric drive source such as a solenoid or a motor after confirming that the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed. That is, since it is possible to control the electric drive source so that it is not driven during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to prevent the electric drive source from affecting the memory of the reference magnetic state. can. During the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, only the drive of an electric drive source having a low drive frequency is prohibited, and the electric drive source having a high drive frequency such as a motor that is always driven is the magnetic sensor 61. It may be possible to drive during the initial setting operation.

Also, the launch of the game ball may affect the memory of the reference magnetic state. However, in this modification, the firing of the game ball is prohibited during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. Specifically, a firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, and then a firing permission signal is output by performing an output processing (step S104) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 95) to enable firing. The signal can be set to the permitted state. In this modification, since the process of permitting an interrupt after the calibration timer has timed up (step S48) is performed, the timer interrupt process is not executed during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. Therefore, in this modification, since the firing of the game ball is prohibited during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the firing of the game ball does not affect the memory of the reference magnetic state.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 144, the monitoring of the magnetic abnormality is enabled when the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the door is in the open state at the end of the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the monitoring of the magnetic abnormality may be effective after the door is in the closed state.

Of course, it is possible to use the magnetic sensor 61 having an initial setting postponement function, an initial setting cancellation function, an output ON holding function, and an output OFF holding function also in the gaming machine of another modified example. Further, not only in the main processing shown in FIGS. 96 to 97, but also in the main processing shown in FIGS. 127, 130, and 136, calibration is performed instead of the processing related to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12). It is possible to perform processing related to the timer (steps S91 to S93).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of this modification, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special gaming state can be generated when the result of the game becomes a special result. When the calibration (initial setting) executed when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is suspended and the predetermined conditions after the power of the game machine 10 is turned on are satisfied (for example, the main body frame (front frame 12)). ) And the magnetic sensor 61 that can execute the calibration postponement to execute the calibration to the transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15), and a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned. A setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one of the probability setting values is provided, the execution of the calibration postponement is invalidated, and the processing related to the probability setting value (probability setting) is performed in parallel with the calibration. It is possible to perform the process (steps S37 to S40) for shifting to the value change state (see FIG. 144).

Therefore, since it is possible to perform the processing related to the probability set value in parallel with the calibration, it is possible to suppress the magnetic fraud (magnet fraud) aimed at during the calibration of the magnetic sensor 61.
In addition, it is possible to perform processing related to the probability set value in parallel with calibration, and the execution of calibration postponement is disabled (that is, the power is turned on regardless of whether a predetermined condition is satisfied or not). Since calibration is sometimes executed), compared to the case where the processing related to the probability set value is performed after the calibration, or when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the calibration is executed until the predetermined condition is satisfied. , It is possible to shorten the time from turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 until the gaming can be performed.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the present invention is not limited to the case where the main body frame (front frame 12) and the transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15) are closed, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the process related to the probability set value that can be executed in parallel with the calibration is not limited to the process for shifting to the probability set value change state (steps S37 to S40).
Specifically, for example, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to execute the process (steps S37 to S40) for shifting to the probability set value change state as the process related to the probability set value, and the probability set value. As the process related to, the process corresponding to the probability setting value change process (step S108) may be executed.
It is also possible to configure the process so that both the process related to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12) and the process related to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93) are not executed. In this case, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, in addition to a part of the processing (predetermined game control processing (for example, steps S1 to S47)) in the main processing (FIGS. 145 to 146), the rest of the main processing. Processing (for example, steps S48 to S59) and timer interrupt processing (FIG. 95) can also be performed. As a result, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the process for shifting to the probability set value change state (steps S37 to S40) can be executed as the process related to the probability set value, and the probability as the process related to the probability set value. The set value change process (step S108) can be executed.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of this modification is provided with a radio wave sensor (panel radio wave sensor 62 or frame radio wave sensor (not shown), and when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, radio wave fraud monitoring by the radio wave sensor is started, and calibration is performed. It can be configured to start magnetic fraud (magnet fraud) monitoring by the magnetic sensor 61 at the end (see FIG. 144).
With this configuration, it is possible to monitor radio wave fraud in parallel with calibration.

《Notification》
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including each modification of the second embodiment) can execute a plurality of types of notifications. Specifically, for example, volume notification for notifying the current volume, brightness notification for notifying the current brightness (brightness of LED or liquid crystal), error notification for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error, and predetermined instructions to the player are given. It is possible to give instructions to notify.

In the volume notification, for example, the volume image G11 that notifies the current volume value is displayed on the display device 41, and the operation sound corresponding to the player's volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. As shown in FIG. 147 (a), for example, the volume image G11 can be displayed during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information) or during the display of the customer waiting demo screen, but the decorative special symbol (identification information) It cannot be displayed while the stop display or the power failure recovery screen is displayed.
Further, in the luminance notification, for example, a luminance image notifying the current luminance value is displayed on the display device 41, and an operation sound corresponding to the player's luminance change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. As shown in FIG. 147 (a), the luminance image can be displayed during the variable display of the decorative special symbol or the display of the customer waiting demo screen, as in the volume image G11, but the decorative special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is not possible to display while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.
That is, the variable display period of the special decoration symbol and the display period of the customer waiting demo screen are the displayable periods in which the volume image G11 and the luminance image can be displayed, and the stop display period of the special decoration symbol and the display period of the power failure recovery screen are. , It is a display impossible period (non-display period) in which the volume image G11 and the luminance image cannot be displayed.

FIGS. 147 (b) to (e), FIGS. 148, and 149 show an example of volume notification. Since the same processing as the volume notification is performed in the luminance notification, the description of the luminance notification will be omitted with reference to the drawings.
The volume can be adjusted within a predetermined range (for example, 5 steps from 1 to 5) by performing a volume changing operation using a predetermined operating means (for example, a cross key (not shown)). The volume change operation includes an increase operation for increasing the volume and a decrease operation for decreasing the volume, which are different operations.

FIG. 148 shows a timing chart when a short press operation is performed as a volume change operation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the player performs a volume change operation during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information), the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t101). , Adjust the volume. Here, since the increasing operation is performed as the volume changing operation, the volume is increased by one step (from 3 to 4). In addition, the volume image G11 for notifying the current volume (changed volume) is displayed on the display device 41, and the operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume (FIG. 147). (B)-(c)).

Next, the effect control device 300 erases the volume image G11 at a time (t103) when a predetermined volume image display time has elapsed after detecting the volume change operation.
However, the volume image G11 cannot be displayed while the decorative special symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 147 (a). Therefore, if the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped before the predetermined volume image display time elapses, the volume image G11 is deleted when the variable display is stopped. On the other hand, the operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation (for example, the sound of "picone") is output until the operation sound is completed even if the variable display of the decorative special symbol is stopped in the middle of the operation sound. ..

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the stop display of the decorative special symbol is started between the detection of the volume change operation and the elapse of the predetermined volume image display time (t104 to t107). The effect control device 300 stops displaying the volume image G11 at the time when the stop display starts (t105), but does not stop the output of the operation sound (see FIGS. 147 (d) to 147 (e)). As a result, the player can recognize that the volume change operation has been normally accepted. That is, when the display time of the volume image G11 is shorter than usual, the player may feel uneasy that the volume change operation is not normally accepted, but in the case of the present embodiment, the volume image G11 Even if the display time of is shorter than usual, the output time of the operation sound is the same as usual (that is, the operation sound is output to the end without interruption), so the player can normally accept the volume change operation and change the volume. It can be recognized that (volume adjustment) has been made.
The same applies to the luminance notification. That is, if the variation display of the decorative special symbol is stopped between the detection of the luminance change operation and the elapse of the predetermined luminance image display time, the luminance image display is stopped when the variation display is stopped. The output of the operation sound is not stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, for example, when the player performs a volume change operation during the stop display of the decorative special symbol, the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t108), but the volume is increased. The image G11 is not displayed, the operation sound is output, and the volume is not adjusted.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the volume change operation is detected again (t112) during the period from the detection of the volume change operation to the elapse of the predetermined volume image display time (t110 to t113). , The effect control device 300 resets the count of the volume image display time when the volume change operation is rediscovered. Therefore, the volume image G11 is not erased at the time when the predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the previous volume change operation has elapsed (t113), and the predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the last volume change operation has elapsed. It is erased at the time (t115).
Further, when the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation when the volume is the upper limit (or the lower limit), the effect control device 300 displays the volume image G11 but does not output the operation sound or adjust the volume.

FIG. 149 shows a timing chart when a long press operation is performed as a volume change operation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 149, when the player performs a volume change operation during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information), the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t121). The volume image G11 that adjusts the volume and notifies the current volume is displayed on the display device 41, and the operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume.
When the volume change operation is a long press operation (for example, a pressing operation longer than the output time of the operation sound), the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume in a predetermined time cycle (t123, t125) and , The operation sound is output according to the adjustment of the volume, and the volume image G11 is updated and displayed according to the adjustment of the volume.

Next, when the stop display of the decorative special symbol is started during the volume change operation (long press operation), the effect control device 300 stops the display of the volume image G11 at the time when the stop display is started (t126). , The output of the operation sound is not stopped.
Further, even if the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation during the stop display of the decorative special symbol, the effect control device 300 does not display the volume image G11, output the operation sound, or adjust the volume. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 149, even if the player's volume change operation (long press operation) is continued during the stop display of the decorative special symbol, the volume image G11 is displayed, the operation sound is output, and the volume is adjusted. Is not done.

Next, when the variable display of the decorative special symbol starts during the volume change operation (long press operation), the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume at the time when the variable display starts (t128), and now The volume image G11 for notifying the volume of the above is displayed on the display device 41, and the operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume.
Then, when the volume change operation (long press operation) is completed (t130), the effect control device 300 reaches the volume image G11 at the time when the predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the last detected volume change operation has elapsed (t131). To erase.
Further, as shown in FIG. 149, for example, when the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation when the volume is the upper limit (or the lower limit), the volume image G11 is displayed but the operation sound is output. And the volume is not adjusted (t129 to t130).

On the other hand, in the error notification, for example, the error image G12 for notifying the content of the error is displayed on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 147 (a), for example, the error image G12 can be displayed not only during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information) or during the display of the customer waiting demo screen, but also the decorative special symbol (identification information). ) Can be displayed while the stop display or the power failure recovery screen is displayed.
Here, the main errors are as follows. For example, a switch abnormality error indicating that the switch connector is disconnected, a shoot ball out error indicating that there is no game ball to be paid out, an overflow error indicating that the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 are filled with game balls and cannot be paid out, Examples include a payout error indicating that the payout control device 200 is abnormal, a front frame opening error indicating that the glass frame 15 is open, and a gaming machine frame opening error indicating that the front frame 12 is open. ..

In addition, a frame radio error indicating that an abnormal radio wave was detected in the front frame 12, a board radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave was detected in the game board 30, a magnetic error indicating that an abnormal magnetism was detected, and special fluctuations. Large winning opening fraud error indicating that an illegal winning to the winning device 38 was detected, a general electric fraud error indicating that an illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 was detected, and vibration above a certain intensity was detected. A vibration error indicating that is also mentioned as an error. In particular, it sorts whether or not it passes through a specific area in the variable winning device, and monitors vibration errors in the case of a gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. Although it is often done, other gaming machines may be monitored.

Further, a right-handed error indicating that a right-handed hit is detected in a game state in which a left-handed hit should be made, and a left-handed error indicating that a left-handed hit is detected in a game state in which a right-handed hit should be made are also included as errors. Regarding the right-handed error and the left-handed error, the effect control device 300 monitors the establishment of a predetermined condition for ending the error notification without transmitting a command to the effect that the error has been resolved from the game control device 100. The abnormality notification is terminated based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Further, in the instruction notification, for example, an instruction image for notifying the content of the instruction is displayed on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 147 (a), for example, the instruction image can be displayed not only during the variable display of the decorative special symbol or during the display of the customer waiting demo screen, as in the error image G12, but also the stop of the decorative special symbol. It can be displayed while it is being displayed or while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.
Here, the instructions include, for example, a left-handed instruction instructing a left-handed player in a game state in which a left-handed player should be hit, a right-handed instruction instructing a right-handed player in a right-handed game state, and the like. Can be mentioned.
That is, the variable display period of the special decorative symbol, the stop display period of the special decorative symbol, the display period of the customer waiting demo screen, and the display period of the power failure recovery screen are displayable periods in which the error image G12 and the instruction image can be displayed.

FIGS. 147 (f) to 147 (h) show an example of error notification. Since the same processing as the error notification is performed in the instruction notification, the description of the instruction notification will be omitted using the drawings.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 147 (f) to 147 (g), if the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is opened during the variable display of the decorative special symbol (identification information), an error (here, a front frame opening error or a game) is made. The error image G12 notifying the machine frame opening error) is displayed on the display device 41. The error image G12 is erased, for example, by eliminating the corresponding error.

As shown in FIG. 147 (a), for example, the error image G12 can be displayed even during the stop display of the decorative special symbol. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 147 (h), even if the variation display of the decorative special symbol is stopped in the middle, the error image G12 is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is resolved. Similarly, in the case of the instruction image, even if the variation display of the decorative special symbol is stopped in the middle, the instruction image is continuously displayed without being erased until the display period of the instruction image ends.
Although FIGS. 147 (f) to 147 (h) illustrate the case where an error occurs during the variable display of the decorative special symbol, the same applies when an error occurs during the stop display of the decorative special symbol. The error image G12 is displayed when an error is detected, and is deleted when the error is not detected.

In this way, the notification image (error image G12 or instruction image; hereinafter “error image G12 or instruction image” in the error notification or instruction notification is rather than the notification image (volume image G11 or brightness image; hereinafter referred to as “first notification image”) in the volume notification or luminance notification. The period that can be displayed is longer for the "second broadcast image"). This is because error notification and instruction notification are more important than volume notification and brightness notification.
On the other hand, the decorative special symbol is variablely displayed during the execution of the special figure variable display game, and is stopped and displayed at the end of the special figure variable display game. That is, since the decorative special symbol during stop display (stop symbol) notifies the result of the special figure variable display game, the decorative special symbol during stop display is better than the decorative special symbol during variable display. The interest of the player is high. Of the screens displayed when the power is restored, the customer waiting demo screen is displayed when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the customer waiting state is resumed by restoring the power, and is displayed when the power is restored. Of these, the power failure recovery screen shows the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game interrupted by the power cutoff) and special game state (the special figure fluctuation display game) and the special game state (the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state and the power is restored. Displayed when resuming a special game state that was interrupted due to a power failure. That is, the power failure recovery screen is displayed when a power failure occurs during the special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state, and notifies that the power failure has been restored. Therefore, the power failure recovery screen is better than the customer waiting demo screen. The player is more interested in the screen.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of ensuring the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen, which are of great interest to the player, the first notification image, which is less important, is displayed while the special symbol is stopped or the power failure occurs. It is not displayed while the recovery screen is being displayed. Specifically, the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) can be displayed together with the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen, while the first notification image (volume image G11, brightness image, etc.) can be displayed. It is not displayed together with the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen. That is, by adding a priority to be displayed to the notification image, the notification image that should be displayed to the extent that the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen is obstructed, and the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen are obstructed. It is possible to distinguish from the notification image that should not be displayed. Therefore, since the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen is ensured as much as possible, improvement in playability can be expected, and the notification image (second notification image) in the error notification and the instruction notification is the stop of the decorative special symbol. Since it can be displayed while it is being displayed or while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed, errors (including fraud) are unlikely to occur, and even if it does occur, it can be dealt with immediately.

Here, in the present invention, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in the drawing control of the display screen displayed on the display unit of the display device 41. A scenario is a table in which display effects such as pattern variation effects are divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) in advance, such as a background scenario, a left symbol scenario, a right symbol scenario, and so on. It is a method to generate a picture on one screen by setting, controlling them individually as scenarios, and synthesizing all the scenarios.
Multiple display layers (scenario layers) are individually categorized for each display element, for example, background, left symbol, right symbol, and so on, and each of them independently displays multiple motion information simultaneously or continuously. It is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching and displaying the effect.

In the present invention, the display elements (display components) used in the effect of the display device 41 are "background", "left symbol", "right symbol", "middle symbol", "notice 1 character", and "notice 2". It is divided into eight elements: "character", "hold display (decorative special figure start memory display)", and "small symbol".
Then, a scenario table for a display effect such as a variable effect is created separately for each of a plurality of display elements. In the present invention, the scenario table includes "background control scenario table", "left symbol control scenario table", "right symbol control scenario table", "middle symbol control scenario table", and "notice 1 character control scenario". It is created by being divided into eight elements: "table", "preliminary notice 2 character control scenario table", "hold display control scenario table", and "small symbol control scenario table".
Further, each display element is composed of a display layer, and these plurality of display layers are sequentially overlapped from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen. In the case of the present invention, the display layers include "background layer", "left symbol layer", "right symbol layer", "middle symbol layer", "preliminary A layer" to "preliminary F layer", "holding layer" and There are 12 types of "small symbol layers".

In the effect display editing process (step C13) of the main process (FIG. 123), the effect control device 300 draws a predetermined image in the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326 in the order of the number of the motion management areas by the number of motion management areas (step C13). That is, the process of pasting the sprite of a predetermined image into the virtual drawing space) is performed.
As shown in FIG. 150, the virtual drawing space is divided into 12 drawing areas from a drawing area for motion management area 0 to a drawing area for motion management area 11. The drawing areas are arranged in numerical order of the corresponding motion management areas, and a display layer on which a predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first creates a "background layer" on which a predetermined image is drawn in the virtual drawing space when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL. Stored in the drawing area for motion management area 0.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the "preliminary A layer" on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 1 drawing area of the virtual drawing space.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the "notice B layer" on which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 2 drawing area of the virtual drawing space.

Hereinafter, similarly, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 3 is not NULL, the “left symbol layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 in the virtual drawing space, and then the address area of the motion management area 4 When the data is not NULL, the "right symbol layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 of the virtual drawing space, and then when the data in the address area of the motion management area 5 is not NULL, the "middle symbol layer" is virtual. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 5 of the drawing space, and then, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 6 is not NULL, the "notice C layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 of the virtual drawing space. Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 7 is not NULL, the "notice D layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 of the virtual drawing space, and then the data in the address area of the motion management area 8 is stored. If it is not NULL, the "holding layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 8 of the virtual drawing space, and then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 9 is not NULL, the "notice E layer" is stored in the virtual drawing space. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 9, and then, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is not NULL, the "notice F layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space, and then When the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not NULL, the "small symbol layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 of the virtual drawing space, and the effect display editing process is terminated.

When the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the drawing area is left blank because the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL, the display layer in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 of the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326 (in the case of the present invention, the "notice F layer". ") Is not stored, so that the drawing area for the motion management area 10 remains blank. It is also possible to sequentially store the display layers so that the non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, store the display layers while packing them in front), but in that case, one display screen is configured. Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes depending on the number of display layers to be displayed, each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space, the drawing area for storing the display layer (that is, blank) It is necessary to search for the drawing area (the drawing area on the frontmost (head) side) of the drawing areas, which makes the processing complicated. On the other hand, as in the present invention, display is performed by configuring each display layer to be stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect content (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen). Since it is not necessary to search the drawing area for storing the display layer each time the layer is stored in the virtual drawing space, the processing load can be reduced.

The display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially overlapped from the back side (lower layer side) of the screen to the front side (upper layer side) of the screen in the order of arrangement of the drawing areas to create one display screen. Specifically, in the present invention, for example, as shown in FIG. 150, the "background layer" stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 located at the head of the 12 drawing areas is the deepest on the screen. The "small symbol layer" that is placed on the side (bottom layer) and stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 located at the end of the 12 drawing areas is placed on the front side (top layer) of the screen. Will be done.

In such an effect control, when the effect screen (display screen) is generated, it is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen and set in advance as a table, and then they are individually set. By controlling as a scenario and synthesizing all the scenarios in the form of a display layer, a picture on one screen is generated and displayed on the display device 41.
In the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 draws a first broadcast image (volume image G11, brightness image, etc.) on a predetermined display layer, for example, as shown in FIG. 151 (a), and the first broadcast image is displayed. A second broadcast image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) is drawn on the display layer on the front side of the screen from the drawn display layer. Specifically, for example, when the first broadcast image is the "notice C layer", the second broadcast image is one of the "notice D layer", the "notice E layer", and the "notice F layer". Is drawn to.

Therefore, when a display screen including both the first broadcast image and the second broadcast image is displayed on the display device 41, the second broadcast image (error image G12 or instruction) is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 151 (b). The image, etc.) is displayed on the front side of the first broadcast image (volume image G11, brightness image, etc.). Therefore, when the display area of the first broadcast image and the display area of the second broadcast image overlap, the portion of the first broadcast image that overlaps with the second broadcast image is hidden by the second broadcast image and is not visible. It will be possible. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (b), the upper part of the first broadcast image (volume image G11) is hidden by the second broadcast image (error image G12) and cannot be visually recognized.

Further, the effect control device 300 is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (c), at least one of a predetermined display layer (for example, "background layer", "notice A layer", and "notice B layer". A customer waiting demo screen and a power failure recovery screen are created using the display layer), and the first notification image (volume image G11 and brightness image) is placed on the display layer on the front side of the display layer used for the customer waiting demo screen and the power failure recovery screen. Etc.) and the second broadcast image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) are drawn.
Therefore, when the first notification image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.) is displayed together with the customer waiting demo screen, the first notification image is displayed on the front side of the customer waiting demo screen. When the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) is displayed together with the customer waiting demo screen and the power failure recovery screen, the second notification image is on the front side of the customer waiting demo screen and the power failure recovery screen. Is displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 147 (b) to (e) and 151 (b), the variable display area of the decorative special symbol and the display area of the first broadcast image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.) overlap. However, it is not limited to this. The variable display area of the decorative special symbol and the display area of the first broadcast image do not have to overlap. Specifically, for example, the display area of the second broadcast image overlaps with the variable display area of the decorative special symbol, but the display area of the first broadcast image does not overlap with the variable display area of the decorative special symbol. The display area of the broadcast image may be set.
Further, while the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) is being displayed, control may be executed to forcibly stop the variable display of the decorative special symbol.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the display device 41 for playing a game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (decorative special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed. The first notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image)) is used as a notification corresponding to a predetermined intervention (for example, an action that causes an error such as a volume change operation, a brightness change operation, or an illegal act, or a method of hitting) on the game machine 10. Notification that can execute notification that displays G11 (or brightness image)) on the display device 41 and notification that displays a second notification display (second notification image (for example, error image G12 or instruction image)) on the display device 41. A means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the first notification display can be displayed during the variable display and the customer waiting state in which the game is not performed (for example, while the customer waiting demo screen is being displayed), while the stop display is in progress. The second notification display can be displayed during the variable display and the customer waiting state, and can also be displayed during the stop display (see FIG. 147 (a)).

That is, the predetermined notification display is classified into a second notification display that can be displayed during the stop display of the identification information (decorative special symbol) and a first notification display that cannot be displayed during the stop display of the identification information. Therefore, the notification display can be suitably displayed so that the visibility of the stop symbol is ensured as much as possible. Specifically, for example, by setting the low-importance notification display as the first notification display and the high-importance notification display as the second notification display, the low-importance notification display is displayed together with the stop symbol. Therefore, the notification display of low importance does not interfere with the visibility of the stopped symbol, and the notification display can be suitably displayed.
The volume image G11 (first notification display) is not limited to the meter image in which the volume value is represented by a meter value, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the volume image may be a numerical image in which the volume value is represented by a numerical value. ..
Further, the first notification display is not limited to the volume image G11 and the luminance image, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the second notification display is not limited to the error image G12 and the instruction image, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image G11 or luminance image)) is hidden even while the power failure recovery screen is displayed on the display device 41. (See FIG. 147 (a)).
With this configuration, the first notification display does not interfere with the visibility of the power failure recovery screen, and the notification display can be suitably displayed.
In the present embodiment, the second notification display (second notification image (for example, error image G12 or instruction image)) can be displayed while the power failure recovery screen is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the second notification display may be hidden while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display screen displayed on the display device 41 is created by a plurality of stacked display layers, and the first notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image G11 or brightness image)). ))) And the display screen including both the second notification display (second notification image (for example, error image G12 or instruction image)), the display layer for displaying the second notification display displays the first notification display. It can be configured to be located on the upper layer side (front side of the screen) of the display layer for displaying (see FIG. 151 (a)).
With this configuration, the second notification display can be displayed with priority over the first notification display.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment notifies predetermined information according to a predetermined operation (for example, volume change operation or brightness change operation) of the player in the game machine provided with the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b. A display control means (effect control device 300) that displays a notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image G11 or brightness image)) on the display device 41, and speakers 19a, 19b that perform operation sounds according to a predetermined operation of the player. The display control means includes an output control means (effect control device 300) to output from the display control means, such as a non-display period (for example, a stop display period of identification information) for prohibiting the display of the notification display during the display of the notification display. When the display period of the power failure recovery screen) starts, the display of the notification display is stopped, and the output control means continues to output the operation sound even if the non-display period starts during the output of the operation sound. (See FIGS. 147 (d) to (e), t105 to t109 in FIG. 148, and t126 to t128 in FIG. 149).

That is, since the notification display is provided with a non-display period, the notification display can be suitably displayed so that the visibility of the stop symbol and the power failure recovery screen is ensured as much as possible. Specifically, for example, by setting the stop display period of the identification information (decorative special symbol) and the display period of the power failure recovery screen as the non-display period, the notification display will not be displayed together with the stop symbol or the power failure recovery screen. Therefore, the notification display does not interfere with the visibility of the stop symbol or the power failure recovery screen, and the notification display can be suitably displayed.
Further, even if the display time of the notification display is shortened due to the start of the non-display period, the operation sound is output to the end without interruption, so that the player can recognize that the predetermined operation has been normally accepted. ..
The notification display for which the non-display period is set is not limited to the volume image G11 and the luminance image, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the error image G12 may be used, or the instruction image may be used.

《Button production》
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including each modification of the second embodiment) sets the operation validity period by the image displayed on the display device 41 as a button effect intervening the operation of the effect button 25 by the player. It is possible to execute a button effect for notifying and a button effect for notifying the operation validity period by the light emission of the effect button 25.
Specifically, the effect control device 300 can execute the first type button effect, the second type button effect, and the third type button effect.

In the first type of button effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (b), when the button effect starts, the display device 41 has a button image G21 imitating the effect button 25 and the rest of the operation valid period. Remaining length notification image G22 (here, time bar image) for notifying the length, and operation mode instruction image G23 for instructing the operation mode of the effect button 25 (for example, a character image such as "press!" Or "continuous hit!") And the effect change image G24 (here, the meter image) that is changed by the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed. That is, in the first type of button effect, it is possible to notify that the operation is in the valid period and the remaining length of the operation valid period by the image displayed on the display device 41.

The second type of button effect is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (c) to 153 (d), when the button effect is started, the effect button 25 switches from the off state to the light emitting state (for example, the on state). .. That is, in the second type of button effect, it is possible to notify that the operation is in effect by the light emission of the effect button 25.
In the third type of button effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (e) to 153 (f), when the button effect starts, the button image G21, the remaining length notification image G22, and the like are displayed on the display device 41, and the button effect is displayed. This is an effect in which the effect button 25 switches from the off state to the light emitting state. That is, in the third type of button effect, it is possible to notify that the operation is in the valid period by the image displayed on the display device 41 and the remaining length of the operation valid period, and the operation valid period is emitted by the light emission of the effect button 25. It is possible to notify that it is inside.

In the case of the first type of button effect, since the remaining length notification image G22 is displayed, not only the operation valid period but also the remaining length of the operation valid period can be notified. Therefore, for example, to make the player select when to operate the effect button 25 during the operation valid period, or to remind the player to operate the effect button 25 because the end of the operation valid period is approaching. Can be done.
Further, in the case of the second type of button effect, since the effect button 25 emits light, the player's attention to the effect button 25 can be improved. Further, since it is unknown when the light emission of the effect button 25 is extinguished (that is, it is unknown when the operation valid period ends), it is possible to remind the player to operate the effect button 25 as soon as possible before the light emission is extinguished. can.
Further, in the present embodiment, not only the first type button effect and the second type button effect but also the third type button effect combining the first type and the second type can be executed, so that various buttons can be executed. You can perform the production, it will not be monotonous, and the interest will increase.
In the following description, when the first type button effect, the second type button effect, and the third type button effect are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a button effect.

FIG. 154 shows an example of the first type of button effect.
When the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 starts the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 154 (a). That is, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special symbol.
When the special figure variation display game is a game that executes the first type button effect, the effect control device 300 is during execution of the special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 154 (b). Start the first type of button production. As a result, the button image G21, the remaining length notification image G22, the operation mode instruction image G23, and the effect change image G24 are displayed on the display device 41.

When the player operates the effect button 25 during the operation valid period, the effect control device 300 uses the value of the effect change image G24 (here, as shown in FIGS. 154 (c), (d), and (e)). Meter value) is increased.
Then, when the operation valid period is timed up, the effect control device 300 erases the button image G21, the remaining length notification image G22, and the operation mode instruction image G23, and the button is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 154 (f). Notify the result of the production.

In the present embodiment, the start timing and execution time of the button effect are set so that the button effect starts after the variable display of the special decorative symbol starts and the button effect ends before the variable display of the special decorative symbol ends. Has been done. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period related to the button effect is within the variable display period of the decorative special symbol.

The button effects of the present embodiment include a button effect with a low expectation level (button effect with a low expectation) and a button effect with a medium expectation level (button effect with a medium expectation). , There is a button production with a high expectation level (button production with a high expectation).
Specifically, for example, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of order and reach does not occur in the special figure fluctuation display game, it is expected as a button effect to be executed in the special figure fluctuation display game. If the button effect with a "low" degree level is most likely to be selected, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, and the reach of SP reach or higher occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure is concerned. As the button effect to be executed in the figure variation display game, the button effect with the expectation level of "high" is most likely to be selected, and in other cases, the button effect with the expectation level of "medium" is most likely to be selected. There is.

Then, in the first type button effect and the third type button effect, the amount of change in the effect change image G24 per operation of the effect button 25 differs depending on the expected level of the button effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the expected degree level of the amount of change in the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) per operation of the effect button 25 is “low”. In the case of, it is set to "+1", when the expectation level is "medium", it is set to "+2", and when the expectation level is "high", it is set to "+3". Therefore, the expected level of the button effect being executed can be suggested by the amount of change in the effect change image G24 per operation of the effect button 25.

In the example shown in FIG. 154, the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) increases by "2" each time the effect button 25 is operated, so that the expectation level is "medium". It can be seen that the button effect is being executed.
The amount of change shown in FIG. 155 (a) may be the amount of change until the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) reaches a predetermined threshold value. Specifically, for example, in the case of a button effect having an expectation level of "high", the meter value increases by "3" each time the effect button 25 is operated until the meter value reaches a predetermined threshold value. (That is, it changes with the amount of change shown in FIG. 155 (a)), and after the meter value reaches a predetermined threshold value, the amount of increase in the meter value per operation of the effect button 25 gradually decreases, and then After the meter value reaches the upper limit value, the meter value reaches the upper limit value when the button effect is successful (for example, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special result). On the other hand, if the button effect fails, the meter value may not reach the upper limit value (that is, the meter value does not change even if the effect button 25 is operated). That is, the amount of change in the effect change image G24 in one button effect may be fixed, or may change according to the state of the effect change image G24 or the progress of the button effect.
Further, the effect change image G24 (meter image) is not limited to the one in which the meter value increases according to the operation of the effect button 25. That is, the effect change image G24 (meter image) may have a meter value that decreases according to the operation of the effect button 25. In that case, the effect change image per operation of the effect button 25. The amount of change in the meter value of the G24 (meter image) is set to "-1" when the expectation level is "low" and "-2" when the expectation level is "medium", for example. It is set, and when the expectation level is "high", it is set to "-3".

Here, in the volume notification, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (c) to 155 (d), the amount of change in the volume image G11 per increase operation is always "+1", for example, FIGS. 155 (e) to (d). As shown in f), the amount of change in the volume image G11 per reduction operation is always "-1". The same applies to the luminance notification. Therefore, when adjusting the gaming environment (volume, luminance, etc.), the absolute value of the amount of change in the image (for example, volume image G, luminance image) for one operation is constant. This makes it possible to make reliable adjustments.
On the other hand, in the first type button effect and the third type button effect, the absolute value of the amount of change in the image (for example, the effect change image G24) for one operation is not constant. That is, when participating in the production, since the absolute value of the amount of change in the image for one operation is varied, it is possible to execute a non-monotonous and interesting button production, and the production button 25 can be used. The function can be fully exerted.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (b), in the second type button effect and the third type button effect, the emission color of the effect button 25 differs depending on the expected level of the button effect. Therefore, the emission color of the effect button 25 can indicate the expected level of the button effect being executed.
The display color of the button image G21 may be different depending on the expected level of the button effect. Further, when configured in this way, the display color of the button image G21 and the emission color of the effect button 25 in the third type of button effect may or may not be the same.

Further, the light emitting state of the effect button 25 is not limited to the lighting state. That is, the light emitting state of the effect button 25 may be a blinking state. Further, when the light emitting state of the effect button 25 is a blinking state, it is possible to configure the effect button 25 to have a different blinking speed according to the expected level of the button effect.
Further, it is also possible to suggest the remaining length of the operation valid period depending on the light emitting state of the effect button 25. Specifically, for example, the blinking speed of the effect button 25 may be controlled to gradually increase (or decrease), or the emission color of the effect button 25 may be controlled to gradually approach a predetermined color. Alternatively, it is controlled to be lit while the remaining length of the operation valid period is equal to or longer than the predetermined length, and to be blinking while the remaining length of the operation valid period is less than the predetermined length. You may.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 153, the effect change image G24 is not displayed during the execution of the second type button effect, but it is also possible to display the effect change image G24 in the second type button effect. be. In the second type of button effect, the expected degree level can be suggested by the emission color of the effect button 25, so that it is not necessary to indicate the expected degree level by the change amount of the effect change image G24. That is, when the effect change image G24 is displayed in the second type of button effect, the amount of change of the effect change image G24 may differ depending on the expected degree level of the button effect, or the button effect may be displayed. It may be constant regardless of the expectation level.
Further, in the third type button effect in which the first type button effect and the second type button effect are executed in duplicate, the start timing of the first type button effect and the start of the second type button effect The timing may be different. Specifically, for example, the first type button effect is started first to fade in the button image G21, and the second type button effect is started at the same time as the button image G21 completely appears. Then, the effect button 25 may be switched to the light emitting state.

Further, the effect change image G24 is not limited to the meter image in which the meter value increases (or decreases) according to the operation of the operating means, and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the effect change image G24 may be, for example, a numerical image whose numerical value increases (or decreases) according to the operation of the operating means.
Further, the effect change image G24 may be a character image that moves according to the operation of the operating means. In this case, the movement amount of the character image is the change amount of the effect change image G24. That is, the amount of movement of the character image per operation of the effect button 25 differs depending on the expected level of the button effect.
Further, the effect change image G24 may be a character image that is enlarged (or reduced) according to the operation of the operating means. In this case, the enlargement ratio (or reduction ratio) of the character image is produced. This is the amount of change in the change image G24. That is, the enlargement rate (or reduction rate) of the character image per operation of the effect button 25 differs depending on the expected level of the button effect.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the display device 41 for playing a game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (decorative special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed. The operation means that can be operated by the player (effect button 25 and the cross key (not shown)) and the first display (for example, volume image G11 and brightness image) and the second display (for example, as a display that changes according to the operation of the operation means). A display control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the effect change image G24) on the display device 41 is provided, and the first display has a constant absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation. In the two displays, the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation differs depending on a predetermined condition (for example, the expected degree of the special figure variation display game being executed).

Therefore, the first display in which the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation is constant is set as an adjusted image (for example, a volume image G or a luminance image) that changes according to the operation for adjusting the gaming environment. , It is possible to make reliable adjustments. In addition, the second display, in which the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation differs according to a predetermined condition, is set as the effect change image G24 that changes according to the operation of the button effect, which is not monotonous and highly interesting. It becomes possible to execute a button effect. That is, by operating the operating means, it is possible to make reliable adjustments and participate in a highly interesting button production, so that the operating means are actively operated, and the operating means. Can be used effectively.

The first display is not limited to the adjusted image (for example, volume image G or luminance image) and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the second display is not limited to the effect changing image G24 and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the operation of changing the first display and the operation of changing the second display may be performed by using the same operating means.
Further, the predetermined condition is not limited to the expectation level (big hit expectation level and reach expectation level) of the special figure variation display game being executed, and can be changed as appropriate. There may be. This makes it possible to suggest the result of the look-ahead determination by the second display.
Further, the first display and the second display may be displayed not only during the variable display of the identification information but also during the big hit (special game state) or during the display of the customer waiting screen.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first display (adjustment image (for example, volume image G or luminance image)) is hidden during the period when the identification information (decorative special symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 147). (See (a)), the operation validity period is not notified for the operation corresponding to the first display, the operation validity period is notified for the operation corresponding to the second display, and the identification information changes as the operation validity period. It can be configured to be notified of a period that fits within the displayed period (see FIG. 154).

With this configuration, for example, when a display screen including both the first display and the second display is displayed on the display device 41, the operation of changing the first display and the operation of changing the second display can be performed. It is possible to suggest which operation should be prioritized. That is, the operation corresponding to the first display is not notified of the operation valid period, while the operation corresponding to the second display is notified of the operation valid period, so that the operation of changing the second display is preferentially performed. Can suggest what to do. Therefore, for example, by setting the second display to the effect change image G24 that changes according to the operation in the button effect, it was not possible to participate in the button effect because the game environment (volume, brightness, etc.) was adjusted. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the above and prevent the deterioration of the interest.

During the non-display period when the first display is hidden, the operation of changing the first display is enabled to internally change the first display (that is, the game environment such as volume and brightness is adjusted. ) May be done.
Further, during the period when the second display is not displayed, the operation of changing the second display may be enabled or disabled.
The temporary stop of the identification information (decorative special symbol) is not included in the stop display of the identification information, but the identification information is included in the variable display. Therefore, even if the stop display period of the identification information is the non-display period in which the display of the first display (adjusted image (for example, volume image G or luminance image)) is prohibited, the first display is during the temporary stop of the identification information. It can be displayed.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is provided in a gaming machine provided with a display device 41 for playing a game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed. An operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by a person and a notification means (effect control device 300) that notifies the operation validity period of the operation means are provided, and the notification mode of the operation validity period is set during the operation validity period. It is possible to recognize that there is a first notification mode (see FIG. 153 (b)) in which the remaining time of the operation valid period can be recognized, and it is possible to recognize that the operation is in the valid period, and the operation valid period. There is a second notification mode (see FIG. 153 (d)) in which the remaining time of the above cannot be recognized, and the first notification mode and the second notification mode can be used alone or in combination with each other (see FIG. 153). ).

That is, as an effect (button effect) in which the player's operation is intervened, an effect in which the operation valid period is notified only in the first notification mode, an effect in which the operation valid period is notified only in the second notification mode, and a first effect. It is possible to perform an effect in which the operation validity period is notified in both the first notification mode and the second notification mode. Therefore, since it is possible to execute various effects as an effect in which the player's operation is intervened, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect in which the player's operation is intervened without becoming monotonous.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification mode (see FIG. 153 (b)) uses an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color (in the case of the present embodiment, the backlight of the display device 41). A mode for notifying the operation validity period, the second notification mode (see FIG. 153 (d)) is an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors (in the case of the present embodiment, a group of light emitting elements built in the effect button 25). Can be configured to notify the operation validity period using.
With this configuration, as an effect (button effect) in which the player's operation is intervened, an effect in which the operation validity period is notified only by a set of monochromatic light sources of the same color and a set of monochromatic light sources of multiple colors. It is possible to execute an effect in which the operation validity period is notified only by the body and an effect in which the operation validity period is notified by both an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color and an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of multiple colors. .. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects as an effect in which the player's operation is intervened, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect in which the player's operation is intervened without becoming monotonous.

The aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color is not limited to the backlight of the display device 41 and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, for example, an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color (monochromatic lamp or the like) that emit light during the operation effective period may be provided on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15.
Further, the aggregate of the monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors is not limited to the light emitting element group built in the effect button 25, and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, for example, the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 may be provided with an aggregate (multicolor lamp or the like) of monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors that emit light during the operation effective period.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification mode (see FIG. 153 (b)) is an operation valid period based on an image displayed on the display device 41 (for example, a button image G21 or a remaining length notification image G22). The second notification mode (see FIG. 153 (d)) can be configured to notify the operation validity period by causing the operation means (effect button 25) to emit light.
With this configuration, as an effect (button effect) in which the player's operation is intervened, an effect in which the operation validity period is notified only by the image displayed on the display device 41 and an operation by only the light emission of the operation means are performed. It is possible to execute an effect in which the valid period is notified and an effect in which the operation valid period is notified by both the image displayed on the display device 41 and the light emission of the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects as an effect in which the player's operation is intervened, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect in which the player's operation is intervened without becoming monotonous.

<< Production of notification of the number of payouts >>
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including each modification of the second embodiment) is a payout notification effect for notifying the total number of payouts, and is the total payout from the start of the special game state to the present time during the special game state. The first payout number notification effect for notifying the number, and the second payout number notification effect for notifying the total number of payouts from the start of the special game state to the present time during the special game state (first hit) and the subsequent time saving state. Is feasible.
In the present embodiment, the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is defined as the total number of payouts. The total number of payouts is not limited to the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening and the general winning opening It may be the sum of the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to 35.

FIG. 156 shows an example of the first payout number notification effect.
The first payout number notification effect is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result that does not cause a time saving state.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result and the special result is a special result that does not cause a time saving state, the effect control device 300 , When the special game state based on the special result starts, the first payout number notification effect is started. As a result, the display device 41 displays the acquired cumulative number image G31 that notifies the total number of payouts from the start of the special gaming state to the present time. Then, for example, as shown in FIGS. 156 (b) to 156 (d), every time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, for example, "+14" is added to the total number of payouts.
After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (e), when the special gaming state ends, the effect control device 300 ends the first payout number notification effect and erases the acquired cumulative number image G31.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 156 (f) to 156 (j), an overflow error indicating that the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 are filled with the game balls and cannot be paid out occurred during the special game state. In that case, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 156 (j), for example, the error image G12 is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is resolved even if the special gaming state ends in the middle.
Note that FIGS. 156 (f) to 156 (j) exemplify a case where an overflow error occurs in the middle of the special gaming state, but similarly, an error occurs when another error occurs in the middle of the special gaming state. The image G12 is displayed when an error is detected, and even if the special gaming state ends in the middle, the image G12 is continuously displayed without being erased until the error is resolved.

FIG. 157 shows an example of the second payout number notification effect.
The second payout number notification effect is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a special result that causes a time saving state.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result and the special result is a special result that causes a time saving state, the effect control device 300 , When the special gaming state based on the special result starts, the second payout number notification effect is started. As a result, the display device 41 displays the acquired cumulative number image G31 that notifies the total number of payouts from the start of the special gaming state to the present time. Then, for each time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, for example, "+14" is added to the total number of payouts.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 157 (b) to 157 (d), in the second payout number notification effect, the display of the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed even after the special game state (first hit) ends and the time saving state starts. Will be continued.
After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 157 (e), when the time saving state ends, the effect control device 300 ends the second payout number notification effect and erases the acquired cumulative number image G31.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 157 (f) to 157 (j), it is shown that the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 are filled with game balls and cannot be paid out in the middle of the time saving state (including the first hit). When an overflow error occurs, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 157 (j), for example, the error image G12 is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is resolved even if the time saving state ends in the middle.
Note that FIGS. 157 (f) to 157 (j) illustrate the case where an overflow error occurs in the middle of the time saving state, but similarly, the error image G12 also occurs when another error occurs in the middle of the time saving state. Is displayed when an error is detected, and even if the time saving state ends in the middle, it is continuously displayed without being erased until the error is resolved.

FIG. 158 (a) shows an example of the display / non-display timing of the acquired cumulative number image G31 and the error image G12.
For example, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), when a special gaming state based on a special result that does not generate a time saving state starts, the first payout number notification effect starts, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed on the display device 41. (T151).
Then, when an error occurs, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41 (t152).

Next, when the special gaming state ends, the first payout number notification effect ends, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is deleted (t153).
Then, when the error is resolved, the error image G12 is erased (t154).

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), when the special gaming state based on the special result that causes the time saving state starts, the second payout number notification effect starts, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed on the display device 41. It is displayed (t155).
Then, when the special gaming state ends, the time saving state starts (t156).

The result of the special figure variation display game is special before the time saving state ends (that is, before the number of executions of the special figure variation display game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the last special game state). As a result, if the special result is a special result that does not cause the time saving state, the time saving state ends when the special figure variation display game ends. Therefore, in that case, when the special figure variation display game ends, the second payout notification effect ends and the first payout notification effect starts.
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a special result before the time saving state ends, and the special result is a special result that causes the time saving state, the time saving state is extended. Therefore, in that case, for example, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), the second payout number notification effect continues even after the special figure variation display game ends.

Then, when an error occurs, the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41 (t159).
Next, when the time saving state ends, the second payout number notification effect ends, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is deleted (t160).
Then, when the error is resolved, the error image G12 is erased (t161).

As described above, in the first payout number notification effect, the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed when the special game state starts, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is deleted when the special game state ends. On the other hand, in the second payout number notification effect, the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed when the special game state (first hit) starts, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is deleted when the time saving state ends. That is, the display period of the acquired cumulative number image G31 is different between the first payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect.
Although not shown in FIG. 147 (a), the period in which the special gaming state occurs is also a displayable period in which the error image G12 and the instruction image can be displayed.

In the game machine 10, the player displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out in one special game state and the cumulative number of prize balls paid out in the special game state and the subsequent time saving state. By making it possible to grasp the number of game balls acquired, the interest of the game is enhanced. However, troubles are likely to occur in a state where prize balls are continuously paid out, such as in a special game state or a time saving state. As such troubles, for example, the ball is clogged in front of the inlet to the lower plate 23, and the lower plate 23 cannot be released from the full state even if the ball is removed, or a problem occurs in the payout unit and the prize ball is used. Problems such as not being able to pay out can be mentioned. When such a trouble occurs, the payout of the game ball is stopped, and the error image G12 notifying the occurrence of an error (overflow error, payout abnormality error, etc.) for stopping the payout of the game ball is displayed. ..

In order to enhance the interest of the game, an image that allows the player to grasp the number of game balls acquired (for example, the cumulative number of acquired images G31) rather than the display of the error image G12 that notifies the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game balls. In some cases, the display is prioritized, but in this case, the player may be disadvantaged because the game is stopped before all the prize balls are paid out without noticing the error.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of the error of stopping the payout of the game ball, the display of the error image G12 is prioritized over the display of the acquired cumulative number image G31. .. Here, "priority" is to display on the front side.

That is, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 draws the acquired cumulative number image G31 on a predetermined display layer, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is drawn on the display layer, for example, as shown in FIG. 158 (b). The error image G12 is drawn on the display layer on the front side of the screen. Specifically, for example, when the acquired cumulative number image G31 is "notice D layer", the error image G12 is drawn in the "notice E layer" or "notice F layer".
Therefore, when a display screen including both the acquired cumulative number image G31 and the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIGS. 156 (h), (i) and 157 (i), The error image G12 is displayed on the front side of the acquired cumulative number image G31. Therefore, when the display area of the acquired cumulative number image G31 and the display area of the error image G12 overlap, the portion of the acquired cumulative number image G31 that overlaps with the error image G12 is hidden by the error image G12 and cannot be visually recognized. It becomes.

By the way, the effect control device 300 can store the number of winnings in the large winning opening in the RAM 322, and the total payout is based on the number of winnings in the large winning opening from the start of the special gaming state stored in the RAM 322 to the present time. The number is calculated, and the calculated total number of payouts is notified by the first payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect. Alternatively, the number of payout game balls to be paid out based on the winning to the large winning opening can be stored in the RAM 322, and the number of payout game balls stored in the RAM 322 from the start of the special game state to the present time is the first total number of payouts. It is notified by the payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect.
If a power failure occurs during the execution of the first payout number notification effect or the second payout number notification effect, the first payout number notification effect or the second payout number notification effect is resumed when the power failure is restored. However, since the RAM 322 is a storage means that cannot store and retain the stored information when the power supply to the game machine 10 is stopped, the first payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect resumed after the power failure is restored. , It is not possible to notify the exact total number of payouts.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 159 (a) to 159 (c), when a power failure occurs during the execution of the first payout number notification effect, the first payout number notification effect is performed after the power failure is restored. Is restarted. However, since the RAM 322 cannot retain the stored contents unless power is supplied, the RAM 322 is restarted from the state in which the total number of payouts notified by the acquired cumulative number image G31 is cleared to 0.
The same applies to the case of the second payout number notification effect. That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 159 (d) to 159 (f), if a power failure occurs during the execution of the second payout number notification effect, the second payout number notification effect is restarted after the power failure is restored. To. However, since the RAM 322 cannot retain the stored contents unless power is supplied, the RAM 322 is restarted from the state in which the total number of payouts notified by the acquired cumulative number image G31 is cleared to 0.

In addition, when recovering from a power failure, a process is performed to check whether an error has occurred. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, when the error that occurred before the power failure is not resolved after the power failure is restored, the error image G12 that was displayed before the power failure is restored is displayed even after the power failure is restored. .. That is, when the power is restored from the power failure, the acquired cumulative number image G31 cannot be made to appear as if it was continuously displayed, but the error image G12 can be made to appear as if it was continuously displayed.

In the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of preventing a decrease in interest, a storage means (RAM322) in which it is impossible to store and retain the stored information when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is stopped is used to win a prize in the grand prize opening. The number and the number of payout game balls are memorized. Specifically, for example, at the moment when a power failure occurs, if there is a game ball that is still rolling (a game ball before entering the winning opening or the out opening) in the game area 32, the game ball is released. Even if you win a prize in the winning slot, the winning will be invalid because there is a power outage (accurate counting is not possible). Therefore, if the number of winnings to the large winning opening and the number of payout game balls before the power outage are held after the power failure is restored, the total number of payouts that are not reflected in the game balls that were still rolling at the moment of the power outage will be notified. It will be done, and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the number of winnings to the large winning opening and the number of payout game balls are intentionally stored in a storage means that cannot be stored.

Here, as shown in FIG. 160, for example, the board effect device 44 includes a movable accessory 44a provided so as to be movable in front of the display device 41, and the display device 41 is provided in the moving range of the movable accessory 44a. When a position overlapping with at least a part of the error image G12 displayed on the screen is included, the occurrence of the error is notified not only in the mode of displaying the error image G12 on the display device 41 but also in other modes. Is preferable.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 160, the movable accessory 44a is a first position (position shown in FIG. 160 (a)) retracted from the front of the display device 41 and a front of the display device 41. It is assumed that it is possible to move between at least a part of the error image G12 and a second position (position shown in FIG. 160B) overlapping the front and back. In this case, the error image G12 is hidden by the movable accessory 44a and becomes difficult to see during a part of the period during which the movable accessory 44a is moving or during the period when the movable accessory 44a is in the second position.

In this case, the player may be disadvantaged because he / she stops the game before all the prize balls are paid out without noticing the error. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), in addition to the first aspect of displaying the error image G12 on the display device 41, an error sound (for example, "Pull out the ball" from the speakers 19a and 19b. Also in the second aspect of outputting the voice), the occurrence of an error is notified. The error notification of the second aspect may be performed only when the effect using the movable accessory 44a is executed, or may be performed regardless of whether or not the effect using the movable accessory 44a is executed. ..
It is also possible to further dispose a light guide plate (another accessory) or the like in front of the movable accessory 44a (on the player side), and in that case, an effect by the light guide plate (an effect in which a character or the like emerges). Is likely to overlap with the error image G12. Therefore, while the error image G12 is being displayed (that is, an error is occurring), the effect of the light guide plate (another accessory) may be stopped or interrupted.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions is a special result, the variable winning device (special variable winning device) is used. In a game machine capable of generating a special game state that converts 38) into a state in which a game ball is easy to win, a ball number notification display (cumulative acquisition number image) that notifies the number of game balls to be paid out based on a prize in a variable winning device. A first display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying G31) on the display device 41 and an error display (error image G12) for notifying that an error for stopping the payout of the game ball has occurred are displayed on the display device 41. The second display control means (effect control device 300), the ball count notification display, and the error display can be displayed at the same time, and the error display has a higher display priority than the ball count notification display (FIG. 158). (Refer to (b)), the ball number notification display is displayed during the special game state, and is hidden when the special game state ends, and the error display can be displayed during the special game state. It can be displayed even after the end (see FIGS. 156 and 158 (a)).

Therefore, the display of the error display (error image G12) is prioritized over the display of the ball number notification display (acquired cumulative number image G31), and the ball number notification display is hidden when the special game state ends, but the error display is performed. Can be displayed even after the end of the special game state, so that it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error of stopping the payout of the game ball.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is a special result, the variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) is used. ) Is converted into a state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. ) Is displayed on the display device 41, and an error display (error image G12) for notifying that an error for stopping the payout of the game ball has occurred is displayed on the display device 41. With the second display control means (effect control device 300), a specific game state (time saving state) different from the special game state can be generated after the end of the special game state, and the ball number notification display and the error display can be displayed at the same time. Therefore, the error display has a higher display priority than the ball number notification display (see FIG. 158 (b)), the ball number notification display is displayed during the specific game state, and the specific game state ends. Then, it is hidden, and the error display can be displayed during the specific gaming state, and can be displayed even after the end of the specific gaming state (see FIGS. 157 and 158 (a)).

Therefore, the display of the error display (error image G12) is prioritized over the display of the ball number notification display (acquired cumulative number image G31), and the ball number notification display is hidden when the specific game state ends, but the error display. Can be displayed even after the end of the specific game state, so that it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error of stopping the payout of the game ball.

The variable winning device is not limited to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a normal variable winning device 37 or a large winning opening having a V switch may be used.
Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the display priority is, the closer the image is displayed to the front side, but the display priority is not limited to this. It is preferable that the higher the display priority of the image, the higher the visibility. For example, the higher the display priority of the image, the closer to the center of the screen may be displayed, or the larger the size may be displayed. It may be displayed with a higher brightness display color, or may be displayed with a lower transmittance (that is, an image having a lower display priority is displayed so that the transparency is higher). Further, when the display timing of the first image and the display timing of the second image having a higher priority than the first image overlap, the first image is not displayed during the display of the second image. It may be displayed.
Further, in the present embodiment, the image having a higher priority is drawn on the display layer on the front side of the screen so that the image having a higher display priority is displayed on the front side. Not limited to. For example, it is possible to draw on the same display layer regardless of the display priority, in which case the image with the higher priority is displayed in the foreground as the image with the higher display priority is displayed. , Draw on the same display layer with it placed closer to you.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movable accessory 44a provided so as to be movable in front of the display device 41 and the mode in which the error display (error image G12) is displayed on the display device 41 are different. , The notification means (speakers 19a, 19b and the effect control device 300) for notifying the occurrence of an error are provided, and the moving range of the movable accessory 44a includes at least a part of the error display displayed on the display device 41 and before and after. It can be configured to include a position that overlaps with (see FIG. 160).
That is, it is possible to configure the error notification not only in the first aspect of displaying the error display (error image G12) on the display device 41 but also in the second aspect different from the first aspect.

With this configuration, even if the error display (error image G12) is hidden by the movable accessory 44a and becomes difficult to see, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of the error by the error notification of the second aspect. , It is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game ball.
The error notification in the second aspect is not limited to the mode in which the error sound is output. Specifically, the error notification of the second aspect includes the display of the sub-information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44. At least one of them may be used to notify the occurrence of an error. Further, when the gaming machine 10 is provided with a vibration device or a blower as an effect device, it is also possible to execute the error notification of the second aspect by using the vibration device or the blower. Further, when the gaming machine 10 includes a liquid crystal display other than the display device 41, it is also possible to execute the error notification of the second aspect by using the liquid crystal display.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling a payout mechanism (payout unit) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball is provided, and an error of stopping the payout of the game ball is caused. , An error (overflow error) indicating that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the storage plates (upper plate 21 and lower plate 23) capable of storing the game balls discharged from the payout mechanism, and the payout control means. It can be configured to be at least one of the errors indicating that it is abnormal (payout error).
With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of the game ball.

《Direction sound and error sound》
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including each modification of the second embodiment) can output an effect sound for producing a game and an error sound for notifying the occurrence of an error from the speakers 19a and 19b.
In a conventional gaming machine, an error sound is output with priority over an effect sound, that is, an error sound is usually output in a state where the volume of the effect sound is lowered (including a mute state).
For example, the effect sound output during the special gaming state includes, for example, a round BGM that is always output and a sound that is output during a specific period (hereinafter referred to as “limited time sound”). The limited-time sound is, for example, a probabilistic promotion sound that notifies that the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and is a production sound that is of higher interest to the player than the round BGM. Therefore, if the error sound is output with priority over the limited-time sound, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced. Therefore, if the limited-time sound is output with priority over the error sound, it is possible to prevent the game from deteriorating.
However, there are a plurality of types of errors, and depending on the type of error, it may be inconvenient to output a limited-time sound in preference to an error sound. Specifically, for example, errors related to fraudulent activities (front frame opening error, gaming machine frame opening error, frame radio wave error, board radio wave error, magnetic error, big prize opening fraud error, general electric fraud error, vibration error, etc. ) Is output with priority over the error sound for a limited time, the clerk of the game store will be late in noticing the occurrence of the error, and the game machine will be prone to fraud.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the predetermined effect sound is classified into the first effect sound and the second effect sound, and the predetermined error sound is classified into the first error sound and the second error sound. The output is controlled so that the order of priority is higher in the order of effect sound <first error sound <second effect sound <second error sound.
Specifically, for example, among the production sounds output during the special gaming state, the round BGM is used as the first production sound, and the limited-time sound such as the probabilistic promotion sound is used as the second production sound. In addition, among the error sounds that may be output during the special game state, the fraudulent non-related error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error not related to fraudulent activity such as an overflow error is set as the first error sound, and the frame opening error (frame opening error). The fraud-related error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error related to fraudulent activity such as the front frame opening error or the game machine frame opening error) is referred to as the second error sound. That is, in the sounds output during the special gaming state, the output priority is higher in the order of round BGM <illegal non-related error sound <time-limited sound <illegal related error sound.

FIG. 161 shows an example of the output / non-output timing of the effect sound and the error sound.
For example, as shown in FIG. 161 when the special gaming state starts, the output of the round BGM is started (t181).
Next, when it is time to output the probabilistic promotion sound, the round BGM is in a non-output state (t182).

Since the probabilistic promotion sound has a lower priority than the frame opening error sound (the error sound that notifies the occurrence of the frame opening error), the probabilistic promotion sound during the period when the output of the probabilistic promotion sound and the output of the frame opening error sound overlap. Is in a non-output state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the period in which the output of the probabilistic promotion sound and the output of the frame opening error sound overlap is t182 to t183.
In addition, since the probabilistic promotion sound has a higher priority than the overflow error sound (error sound that notifies the occurrence of an overflow error), the overflow error sound is emitted during the period when the output of the probabilistic promotion sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap. It becomes a non-output state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the period in which the output of the probabilistic promotion sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap is t182 to t184.
Further, since the frame opening error sound has a higher priority than the overflow error sound, the overflow error sound is in a non-output state during the period when the output of the frame opening error sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the period in which the output of the frame opening error sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap is t182 to t183.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 161 for example, when the timing of outputting the probabilistic promotion sound, the timing of outputting the frame opening error sound, and the timing of outputting the overflow error sound come at the same time, the probabilistic promotion sound and the overflow occur. The error sound is not output, and the frame opening error sound is output (t182). When the output of the frame opening error sound is completed, the probability variation promotion sound is output from the middle (t183), and when the output of the probability variation promotion sound is completed, the overflow error sound is output from the middle (t184), and the overflow error sound is output. When is finished, the output of the round BGM is restarted (t185).

Here, the non-output state is a state in which reproduction is performed but output from the speakers 19a and 19b is not performed. The non-output state may be a state in which neither reproduction nor output from the speakers 19a and 19b is performed.
Further, in FIG. 161, an overflow error sound is illustrated as the first error sound, but the first error sound may be an invalid non-related error sound other than the overflow error sound.
Further, although FIG. 161 illustrates the frame opening error sound as the second error sound, the second error sound may be an illegal error sound other than the frame opening error sound.
Further, in FIG. 161, the probability variation promotion sound is illustrated as the second production sound, but the second production sound is a limited-time sound other than the probability variation promotion sound (round promotion sound, V switch passing production sound, etc.). Is also good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the priority of the fraudulent non-related error sound is set lower than the priority of the limited-time sound from the viewpoint of securing the output opportunity of the limited-time sound as much as possible. Specifically, the fraud-related error sound has priority over the limited-time sound, while the fraud-non-related error sound has no priority over the limited-time sound. That is, by adding a priority to be output to the error sound, an error sound that should be output until the output of the limited-time sound is obstructed, and an error sound that should not be output until the output of the limited-time sound is obstructed. Can be distinguished. Therefore, since the opportunity to output the limited-time sound is secured as much as possible, it is possible to prevent the game from deteriorating, and the fraud-related error sound is output with priority over the limited-time sound, so that fraud is less likely to occur. , Even if it occurs, it can be dealt with immediately.

When the fraud-related error sound for notifying the occurrence of an error related to fraudulent activity is output, the fraud-related error image for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41.
Further, when the fraudulent non-related error sound for notifying the occurrence of an error not related to fraudulent activity is output, the fraudulent non-related error image for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41.
In addition, when a limited-time sound (such as a probabilistic promotion sound that notifies that the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state) is output, a limited-time image (special after the end of the special game state) is output. The display device 41 may display a probability variation promotion image or the like that informs that the probability state of the variable display game becomes a high probability state.

Further, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-non-related error image, and the limited-time image may or may not be the same as the sound. That is, the display control may be performed so that the priority is higher in the order of the fraudulent non-related error image <time-limited image <illegal-related error image (in the same order as the sound). Display control may be performed so that the priority is higher in the order of error image <illegal related error image (order different from sound).
In the present embodiment, an image having a higher display priority is displayed on the front side, but the display priority is not limited to this. It is preferable that the higher the display priority of the image, the higher the visibility. For example, the higher the display priority of the image, the closer to the center of the screen may be displayed, or the larger the size may be displayed. It may be displayed with a higher brightness display color, or may be displayed with a lower transmittance (that is, an image having a lower display priority is displayed so that the transparency is higher). Further, when the display timing of the first image and the display timing of the second image having a higher priority than the first image overlap, the first image is not displayed while the second image is being displayed. It may be displayed.
Further, the method of displaying the image having a higher display priority on the front side may be a method of drawing the image having a higher priority on the display layer on the front side of the screen, or may be a method of drawing the image on the front side of the screen. There may be a method of drawing an image having a high value on the same display layer in a state of being arranged closer to the front side.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game machine provided with the speakers 19a and 19b, an output control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b and a predetermined state. It is equipped with a special game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the condition is satisfied is a special result, and is output. The control means has a first effect sound (for example, round BGM) and a second effect sound (for example, a second effect sound) having a higher output priority than the first effect sound as the effect sound for producing the game during the occurrence of the special game state. (Limited time sound) can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the first error sound (for example, an illegal non-related error sound) and the first error sound are used as error sounds for notifying the occurrence of an error during the occurrence of a special gaming state. The second error sound (for example, fraud-related error sound) having a higher output priority than the first error sound can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the first effect sound is output or the second effect sound is output. 2 If an error that outputs an error sound occurs, the second error sound is output with priority, and if an error that outputs the first error sound occurs when the first effect sound is output, the first error occurs. If an error occurs in which the sound is output with priority and the first error sound is output when the second effect sound is output, the second effect sound is output with priority (see FIG. 161).

Therefore, since the second effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound, the error sound can be suitably output so that the output opportunity of the second effect sound is secured as much as possible.
Further, since the second error sound is output with priority over the first effect sound, the second effect sound, and the first error sound, for example, by setting the second error sound as an error sound related to fraud, fraud occurs. It is difficult to do, and even if it occurs, it can be dealt with immediately.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the sound output means (speakers 19a, 19b) capable of outputting a predetermined sound and the output control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the sound output from the sound output means. ), A display means (display device 41) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a display control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the display means, the output control means is a predetermined operation. The volume of the sound output means can be changed according to the above, and the production sound (for example, a limited-time sound), the first error sound for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error (for example, an illegal non-related error sound), and the first error sound. It is possible to output the second error sound (for example, fraud-related error sound), which has a higher output priority than, and if an error that outputs the second error sound occurs when the production sound is output, the second error occurs. If an error occurs in which the sound is output with priority and the first error sound is output when the effect sound is output, the effect sound is output with priority, and the display control means (effect control device 300) outputs the sound. Volume information (volume image G11) that can be changed according to the change in the volume of the means can be displayed, and if an error that outputs a second error sound occurs when the effect sound is output, the effect sound is displayed. The second error notification image (for example, fraud-related error image) corresponding to the second error sound can be displayed with priority over the corresponding effect image (for example, a limited-time image), and the first error sound is output when the effect sound is output. When an error to be output occurs, the first error notification image corresponding to the first error sound (for example, a non-error image related to fraud) can be displayed with priority over the effect image corresponding to the effect sound.

Therefore, since the effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound, the error sound can be suitably output so that the output opportunity of the effect sound is secured as much as possible.
Further, since the second error sound is output with priority over the effect sound and the first error sound, for example, by setting the second error sound as an error sound related to fraud, fraud is less likely to occur, and even if it occurs. It will be possible to deal with it immediately.
Further, the priority of the sound is the first error sound <effect sound <second error sound, whereas the priority of the image is the effect image <first error notification image <second error notification image. That is, the priority of the sound and the priority of the image are different. Therefore, while the effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound, the first error notification image can be displayed with priority over the effect image, so that the priority of the sound and the priority of the image are the same. Compared to the case (that is, when the effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound and the effect image is displayed with priority over the first error notification image), when the first error occurs. It will be possible to deal with it immediately.
In the present embodiment, when the timing of outputting the first sound and the timing of outputting the second sound having a higher priority than the first sound overlap, the timing of outputting the second sound is during the output of the second sound. The first sound is set to a non-output state, that is, a mute state, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, during the output of the second sound, the first sound is in a state where the volume is lower than the original volume (volume when the output timing does not overlap with the second sound) (including the mute state). good.

<< Operation sound and error sound >>
As described above, when the player performs a change operation (volume change operation or brightness change operation) for adjusting the game environment, the operation sound corresponding to the change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b (FIG. 147). reference). In the present embodiment, the operation sound corresponding to the change operation is set to have a lower priority than the fraud-related error sound and a higher priority than the fraud-non-related error sound.
FIG. 162 shows an example of volume notification during error notification. Since the same processing as the volume notification is performed in the luminance notification, the description of the luminance notification will be omitted with reference to the drawings.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 162, when an unauthorized error sound such as a frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects a volume change operation (t198, t201, t204). ), Display the volume image G11, output the operation sound, and adjust the volume. On the other hand, when an error sound related to fraud such as a frame opening error sound is output, the effect control device 300 displays and operates the volume image G11 even if the volume change operation is detected (t191, t194). It is configured not to output sound or adjust the volume.

Further, FIGS. 163 and 164 show another example of the volume notification during the error notification.
The example shown in FIG. 163 is different from the example shown in FIG. 162 in that the volume image G11 is displayed and the volume is adjusted during the output of the fraud-related error sound.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 163, when an unauthorized error sound such as a frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects a volume change operation (t198, t201, t204). ), Display the volume image G11, output the operation sound, and adjust the volume. Further, when an error sound related to fraud such as a frame opening error sound is output, the effect control device 300 displays the volume image G11 and adjusts the volume when the volume change operation is detected (t191, t194). However, it may be configured not to output the operation sound.

The example shown in FIG. 164 is different from the example shown in FIG. 163 in that the operation sound is output from the middle when the output of the fraud-related error sound is completed.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 164, when an unauthorized error sound such as a frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects a volume change operation (t198, t201, t204). ), Display the volume image G11, output the operation sound, and adjust the volume. Further, when an error sound related to fraud such as a frame opening error sound is output, the effect control device 300 displays the volume image G11 and adjusts the volume when the volume change operation is detected (t191, t194). After that, when the output of the fraud-related error sound ends (t195), if the original output period (t194 to t196) of the operation sound has not ended when the output of the fraud-related error sound ends, the operation is concerned. The sound may be output from the middle.

When the fraud-related error sound for notifying the occurrence of an error related to fraudulent activity is output, the fraud-related error image for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41, or an error not related to fraudulent activity may be displayed. When the fraudulent non-related error sound for notifying the occurrence of the error is output, the fraudulent non-related error image for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41.
Further, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-non-related error image, and the volume image G11 may or may not be the same as the sound. That is, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-non-related error image, and the volume image G11 (including the image such as the cross key) may or may not be the same as the sound. .. That is, the display may be controlled so that the priority is higher in the order of the fraudulent non-related error image <volume image G11 <illegal related error image (in the same order as the sound), or the volume image G11 <illegal non-related error image. <Display control may be performed so that the priority is higher in the order of fraud-related error images (order different from the sound).

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game machine provided with the speakers 19a and 19b, the volume setting means for changing the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b according to a predetermined operation (volume change operation) of the player. From the (effect control device 300), the display control means (effect control device 300) that displays the volume information (volume image G11) regarding the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b on the display device 41 according to a predetermined operation, and the speakers 19a and 19b. When an output control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the output sound is provided and an error sound (for example, an error sound related to fraud) for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. When a predetermined operation is performed, the display control means displays the volume information, and the output control means does not output the operation sound corresponding to the volume information (see FIG. 163).

Therefore, since the error sound is output with priority over the operation sound, the error sound can be output suitably.
Further, during the output of the error sound, the operation sound corresponding to the predetermined operation (volume change operation) is not output, but the volume information corresponding to the predetermined operation (volume change operation) is displayed, so that the player can perform the predetermined operation. Can be recognized as being successfully accepted.
The error sound that is output with priority over the operation sound is not limited to the fraud-related error sound and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the error sound that is not related to fraud may be used.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. In addition, the configurations of the above-mentioned modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

For example, it is possible to output a predetermined sound at a volume different from the volume set by the player (or the hall). The same applies to the brightness.
Specifically, for example, when the player setting is "4", the volume of the fraud-related error sound is "4", the volume of the limited-time sound is "3", and the volume of the fraud-unrelated error sound is "2". The volume of BGM may be set to "1". That is, the fraud-related error sound may be output at a volume set by the player, and other sounds may be output at a volume lower than the volume set by the player.
Further, for example, when the player setting is "5", the volume of the fraud-related error sound is "7", the volume of the limited-time sound is "6", the volume of the fraud-non-related error sound is "5", and the volume of the BGM. May be set to "4". That is, the fraudulent non-related error sound (or the sound for a limited time) is output at the volume set by the player, and the sound having a higher priority than the fraudulent non-related error sound (or the sound for a limited time) is output by the player. The sound may be output at a volume higher than the volume set by the player, and a sound having a lower priority than the fraudulent non-related error sound (or a limited-time sound) may be output at a volume lower than the volume set by the player.
Further, in the above embodiment, the volume can be adjusted in the range of 1 to 5, but it may be adjusted to "0 (silence)". When the player setting is "0 (silence)", the volume of the fraud-related error sound may be set to "1" and the volume of other sounds may be set to "0". That is, the sound other than the fraud-related error sound may be muted. Of course, it is also possible to mute all sounds including fraud-related error sounds.

Further, regardless of the volume set by the player (or the hall), the ratio of the output volume within a predetermined range may be fixed. That is, for example, the sound may be output according to the output volume value calculated by the output volume value = m (player setting value) × a (magnification <coefficient> corresponding to each sound). However, when the volume set by the player (or the hall) is "0 (silence)", the sound other than the fraud-related error sound may be muted as described above. The same applies to the brightness.
Specifically, for example, when the player setting is "3", the volume of the fraud-related error sound is "3.3 (magnification 1.1 times)" and the volume of the limited-time sound is "3 (magnification 1 times)". , The volume of the error sound not related to fraud is "2.4 (magnification 0.8 times)", the volume of BGM is "2.1 (magnification 0.7 times)", and the player setting is "4". , The volume of fraud-related error sounds is "4.4 (magnification 1.1 times)", the volume of limited-time sounds is "4 (magnification 1 times)", and the volume of fraud-unrelated error sounds is "3.2 (magnification)". 0.8 times) ”, and the volume of BGM may be“ 2.8 (magnification 0.7 times) ”.
Further, if the specification is such that the volume value changes from the player set value to the hall set value in the customer waiting state, the output volume value = m (player set value) × a (each) in a state other than the customer waiting state. Sound is output according to the output volume value calculated by the magnification corresponding to the sound <coefficient>), and in the customer waiting state, the output volume value = M (hole setting value) × a (magnification corresponding to each sound <coefficient>). The sound may be output according to the output volume value calculated in>).

The error sound and the limited-time sound can be output at a predetermined volume (for example, the maximum volume) regardless of the volume set by the player (or the hall setting), but the player (or the hall) By configuring to output various sounds depending on the volume set by, even if an error sound or a limited-time sound is output at the time of inspection etc., it is not noisy, so it is possible to perform inspection work comfortably. It will be possible.
Further, when the player (or the hall) is configured to output various sounds depending on the set volume, the magnification and the output mode of the various sounds are predetermined, so that the control is easy and the control is easy. Even if all the sounds overlap, the priority is clear, so the importance is easy to understand.

When using the cross key for volume change operation and brightness change operation, use the up / down key of the cross key for either volume change operation or brightness change operation, and use the left / right key of the cross key for volume. When using either the change operation or the brightness change operation, when either the up / down key or the left / right key is operated at the same time, that is, the volume change operation and the brightness change operation are performed at the same time. In such a case, either (1) change the volume or change the brightness, (2) do not change the volume or change the brightness, or (3) change the volume and change the brightness. You may.
In addition, when the player performs a long press operation as a brightness change operation while the player performs a long press operation as a volume change operation to adjust the volume, (1) the volume is changed during the brightness change operation. (No brightness change), (2) Volume change speed decreases during brightness change operation (may be a function that can be fine-tuned), (3) Volume change and volume change during brightness change operation. Either the brightness may not be changed, or (4) the brightness may be changed (the volume may not be changed) during the brightness change operation.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described.
It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 having a form different from that of the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described again with reference numerals for the portions having the same configurations as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. conduct.
Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Third Embodiment>

As shown in FIG. 163, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 164) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations and effects are provided, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed as an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub-display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device moves the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 164). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 164, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 80. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the first starting winning opening 36. Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 164 toward the center of the display device 41.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 183) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the right side of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 183) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). .. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 183). Further, in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, a second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. Has been done. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 183).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 is provided between the normal starting gate 34 and the second starting winning opening 97. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed by winning the winning opening (Public electric winning opening 37d) of the normal variable winning device 37, or the special drawing 1 start winning memory (first starting memory). ) Is stored. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning opening (Public winning opening 37d) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is the first starting winning area that gives the start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (the first special figure variable display game). be. Then, the game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 183), and when the game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a, the game control device 100 sets the game control device 100. Execute the special figure 1 variable display game immediately, or memorize the special figure 1 start winning memory. As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to the first starting winning area (starting opening in FIG. 1), and the second starting winning opening 97 is the second starting. It corresponds to the winning area (starting port of special figure 2).

The game control device (game control means) 100 controls the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be converted into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the normal fluctuation display game. (Conversion control means) is connected (see FIG. 183). The details of the configuration of the normal variable winning device 37 will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 moves back and forth (slides) by the normal variable winning device 37c to move the normal variable winning device 37 in the front-rear direction. It is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the mouth 37d (makes the game ball flow into the solenoid winning mouth 37d). As the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the ordinary electric winning opening 37d by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side is provided by the ordinary electric solenoid 37c. You may. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the game control device 100 opens the movable member 37b via the normal electric solenoid 37c so that the game ball can flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Change to an open state.

In addition, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the game state, a time-saving state (general electric support (electric support) state) is generated.

A special variable winning device 38 is provided in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. As shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, the special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38d into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving back and forth (sliding) the opening / closing member 990 in the front-rear direction. The special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38d from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening 38d. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 183).

That is, the special variable winning device 38 of the present embodiment opens and closes from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) in which the opening / closing member 990 closes the large winning opening 38d depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The member 990 retracts and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. Then, the game ball arriving at the special variable winning device 38 is repeatedly guided diagonally backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992, and is guided diagonally forward by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964. It meanders back and forth and flows down from right to left. As a result, the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 is longer than in the case where the flow path 38f has no undulations such as the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 and flows straight down. become longer. Therefore, the game ball is always present on the opening / closing member 990, and even if the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. There is a high possibility that the player will fall and win the big winning opening 38d, and even with a short opening, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning.

Further, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened is bounced by contacting the protrusion 992 and guided in a direction away from the large winning opening 38d. Further, the bounced game ball may be further separated from the large winning opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the protrusions 992 are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the protrusions 992 may fall without contacting the protrusions 992. As described above, by providing the protrusion 992, the front wall protrusion 954, and the rear wall protrusion 964, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is opened becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. can. Further, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented. It should be noted that the configuration for retaining the game ball in the normal variable prize device 37, which will be described later, may be used as the configuration for retaining the game ball in the special variable prize device 38, or conversely, the game ball in the special variable prize device 38. The configuration for retaining the game ball may be used as the configuration for retaining the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37.

Returning to FIG. 164, the game area 32 below the first start winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting the game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like. Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal map variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32. The batch display device 50 is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 variable display for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for a game and a storage display unit 53 for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 1 variation display game composed of LED lamps are provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning device 38), and a method of hitting that is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying (a method of hitting corresponding to a game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of a special figure variation display game are provided. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.

Further, the normal map display unit 58 that displays the normal map fluctuation display game, the storage display unit 59 for notifying the start memory number of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is configured so that it is displayed that it is changing and it is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit result mode (special result mode) is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The storage display unit 53 is the number of undigested balls among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, which are the conditions for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (starting memory number = holding number). Is displayed by turning off and turning on (blinking) multiple LEDs. The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the special game state, the LEDs are turned on according to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

In the first game state display unit 56, for example, when the left-handed hit is more advantageous for the player than the right-handed hit (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and the right-handed hit is better than the left-handed hit. When the gaming state is more advantageous to the player (when hitting to the right), all the LEDs are turned on. The probability display unit 57 turns off all LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and all LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability change state). Turn on.

FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board 30 included in the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. 165, the game board 30 constitutes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front component 600 constituting a front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear portion of the center case 40, and also plays a game. It includes a rear component 700 to which various members necessary for the board 30 are attached. The rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess opened in the front, and inside the recess, a board effect device 44 that operates to produce a game is formed. , Various movable accessory units are provided.

The front component 600 is provided with a general winning opening 35, a warp flow path forming member 614, a stage portion 620, and the like. Further, in the game board main body 80, in addition to the front component 600, the normal starting gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable A winning device 38, a batch display device 50, and the like are provided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a flow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is won. The game ball that fails (specifically, the game ball that has arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 but has not won the normal variable winning device 37) flows downward through the flow path 615. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The guide portion 616 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 617 descends to the left, and a game ball flowing downward on the flow path 615 is received by the upper surface 617, and a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38 exist. It is designed to guide you to the left.

[Normal variable winning device]
Next, an example of the configuration of the ordinary variable winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 176. FIG. 168 is an exploded perspective view of the ordinary variable winning device 37. Further, FIG. 169 (a) is a top view of the normal variable winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and FIG. 169 (b) is an upper surface of the normal variable winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the open state. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 169, the ordinary variable winning device 37 has a flow path rear wall 373a arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and a flow path front wall 371a arranged in front of the flow path rear wall 373a. It is provided with a flow path 37f in which game balls can flow down in a row. The flow path 37f is inclined so as to go down to the right when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down to the right in a row. Further, the normal variable winning device 37 allows the game balls to pass in a row inside the normal variable winning device 37 (specifically, the inside of the base portion composed of the front base member 373 and the rear base member 375). It is provided with a substantially U-shaped detour 37g. As shown in FIG. 168, the inlet 37g1 (one end of the detour 37g) and the exit 37g2 (the other end of the detour 37g) of the detour 37g are formed on the rear wall 373a of the flow path, and the game ball. Inflow from the detour 37f to the detour 37g one by one through the inlet 37g1, and flow out from the detour 37g to the detour 37f one by one through the outlet 37g2.

As shown in FIG. 168, the flow path front wall 371a has a protrusion 371b that projects rearward and penetrates the flow path rear wall 373a. The protrusion 371b is a position where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f collide with each other, and is arranged at a position between the inlet 37g1 and the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g. Therefore, the protrusion 371b blocks the flow of the game ball in the flow path 37f on the way (that is, before flowing into the end point (downstream end) of the flow path 37f), thereby causing the game ball to detour 37g. It is designed to guide you. Since the protrusion 371b is provided in the middle of the flow path 37f, the game ball cannot flow into the end point of the flow path 37f unless it passes through the detour 37g.

As shown in FIG. 169, the bottom surface of the central portion and the right end portion of the flow path 37f and the bottom surface of the detour 37g are configured by a movable member 37b slidable in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 169 (a), the movable member 37b is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won in the normal variable winning device 37 (Public winning opening 37d) by projecting forward, and FIG. 169 (b). As described above, it can be converted into an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in the general electric winning opening 37d by evacuating to the rear. That is, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b and cannot flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, and the movable member 37b is in the open state. If this is the case, it is possible to flow into the Fuden winning opening 37d.

Specifically, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. That is, it flows down the flow path 37f to the protrusion 371b, collides with the protrusion 371b, and flows into the detour 37g. Further, when the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 37b collides with the protrusion 371b, or when the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f flows into the upper surface of the movable member 37b. If the movable member 37b is in the open state at that time, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and has flowed into the end point of the flow path 37f flows into the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the open state. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and has flowed into the end point of the flow path 37f does not flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, but is a normal variable winning device 37. It advances to the outside and flows down to the guidance unit 616 through, for example, the flow down path 615. That is, the game ball corresponds to a game ball that has failed to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (a game ball that has arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 but has not won the normal variable winning device 37). .. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, there is a gap between the movable member 37b and the flow path front wall 371a, but the gap is such that the game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 168, the ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch 37a and a movable member unit 374 having a movable member 37b and a universal solenoid 37c. Further, the normal variable winning device 37 includes a front decorative member 371 having a flow path front wall 371a, a front base member 373 having a flow path rear wall 373a, a rear base member 375 to which a movable member 37b and the like are attached, and a rear base. A rear cover member 377 that covers the rear surface of the member 375, a front substrate holder 372 for fixing the front LED substrate 372a and the front LED substrate 372a to the rear surface of the front decorative member 371, and a rear LED substrate 376a and the rear LED substrate 376a. Is provided with a rear board holder 376 for fixing the rear base member 375 to the rear surface.

At least the front decorative member 371, the front base member 373, and the rear base member 375 are made of a material capable of transmitting light. A front LED substrate 372a is arranged behind the front decorative member 371 as a decorative means, and a rear LED substrate 376a is arranged behind the rear base member 375 as a decorative means. It is possible to decorate.

The front decorative member 371 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion 371c. The front surface of the front surface portion 371c is arranged close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game ball does not flow down in front of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front surface portion 371c is a surface visible to the player and is decorated. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 371c is a flow path front wall 371a forming a side wall on the front side of the flow path 37f.

As shown in FIG. 169, on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) upstream side front wall protrusions 371d are provided. The upstream front wall protrusion 371d is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces. The upstream front wall protrusion 371d has a function of guiding the game ball flowing to the right to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, a downstream side front wall protrusion 371e projecting rearward is provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The downstream front wall protrusion 371e is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces. The downstream front wall protrusion 371e has a function of guiding the game ball flowing to the right to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing into the end point of the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other. Further, in the downstream side front wall protrusion 371e, the game ball flowing down around the normal variable winning device 37 (outside of the normal variable winning device 37) is downstream to the inside of the normal variable winning device 37 (flow path 37f). It has a function to prevent intrusion from the end point side).

FIG. 170 (a) is a back view of the front decorative member 371. As shown in FIG. 170 (a), a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 371f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped front surface portion 371c are provided on the rear surface side of the front decorative member 371. The function of the extending wall 371f is different depending on the place where the wall is provided, and the bottom surface portion 371f1 forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the start point (upstream end portion) of the flow path 37f). Fuden winning opening forming part 371f2 forming the side wall or bottom of the Fuden winning opening 37d, guiding flow path forming part 371f3 forming the guiding flow path 37e for guiding the game ball winning in the Fuden winning opening 37d, starting port 2 switch It has a function as a switch mounting portion forming portion 371f4 forming a mounting portion for mounting the 37a, and a peripheral wall 371f5 for preventing the intrusion of the game ball flowing down around the normal variable winning device 37 into the inside.

The bottom surface portion 371f1 forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f is an inclined surface inclined to the left side when viewed from the rear surface side. The Fuden winning opening forming portion 371f2 is inclined so as to collect the game balls flowing into the Fuden winning opening 37d into the induction flow path 37e. Game balls can flow into the guide flow path 37e in a single row, and a start port 2 switch 37a is provided at the inflow portion into the guide flow path 37e. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the Fuden winning opening 37d will flow into the induction flow path 37e after being detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a. The guidance flow path 37e formed by the guidance flow path forming portion 371f3 is a flow path for guiding the game ball from the general electric winning opening 37d to the rear surface side of the game board 30, and the game ball is placed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 371c. Ribs 371g for guiding backward are formed.

The front LED substrate 372a and the front substrate holder 372 are arranged inside the peripheral wall 371f5 of the rear surface of the front decorative member 371 (a portion surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5). Further, a portion of the rear surface of the front decorative member 371 surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5 is subjected to processing for scattering light (concavo-convex processing in the example shown in FIG. 170 (a)). This makes it possible to effectively decorate the normal variable winning device 37 with the light from the front LED board 372a and the rear LED board 376a, and also front-decorate the front LED board 372a itself, the front board holder 372, and the like. It is difficult to see through the front decorative member 371 from the front of the member 371. Further, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), there are a plurality of holes for releasing heat such as the front LED substrate 372a in the lower portion of the front base member 373 (seven in the example shown in FIG. 170 (b)). It is provided. These holes are also made difficult to see from the front of the front decorative member 371 due to the processing applied to the front decorative member 371 to scatter the light.

As shown in FIG. 168, the front base member 373 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b. A front decorative member 371 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b that is not hidden by the front decorative member 371 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface portion 373b is a flow path rear wall 373a forming a side wall on the rear side of the flow path 37f. Further, at a position at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 373a, a movable member insertion portion 373c is formed which penetrates the movable member 37b back and forth for inserting the movable member 37b from the rear surface side of the front base member 373.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) rear wall protrusions 373d protruding forward are provided on the front surface side of the front base member 373. The rear wall protrusion 373d is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and the upstream front wall is behind each of the upstream front wall protrusions 371d provided on the flow path front wall 371a. It is provided so as to be located slightly downstream of the protrusion 371d. The rear wall protrusion 373d has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other.

FIG. 170 (b) is a back view of the front base member 373. As shown in FIG. 170 (b), the guide flow path 37e is located on the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b in the central portion of the rear surface portion 373b, which faces the portion of the front decorative member 371 in which the guide flow path 37e is formed. A penetrating portion 373e that penetrates back and forth is formed so as to communicate with the side. Further, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 373f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b are provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The extending wall 373f has a different function depending on the place where it is provided, and functions as a guiding flow path forming portion 373f1 forming the guiding flow path 37e and a peripheral wall 373f2 forming the periphery of the normal variation winning device 37. Have.

The guide flow path forming portion 373f1 forms the guide flow path 37e so as to guide the game ball flowing into the penetration portion 373e backward. Further, a rib 373g for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the lower end portion of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1. The lower end of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1 and the rib 373g formed at the lower end portion have an inclined surface whose upper surface descends rearward, and the game ball flowing into the penetrating portion 373e is received by these upper surfaces and rearward. It is designed to guide you to. The guided gaming ball flows into the discharge flow path for discharging the gaming ball to the outside of the gaming machine 10.

The peripheral wall 373f2 is formed in accordance with the shape of the penetrating portion that penetrates back and forth formed in the portion of the game board main body 80 to which the normal variable winning device 37 is attached, and the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. At that time, the peripheral wall 373f2 is in a state of being inserted through the penetrating portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b located outside the peripheral wall 373f2 is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 168, the rear base member 375 includes a peripheral wall 375a that coincides with the peripheral wall 373f2 of the front base member 373 in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 168, a pair of movable members 37b that operate in the front-rear direction are guided and supported at positions facing the movable member insertion portion 373c formed in the front base member 373 of the rear base member 375. The movable member holding portion 375b of the above is provided. The pair of movable member holding portions 375b are arranged at a predetermined interval (gap 375c) so that they can abut on the lower surface of the movable member 37b and can guide and support the movable member 37b. It is provided so as to extend along the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 168, a movable member unit 374 provided with a movable member 37b and an operating mechanism (driving mechanism) for operating the movable member 37b is attached to the front surface side of the rear base member 375. The movable member unit 374 has a movable member 37b that can slide in the front-rear direction, a normal electric solenoid 37c for operating the movable member 37b, and a slider 374a that transmits the driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. And a crank 374b.

The movable member unit 374 has a closed state in which the movable member 37b is projected forward as shown in FIG. 169 (a) and an open state in which the movable member 37b is retracted rearward as shown in FIG. 169 (b). It is convertible. The movable member 37b can appear above the general electric winning opening 37d via the movable member holding portion 375b formed on the rear base member 375 and the movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. There is.

FIG. 171 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable member unit 374, and FIG. 171 (b) is a front view of the movable member unit 37b. Further, FIG. 172 (a) is a top view of the movable member 37b, and FIG. 172 (b) is a bottom view of the movable member 37b. As shown in FIG. 171 (a), the movable member 37b is located at a position lower than the upper portion 37b1, the first middle stage portion 37b2 provided at a position lower than the upper stage portion 37b1, and the first middle stage portion 37b2. The second middle stage portion 37b3 provided and the lower stage portion 37b4 provided at a position lower than the second middle stage portion 37b3 form a stepped shape arranged in the left-right direction. The upper part 37b1, the first middle part 37b2, the second middle part 37b3, and the lower part 37b4 are arranged in this order so that the upper part 37b1 is arranged on the leftmost side and the lower part 37b4 is arranged on the rightmost side. The ball is designed to flow down from left to right.

The upper portion 37b1 has a front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and is a flow path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f. The flow path forming portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 is one step lower than the portion other than the flow path forming portion of the upper stage portion 37b1. Further, the lower wall projecting portion 37b5 extends forward from the right end portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 other than the flow path forming portion. The lower wall protruding portion 37b5 has a slope on the left side surface, and is provided so as to gradually narrow the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the flow path forming portion. The lower wall protrusion 37b5 has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other.

In the first middle stage portion 37b2, the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state is a flow path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f, and the front end thereof. A portion other than the portion (that is, a portion other than the flow path forming portion) is regarded as a detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. Of the first middle stage portion 37b2, the boundary portion between the flow path forming portion and the detour forming portion is arranged directly below the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The first middle stage portion 37b2 is inclined so that the rear end is located below the front end. This makes it easier for the game ball to roll from the front side to the rear side in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, for example, as shown in FIG. 172 (a). Further, on the upper surface of the first middle stage portion 37b2, a meandering left ridge portion 37b6 that protrudes upward and extends back and forth is formed. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the detour 37g can be meandered to suppress the ball power.

In the second middle stage portion 37b3, the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state guides the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f to the detour 37g. It is placed directly under.

In the lower portion 37b4, the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state forms the bottom surface of the detour path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the end point of the detour path 37f). It is a detour forming portion, and a portion other than the front end portion (that is, a portion other than the flow path forming portion) is a detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. Of the lower portion 37b4, the boundary portion between the flow path forming portion and the detour forming portion is arranged directly below the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The lower end portion 37b4 is inclined so that the rear end portion is located above the front end portion, and the rear end portion is flush with the rear end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 172 (a), the game ball is likely to roll from the rear side to the front side in the downstream portion of the detour 37g. The rear end portion of the lower portion 37b4 may be provided at a position lower than the rear end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2. Further, on the upper surface of the lower portion 37b4, a meandering right ridge portion 37b7 that protrudes upward and extends back and forth is formed. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the detour 37g can be meandered to suppress the ball power.

As described above, the movable member 37b is provided with a rising portion such as a lower wall protrusion 37b5, a left protrusion 37b6, and a right protrusion 37b7. Further, the front decorative member 371 is provided with a raised portion such as the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the front base member 373 is provided with a raised portion such as the rear wall protrusion 373d. .. With such a rising portion, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), a sliding portion 37b8 extending downward is formed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the movable member 37b. The sliding portion 37b8 is formed so as to extend along the front-rear direction, and the movable member 37b is placed on the holding portion 373h by abutting on the upper surface of the pair of holding portions 373h formed on the front base member 373. It becomes slidable.

As shown in FIGS. 171 (b) and 172 (b), a connecting pin 37b9 projecting downward is provided in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 171 (a), a penetration portion 374b1 through which the connection pin 37b9 can be inserted is formed in the crank (drive arm) 374b that transmits the driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. The movable member 37b and the crank 374b are connected by inserting the tip end portion (lower end portion) of the connection pin 37b9 into the penetration portion 374b1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 171 (b) and 172 (b), in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b, the front side and the rear side of the connection pin 37b9 project downward and extend along the front-rear direction. The guide rib 37b10 is provided. The guide ribs 37b10 include a gap 373i (see FIG. 170 (b)) formed along the front-rear direction between the pair of holding portions 373h of the front base member 373, and a pair of movable members of the rear base member 375. It can be inserted into the gap 375c (see FIG. 168) formed along the front-rear direction between the holding portions 375b. By inserting the guide ribs 37b10 of the movable member 37b into these gaps 373i and 375c from above, it is possible to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the movable member 37b in the front-rear direction. That is, by fitting the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b into the gap 373i of the front base member 373 and the gap 375c of the rear base member 375, the movement of the movable member 37b in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the movable member 37b moves. Can be limited to movement in the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 171 (a), the crank 374b that transmits the driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is a substantially L-shaped member, and the connecting pin 37b9 of the movable member 37b is attached to one end thereof. A penetrating portion 374b1 that can be inserted is formed, and a convex portion 374b2 is formed at the other end portion. Further, the slider 374a that transmits the driving force from the general electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is formed with a concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted, and the convex portion 374b2 is inserted into the concave portion 374a1. The slider 374a and the crank 374b are connected with each other. Further, a rotation shaft 374b3 along the vertical direction is formed in the bent portion of the crank 374b, and the crank 374b can rotate around the rotation shaft 374b3. The rotation shaft 374b3 is sandwiched from above and below by the rear base member 375 and is rotatably held.

As shown in FIG. 171 (a), the slider 374a has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 374a2 orthogonal to the vertical direction, a left wall portion 374a3 connected to the left end of the main body portion 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, and a main body portion. It is configured to include a front wall portion 374a4 connected to the front end of the 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, and a protruding piece 374a5 projecting forward from the front wall portion 374a4. The concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted is formed in the main body portion 374a2.

The left wall portion 374a3 of the slider 374a is engaged with the drive shaft 37c1 of the solenoid solenoid 37c, and the drive shaft 37c1 of the slider 374a is extended (in the present embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the right). Then, it is pushed by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the right, and when the drive shaft 37c1 retracts (in the case of this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the left), it is pulled by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the left. do.

As shown in FIG. 170 (b), a recessed portion 373j extending in the left-right direction is provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The protruding piece 374a5 of the slider 374a can be inserted into the recessed portion 373j, and the protruding piece 374a5 is inserted into the recessed portion 373j from the rear to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the slider 374a in the left-right direction. be able to. Further, the front wall portion 374a4 of the slider 374a comes into contact with the rear surface of the front base member 373 when the protruding piece 374a5 of the slider 374a is inserted into the recessed portion 373j of the front base member 373 from the rear. As a result, the front-rear position of the slider 374a with respect to the front base member 373 is set to a predetermined front-rear position.

When the movable member 37b is converted from the open state to the closed state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the normal electric solenoid 37c is extended. When the drive shaft 37c1 is extended, the slider 374a slides to the right and the crank 374b rotates counterclockwise with respect to the rotation shaft 374b3 when viewed from the upper surface side, so that the connection pin 983a faces forward. The movable member 37b protrudes forward. As a result, the movable member 37b is closed (the state shown in FIG. 169 (a)), and the game ball cannot be won in the general electric winning opening 37d.

On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is converted from the closed state to the open state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the normal electric solenoid 37c is retracted. When the drive shaft 37c1 retracts, the slider 374a slides to the left, and the crank 374b rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 374b3 when viewed from the upper surface side, so that the connection pin 37b9 faces backward. The movable member 37b moves and retracts backward. As a result, the movable member 37b is in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 169 (b)), and the game ball can be won in the general electric winning opening 37d.

FIGS. 173 to 176 show the rolling mode of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37. In addition, in FIGS. 173 to 176, the illustration of some members is omitted for the sake of explanation. The game ball arriving at the normal variable winning device 37 (the game ball that has flowed into the starting point of the flow path 37f) is first guided diagonally to the rear side by the upstream side front wall protrusion 371d located on the upstream side, and then to the upstream side. It is guided diagonally to the front side by the rear wall protrusion 373d located at, and flows into the front end portion of the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b.

The game ball that has flowed into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b is guided diagonally to the rear side by the upstream side front wall protrusion 371d located on the downstream side, and then the rear wall protrusion 373d and the movable member 37b located on the downstream side. It is guided diagonally forward by the lower wall protrusion 37b5 and flows into the front end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b. That is, the game ball meanders back and forth and flows down the flow path 37f. As a result, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b as compared with the case where the flow path 37f has no starting parts such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the rear wall protrusion 373d and flows straight down. The time will be longer.

The game ball that has flowed into the first middle stage portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b collides with the protruding portion 371b and is guided to the rear side by the protruding portion 371b and the first middle stage portion 37b2 that is inclined backward. As shown in (a), it flows into the detour 37g from the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g. As shown in FIG. 174, inside the rear base member 375, a first guide piece 375d for guiding a game ball rolling a detour 37g from the first middle stage portion 37b2 to the lower stage portion 37b4, and a lower stage portion 37b4. A second guide piece 375e that guides the top from the rear side to the front side is provided. When the game ball rolls on the first middle stage portion 37b2 and flows into the rear base member 375 as shown in FIG. 174, it is guided to the right side by the first guide piece 375d as shown in FIG. 175 and is guided to the lower stage. It flows into the portion 37b4.

The game ball that has flowed into the lower portion 37b4 of the movable member 37b is guided forward by the second guide piece 375e and the lower portion 37b4 that is inclined forward as shown in FIG. 176, and is shown in FIG. 173 (b). As such, it flows from the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g to the end point of the flow path 37f (the front end portion of the lower portion 37b4). Here, since the meandering left ridge portion 37b6 is formed in the first middle stage portion 37b2, the game ball meanders left and right and rolls the upstream portion of the detour 37g to the rear side. Further, since the lower right protrusion portion 37b7 is formed in the lower portion 37b4, the game ball meanders left and right and rolls forward in the downstream portion of the detour 37g.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), the front base member 373 is provided with a partition wall 373k that separates the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g, and is upstream of the detour 37g in the rear end portion of the partition wall 373k. An intermediate protrusion 373k1 is formed in the portion corresponding to the portion. Therefore, the game ball collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces while rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle stage portion 37b2) of the detour 37g, and is once pushed back to the entrance 37g1 side. Is done. As a result, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is longer than in the case where the detour 37g has no starting parts such as the left protrusion 37b6, the right protrusion 37b7, and the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and rolls linearly. become longer.

As described above, the flow path 37f is provided with a lower wall protrusion 37b5, an upstream front wall protrusion 371d, a rear wall protrusion 373d, and the like, and the detour 37g is provided with a left protrusion 37b6 and the like. Since the starting portion such as the right protrusion portion 37b7 and the intermediate protrusion portion 373k1 is provided, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b becomes long. Further, by providing these starting parts, the rolling mode of the game ball rolling on the movable member 37b becomes various, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, by providing these starting parts, it is possible to shift the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the movable member 37b to the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is opened. It is possible to prevent ball clogging in the winning opening 37d.

The game ball arriving at the normal variable winning device 37 flows down the flow path 37f and first flows into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b. When the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flows down the flow path 37f and heads toward the protrusion 371b. If the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, if the movable member 37b is not opened before the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b, the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b and heads for the detour 37g.

Even if the movable member 37b is in the open state while the game ball is rolling the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the open state while the game ball is rolling the detour 37g. Even if not, the game ball continues to roll on the detour 37g and heads for the exit 37g2. Then, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d. On the other hand, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g and the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball does not flow into the general electric winning opening 37d and is normally a variable winning device 37. It becomes a game ball that has advanced to the outside (game area 32) and failed to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37.

Here, the intermediate protrusion 373k1 (see FIG. 170 (b)) formed on the partition wall 373k of the front base member 373 has a function of meandering the game ball to prolong the residence time of the game ball on the movable member 37b. Not only that, it also has a function of ensuring a sufficient residence time even when the movable member 37b operates (moves back and forth) while the game ball is rolling around the detour 37g. For example, when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the game ball is rolling in the downstream portion (that is, on the lower portion 37b4) of the detour 37g, the game ball is with the movable member 37b. The game ball is rolling in the downstream part of the detour 37g because it is pulled back to the rear side (upstream side) in the downstream part of the detour 37g due to frictional resistance or contact with the right ridge portion 37b7 or the like. The residence time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is longer than when the movable member 37b does not change its state during the process.

On the other hand, for example, when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle stage portion 37b2) of the detour 37g, the game ball is movable. The game ball rolls on the upstream part of the detour 37g because it is pulled to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream part of the detour 37g due to frictional resistance with the member 37b or contact with the left protrusion 37b6 or the like. The residence time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is shorter than when the movable member 37b does not change its state during movement. On the other hand, since the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment is provided with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, the game ball moves to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. When pulled in, it collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces. That is, the game ball collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 while being drawn to the downstream side, and is once pushed back to the front side (upstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, so that the game ball is upstream of the detour 37g. Even when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the portion is rolling, it is possible to secure a sufficient residence time on the movable member 37b of the game ball.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a gaming board main body 80 in which a gaming area 32 in which a gaming ball can flow down is formed on the front side, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (the present embodiment). In the case of, the gaming machine is provided with a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80 and a gaming area. An opening / closing member (movable) that can be converted into a winning area (in the case of this embodiment, the Fuden winning opening 37d) in which a gaming ball flowing down 32 can be won, a closed state in which the winning area is closed, and an open state in which the winning area is opened. Member 37b), a flow path (flow path 37f) on which the game ball can roll, a retention area (detour 37g) for retaining the game ball, and a game ball rolling (flowing) in the flow path. It is provided with a guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides the region. The flow path is formed on the front surface side of the mounting wall portion by the opening / closing member in the closed state, and when the opening / closing member is in the open state, the flow path is formed when the opening / closing member is in the closed state. The game ball is configured to win a prize in the winning area through the space, and the retention area is formed on the rear surface side of the mounting wall portion regardless of the state of the opening / closing member, and has a plurality of communication ports communicating with the flow path. , The game ball that has been guided by the guiding unit and has flowed in from the flow path through the communication port (entrance 37g1) of one of the plurality of communication ports is combined with the one communication port of the plurality of communication ports. Is configured to be able to flow out into the flow path through different communication ports (exit 37g2).

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a gaming board main body 80 in which a gaming area 32 on which a gaming ball can flow down is formed, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (the present embodiment). In the case of, the gaming machine is provided with a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80 and a gaming area. The winning area (Public winning opening 37d) where the gaming ball flowing down 32 can win, and the closed state where the gaming ball cannot win or is difficult to win by sliding back and forth, and the gaming ball in the winning area. A slide member (movable member 37b) that can be converted into an open state in which a winning ball can be won, a first flow path (flow path 37f) and a second flow path (detour path 37g) in which a game ball can roll, and a first It is provided with a guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides a game ball that rolls (flows down) in the flow path to the second flow path. The first flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall portion by the slide member when the slide member is in the closed state, and when the slide member is in the open state, the slide member is in the closed state. In some cases, the game ball is configured to win a prize in the winning area through the space in which the first flow path is formed, and the second flow path is formed by the slide member of the mounting wall portion regardless of the state of the slide member. It is a communication port formed on the rear surface side, and both ends communicate with the first flow path, and is guided by the guiding portion and flows in from the first flow path through one of the communication ports (inlet 37g1) at both ends. The game ball is configured to be able to flow out to the first flow path through the communication port (outlet 37g2) of the other end of the both ends.

That is, the ordinary variation winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a detour 37g (retention region, second flow path) is added to the flow path 37f (flow path, first flow path). By adding the detour 37g in this way, the residence time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the movable member 37b (opening / closing member, slide member) becomes longer than when the detour 37g is not present. Therefore, it becomes easy for the game ball to win a prize in the winning opening (in the case of the present embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d), and the decrease of the gaming ball in the predetermined gaming state (in the case of the present embodiment, the time saving state) is suppressed. Because it becomes possible, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the normal variable winning device 37 having the game ball retention function is arranged in the right game area (the area on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32), the player can play the game ball in the right game area. You can enjoy the rolling mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the front decorative member 371 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and the rolling mode of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is sufficiently visible, so that the game ball is in the right game area. You can enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball more.

The variable winning device provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the ordinary variable winning device 37, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special variable winning device 38 may be used. Specifically, the variable prize-winning device is, for example, one in which a detour 37 g (retention region, second flow path) is added to the flow path 38f (flow path, first flow path) of the special variable prize-winning device 38. You may. Further, the opening / closing member that can be converted into a closed state in which the winning opening is closed and an open state in which the winning opening is opened is not limited to the slide member, and can be appropriately changed. In the case of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), a slide member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by sliding back and forth is provided as the opening / closing member. For example, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), it may be a rotating member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by rotating around the rotating shaft Z.

Further, the retention area for retaining the game ball is not limited to the detour 37g (second flow path), and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the retention region is, for example, a space in which the upstream portion and the downstream portion are not separated, that is, a space in which the partition wall 373k separating the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g is removed from the detour 37g. , The space may be a space in which a portion other than the front end portion (the portion separating the inlet 37g1 and the outlet 37g2) from the detour 37g is removed from the partition wall 373k.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the game ball flowing from the first flow path (flow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through one communication port (inlet 37g1) is the other communication. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball flows from the first flow path (flow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through the mouth (outlet 37g2), and one of them communicates with the slide member (movable member 37b). It is possible to configure the mouth so as to provide a height difference (in the case of the present embodiment, a step or an inclination) so that the mouth is arranged at a position higher than the other communication port. With this configuration, the game ball can smoothly roll on the first flow path (flow path 37f) and the second flow path (detour path 37g), so that the first flow path and the second flow path can be smoothly rolled. It is possible to prevent ball clogging.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the ball power of the game ball rolling on the first flow path (flow path 37f) or the second flow path (detour 37g) on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b). (In the case of the present embodiment, the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the left ridge 37b6, and the right ridge 37b7) can be provided. With such a configuration, the residence time in which the game ball stays on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b) can be further prolonged, so that a predetermined gaming state (in the case of the present embodiment, a time saving state) can be further extended. ) It is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls in the game, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, as a ball power suppressing portion, a lower wall protrusion 37b5, an upstream front wall protrusion 371d, a rear wall protrusion 373d, and other rising parts (convex parts) are provided on the flow path 37f, and a detour 37g is provided. A rising portion (convex portion) such as a left protrusion portion 37b6, a right protrusion portion 37b7, or an intermediate protrusion portion 373k1 is provided on the surface, but the ball power suppressing portion is not limited to these and can be appropriately changed. Further, as the ball power suppressing portion, a hidden portion (recess) may be provided in the flow path 37f or the detour 37g. Specifically, for example, a groove that meanders may be formed on the upper surface of the movable member 37b as a prone portion, and the game ball may be configured to roll while meandering along the groove. Further, as the ball power suppressing portion, undulations (both the undulating portion and the undulating portion) may be provided in the flow path 37f and the detour 37g so that the game ball rolls while meandering due to the undulations. Further, the ball power suppressing portion is not limited to the rising portion (convex portion) and the prone portion (concave portion), and can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game area 32, in addition to the retention device having the game ball retention function (ordinary variable winning device 37), the members for suppressing the ball power (obstacle nail, windmill, flow path 615, guide portion 616). Etc.), that is, a retention member having a game ball retention function is arranged. Therefore, since the game ball can be retained in the right game area by the retention device and the retention member, the rolling mode of the game ball in the right game area can be further enjoyed. In addition, a method of retaining the game ball by providing unevenness on the surface, a method of retaining the game ball by using a material having a high coefficient of friction, and a method of performing a constant operation with the driving force of a drive source (solenoid, etc.) are used for the game. A predetermined member or device may be provided with a game ball retention function by a method of retaining a ball, a method of retaining a game ball by providing a distribution device, or the like.

Further, since the normal variable winning device 37 can hold the game ball in the front-rear direction of the game machine 10 by the starting portion and the detour 37g, the holding member (a holding device other than the normal variable winning device 37 may be used). ) Is preferably configured so that the game ball can be retained in a direction other than the front-back direction (horizontal direction or vertical direction of the game machine 10). As a result, the pachinko machine can be three-dimensionally stagnated by the stagnant member (and / or the stagnant device other than the normal variable winning device 37) and the normal variable winning device 37, so that the stagnant time can be increased. At the same time, the interest in the rolling of the game ball is improved.

Further, an out opening 30c, a general winning opening 35, or the like (hereinafter referred to as "out opening 30c or the like") may be provided in the middle of the detour 37g. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not the game ball that has failed to win the normal variable winning device 37 comes out of the normal variable winning device 37. It is possible to adjust the rate so that it does not become too large, and to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the detour 37g.

Further, when the out port 30c or the like is provided in the middle of the detour 37g, the game ball may flow into the out port 30c or the like when the movable member 37b operates. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 178, a through hole 37b11 is provided in a portion of the movable member 37b that forms a detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state (may be in the closed state), the positions of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c in the vertical direction coincide with each other (the through hole 37b11 is located directly above the out port 30c). When the game ball on the movable member 37b is in a state where it can flow into the out port 30c and the movable member 37b is in the closed state (may be in the open state), the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c move up and down. It is also possible to configure the game balls on the movable member 37b to be unable or difficult to flow into the out port 30c because the positions of the directions do not match (the through hole 37b11 is displaced from directly above the out port 30c). be.

FIG. 183 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. It also includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in reach and non-reach fluctuation display), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97, winning port switch 35a, and a plurality of (1 to x, 2 in this embodiment) large winning port switch arranged in the special variable winning device 38. 38a, connected to the gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, a negative logic signal such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches is input, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is input. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts to is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are the second inputs. Input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be obtained. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and is connected to the data bus 140 to output the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the special variable winning device 38 and the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37. An output port 134 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning opening 97 are not particularly limited. The switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a, the large winning opening switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and are non-contact to detect a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A type of magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 184.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A holdable FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. Is provided, and a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 185 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the present embodiment. The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, a second specific gaming state ST3, a third specific gaming state ST4, and a fourth specific gaming state ST5. In addition to this, as the special gaming state, there are a first special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the main in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first start winning opening 36 by hitting left, and aiming for a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting winning opening 97 by hitting right. You can do it. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Further, in each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly advanced, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to play the game mainly in the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so that the game progresses. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. As will be described later, in this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST1. ..

The first specific gaming state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is high, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is a normal power support, there is also a time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special map is a special figure 1 variable display game, but the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the launch direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this first specific game state ST2, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST1, and a right-handed hit is performed to aim at the normal variation winning device 37, and the special figure 1 It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.

The second specific gaming state ST3 is the same as the first specific gaming state ST2 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state. In addition, in the third specific game state ST4, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is set to the probabilistic mode, and the end condition of the normal electric support is the start of the special figure change display game in which the fall lottery is won or the big hit is started. 1 It is the same as the specific game state ST2.

In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure probability is basically a high probability state. However, if the fall lottery is won during the 4th specific gaming state ST5, the 4th specific gaming state ST5 is maintained although the probability shifts to the low probability state. In addition, there is a short time to shorten the variable time of the special figure variable display game, which does not have the general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate the winning. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the small hit RUSH. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In this 4th specific game state ST5, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST1, and the special figure is aimed at the second start winning opening 97 by hitting right. 2 It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game. Since the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game, and the small hit has a higher probability of winning than the big hit, the small hit is higher in this fourth specific game state ST5. It occurs frequently and the player's ball increases. Since small hits occur frequently in this way, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

Of these five gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because it has a general electric support, and the first specific game state ST2 and the third specific game state ST4 are normal because they are in a high probability state. This is a state more advantageous to the player than the game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. Further, since the fourth specific game state ST5 is a state in which the player's ball is increased due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific It is a state more advantageous for the player than the game state ST4.

The transition of the game state is the end of the special game state based on the derivation of the special result, the digestion of the specified number of games, the winning of the fall lottery which is the transition lottery to the low probability state, and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game which is a big hit. Is done by. Basically, if the special result that triggered the start of the special gaming state is a probabilistic jackpot that makes it a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 and the special If it is a normal jackpot that is set to a low probability state after the end of the gaming state, the process shifts to the second specific gaming state ST3.

When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (number of times of support) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the fall lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the second specific game state ST3. In this case, the period of staying in the second specific game state ST3 is the period from the end of the special game state to the execution of 100 special figure variation display games including the number of games executed in the first specific game state ST2. .. Since the effect mode of the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 is the same chance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the mode has changed.

If the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2 and the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the special result, the game shifts to the third specific game state ST4. Here, since the effect mode is the probability variation mode, the player can grasp that it is in a high probability state. If the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, if the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is started without winning the fall lottery in the third specific game state ST4, the game shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5.

The fourth specific game state ST4 stays only during the period in which the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, is executed. In the case of the special figure variable display game in which the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the period during which the special gaming state based on the small hit is executed after the small hit is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game is special figure 1. Since the variable display game is interrupted, the player will stay for a period that is the sum of the variable time and the interruption period of the special figure 1 variable display game.

By providing the fourth specific game state ST5, it is possible to provide a period for increasing the player's ball by a small hit before the special game state based on the big hit is started, and in the fourth specific game state ST5. By increasing the number of balls held in the game and the subsequent increase in the number of balls held in the special gaming state, it is possible to give a lot of benefits to the player. In particular, in the situation where the transition to the 4th specific game state ST5 is possible, the next big hit is not derived even if the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times after the special game state based on the probability change big hit is completed. It is a state, and by making it possible to give a profit to the player in such a situation, it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the big hit is not derived. On the contrary, it is possible to have an interest that is not found in conventional gaming machines, which is expected to be in a fitted state.

186 and 187 show an example of the progress of the game. FIG. 186 (a) shows a case where the fall lottery is won before the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game is executed after the probability variation jackpot occurs. In this example, first, the normal game state ST1 is in a low probability state and there is no general electric support, and the effect is a normal mode effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. The result of the special figure 1 variable display game executed in this normal game state ST1 is a probabilistic jackpot that makes the first special result, and is in the first special game state after the end of the special figure 1 variable display game (t11). .. In the first special gaming state, the special variable prize device 38 is opened and a large number of prize balls can be obtained. In addition, the effect state is the first special game effect corresponding to the first special game state.

When this first special gaming state ends, it becomes the first specific gaming state ST2 which has a high probability state and has a general electric support (t12). In the first specific game state ST2, since it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is shorter than that of the normal game state ST1, and a large number of special figure variable display games can be executed in a short time. In this first specific game state, the effect state is the chance mode effect.

In this example, the fall lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, and based on this, the state shifts to the low probability state and becomes the second specific game state ST3 (t13). Fuden support will remain as it is. Since the second specific game state ST3 also facilitates winning in the normal variable winning device 37, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is shorter than that of the normal game state ST1, and a large number of special figure variable display games can be executed in a short time. Even in this second specific game state, the effect state is a state in which the chance mode effect is maintained, and it is difficult to grasp that the fall lottery has been won.

After that, when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end (t12) of the first special game state reaches the specified number in the second specific game state ST3, the normal electric support is terminated and the normal game state ST1 is set (. t14). In this example, the probability state is already in the low probability state, so the low probability state is maintained.

FIG. 186 (b) shows a case where the fall lottery was not won even if the specified number of special figure fluctuation display games were executed after the probability variation jackpot occurred. The probability variation jackpot is derived in the normal game state ST1 to become the first special game state (t21), and after the end of the first special game state until the first specific game state ST2 is reached (t22) is the same as in FIG. 186 (a). Is.

In this example, the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the first special game state (t22) while the first specific game state ST2 remains is the specified number ( Here, it has reached 100 times) (t23). In this case, after the end of the special figure variation display game, which is the specified number, the game shifts to the third specific gaming state ST4.

Even in the third specific game state ST4, there is a high probability state and there is a general electric support, and in the second specific game state ST3, it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. do. Further, in the third specific game state, the effect state becomes the probabilistic mode effect, and it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the player is in the high probability state. After that, if the fall lottery is won in the third specific gaming state ST4, the low probability state is entered, the normal electric support is terminated, and the normal gaming state ST1 is entered (t24).

FIG. 187 (a) shows a case where the first special result is derived in the first specific gaming state ST2. In this case, even if the special figure fluctuation display game that is the first special result is started (t31), the probability state is left as the high probability state and the normal electric support is also left as it is. In addition, the production state is also the same as the chance mode production. Then, when the special figure variation display game ends, the special gaming state is started (t23). With the start of the special game state, the probability shifts to the low probability state and the Fuden support ends (t32). Further, in this example, a normal jackpot that makes a first special result is derived, and when the first special gaming state based on the first special result ends, a second specific gaming state that has a low probability state and has a normal electric support is provided. It becomes ST3 (t33).

Similarly, when the first special result is derived in the second specific game state ST3, the probability state remains the low probability state even if the special figure variation display game which is the first special result is started. Fuden support is also left as it is. Furthermore, the production state is also left as the chance mode production. Then, with the start of the special gaming state, the low probability state is maintained and the Fuden support ends. That is, even if the special figure variation display game that is the first special result is started in the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3, the game state does not change.

FIG. 187 (b) shows the case where the first special result is derived in the third specific gaming state ST4. In this case, when the special figure variation display game that is the first special result is started, the probability state remains the high probability state, but the normal electric support ends, and the fourth specific game state ST5 is reached (t41). .. When the normal power support ends, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second start winning opening 97, and in the fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, the effect state is a small hit RUSH effect corresponding to the fourth specific game state. This fourth specific game state ST5 is continued until the end of the special figure 1 variable display game.

The probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game. In the example of FIG. 187 (b), after the start (t41) of the fourth specific gaming state ST5, the second start winning opening 97 is won and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t42). This special figure 2 variable display game ends with a missed result. After that, the special figure 2 variable display game is newly started by winning a new prize in the second start winning opening 97 (t43). In this special figure 2 variable display game, the result is a small hit that makes a second special result, and the second special gaming state is set upon the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t45 to t46). In this second special gaming state, the special variable prize device 38 is opened and a prize ball can be obtained.

The special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted due to the derivation of a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (t44), and the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the second special gaming state (t46). .. Since the variable time does not progress during the interruption, the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game is the stop display time of the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game in addition to the time set at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. And will be extended by the period of the second special game state. Further, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the first special result started in the third specific game state ST4 is longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game which is the first special result in the first specific game state ST2. It is said to be long. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of the fourth specific gaming state ST5.

After the second special game state is completed, when a game ball is newly won in the second start winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (t47). After that, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed a plurality of times and the second special game state is generated, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends, the first special result is stopped and displayed (t48), and when the stop display time ends, the special figure 1 variation display game ends (t49). Along with this, the fourth specific gaming state ST5 ends and the first special gaming state starts (t49). Further, as the first special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with the missing result (t48).

In this way, by setting the fourth specific gaming state ST5 before the first special gaming state, the prize ball that can be obtained based on the small hit generated in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 and the first special gaming state. With the prize balls that can be obtained in, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), in the third specific game state ST4, the general electric support is terminated with the start of the special figure fluctuation display game which is a big hit, and is shown in FIG. 186 (b). As described above, the change in the Fuden support is the same as when the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that either the fall lottery winning or the big hit winning event, which has a significantly different value for the player, will occur due to the end of the hobby support in the third specific game state ST4. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving a feeling of anxiety and expectation to the player.

In particular, it is constant from the start of the special figure variation display game regardless of whether the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit in the third specific game state ST4 is started or the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4. By executing a common transition effect for the time, it is possible to make it difficult to immediately grasp that the player has won the fall lottery or that it is a big hit, and it is possible to arouse the anxiety and anticipation of the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 188 shows an example of the display in the display device 41. FIG. 188 (a) shows an example of the display in the normal game state ST1. In the center of the display area of the display device 41, the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit for displaying the decoration special figure variation display game related to the special figure 1 variation display game among the first decoration games forming the decoration special figure variation display game. 85a is provided. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of a combination of three identification information, and one of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss is displayed according to the result of the special figure variation display game. In the normal game state ST1, the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation, so the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the irregular variable special figure 2 variable display game is not displayed but is displayed. Is also good.

Further, in the lower center of the display area, a first storage display unit 83a for displaying the decorative special drawing start storage display corresponding to the first start storage is provided. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the order of storage. Here, there are three first start memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode. In addition, in FIG. 188 (a), a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is performed for the first start memory having the first digestion order.

On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, an execution storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start storage corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. The decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the first storage display unit 83a is transferred to the running storage display unit 84 at the start of the special figure variation display game, and the result or variation of the special figure variation display game to be executed. The pattern and the like are suggested by the display mode.

A first start storage number display unit 86a for displaying the first start storage number is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. The first start memory number display unit 86a displays the number of the first start memories numerically, and FIG. 188 (a) shows that there are three first start memories. Further, in the upper left portion of the display area, an effect mode display unit 87 for displaying the current effect mode is provided. Here, it is shown that the mode is the normal mode, that is, the normal game state ST1.

In this embodiment, since the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variation display game is not generated, the start memory display unit for displaying the second start memory is not provided, but the special figure 2 variation is provided. When the second start storage for suspending the start of the display game is to be generated, the second start memory is displayed in the same manner as the first storage display unit 83a and the first start storage number display unit 86a.

Further, the display in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 is basically the same as the display in FIG. 188 (a), although the background display and the arrangement position of each display unit are different. The same display is performed.

FIG. 188 (b) shows an example of the display in the fourth specific gaming state ST5. In the upper right part of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first start memory number display unit 86a that displays the number of first start memories, and a special figure 1 variable display among the first decorative game that makes a decorative special figure variable display game. Decorative special figure variation display game related to the game The first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a for displaying the game and the special figure 1 variable display game related to the special figure 1 variable display game among the second decorative game that makes up the decorative special figure variable display game. A second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a for displaying the above is provided.

The first start memory number display unit 86a displays the number of the first start memory numerically, and FIG. 188 (b) shows that the first start memory is 0. The first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85c displays the decorative special figure variable display game by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. The second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a displays the decorative special figure variable display game by displaying a plurality of identification information in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the information. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of one identification information, and one of "◯" indicating a big hit, "Δ" indicating a small hit, and "x" indicating a loss is displayed.

In the lower right of the display area, there is a first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b that displays the special figure 2 variable display game related to the special figure 2 variable display game among the first decorative games that make up the decorative special figure variable display game. A second decorative figure 2 game display unit 88b for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game related to the special figure 2 variable display game among the second decorative games forming the decorative special figure variable display game is provided.

The first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b displays the decoration special figure variation display game in the same manner as the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a. Further, the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b displays the decorative special figure variation display unit in the same manner as the second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a. In this embodiment, since the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated, the second start memory number display unit for displaying the number of the second start memories is not provided. , Special figure 2 When the second start memory for suspending the start of the variable display game is generated, the second start memory for displaying the number of the second start memory is displayed in the same manner as the first start memory number display unit 86a. A number display unit is provided.

Further, in the center of the display area, an effect display unit 89 for displaying an effect by a character or the like is provided. The effect display unit 89 mainly displays the effect according to the variation pattern and the result of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation, and the player can display the effect according to the effect display to show the progress of the special figure variation display game. And the result can be grasped.

In the fourth specific game state ST5, unlike the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a in FIG. 188 (a), the identification information is not displayed in a large size, but the result is obtained only when the result is derived. The mode may be displayed in a large size. For example, the identification information is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area from the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a or the first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b corresponding to the special figure variation display game from which the result is derived. Then, when the stop display time ends, the original display unit is displayed so that the identification information is reduced. Even during such display, the display of the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a and / or the first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b is maintained.

The effect mode display unit 87 indicates that the small hit RUSH mode is set, that is, the fourth specific gaming state ST5. Further, in the lower left of the display area, a prize ball number display unit 91 showing the number of prize balls acquired in the second special game state during the execution of the second special game state is provided. Here, it is shown that 30 prize balls have been won in the second special game state. Further, in the lower left of the display area, the cumulative number of prize balls obtained from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 accompanying the end of the third specific game state ST4 to the transition to the first special game state is shown. A display unit 92 is provided. Here, it is shown that 600 prize balls have been won so far.

In addition, the total number of prize balls displayed in the total prize ball display unit 92 is also set to add the number of prize balls acquired in the first special game state, and the first special game is started from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 accompanying the end of the third specific game state ST4. The number of prize balls acquired by the end of the state may be shown. Further, the number of prize balls acquired in the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the third specific gaming state ST4 is also added, and is acquired from the end of the normal gaming state ST1 to the return to the normal gaming state ST1. You may indicate the number of prize balls you have won. However, in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, although a certain number of prize balls are acquired, the possessed balls are consumed more than that, so that the first specific game state ST2 , The number of prize balls in the second specific gaming state ST3 and the third specific gaming state ST4 may not be added.

At the lower center of the display area, a continuous number display unit 96 is provided, which starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and displays the number of big hits in a specific period when the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The continuous number display unit 96 can display in a game state other than the normal game state ST1. FIG. 188 (b) shows that three big hits have occurred.

The start condition of the specific period is satisfied by deriving the big hit in the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period is satisfied by returning from the game state other than the normal game state ST1 to the normal game state ST1. Therefore, as a general rule, the continuous number display unit 96 sets the first big hit in the normal game state ST1 which is the big hit for which the start condition of the specific period is satisfied, and the number of big hits generated until returning to the normal game state ST1 again. Is displayed.

However, in a specific case, even if it is a big hit derived in the normal game state ST1, the addition result up to that point is taken over and added instead of the first time. As a specific case in the present embodiment, a big hit is derived in the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery, or the other that has been started before the end of one special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery. There is a case where the special figure fluctuation display game becomes a big hit and shifts to the specific game state again.

For example, if a fall lottery is won in the special figure change display game in the third specific game state ST4, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 at the start of the special figure change display game, but the special figure won in this fall lottery. During the execution of the variable display game, the first specific effect of suggesting or notifying that the fall lottery has been won is performed. In this first specific effect, it is clearly notified that the fall lottery has been won just before the end of the special figure change display game, so that the player has won the fall lottery until the end of the special figure change display game. I do not know clearly, and I believe that it is still in a high probability state and play the game. Further, in this case, the effect of suggesting or notifying that the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, is being executed in parallel may be performed. In addition, in the case of a big hit in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, it may not be clearly notified that the fall lottery was won as a result of the first specific effect. Therefore, if the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is reset only on the condition that the normal game state ST1 is entered, the player who thinks that the specific period continues may feel distrust.

For this reason, if a big hit is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery or the special figure fluctuation display game that started before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, Even if the result is derived in the normal game state ST1, it is treated in the same way as the big hit derived in the specific game state, and the number of times displayed on the continuous number display unit 96 is the number of big hits before shifting to the normal game state ST1. I am trying to take over and add.

Similarly, when the cumulative prize ball number display unit 92 shows the number of prize balls acquired from the end of the normal game state ST1 to the return to the normal game state ST1, the special figure change display that won the fall lottery. If a big hit is derived in a game or a special figure fluctuation display game started before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, it is treated in the same way as the big hit derived in the specific game state, and it is a normal game. The number of prize balls before the transition to the state ST1 is taken over and added.

That is, the effect control device 300 can be started by satisfying a predetermined start condition and can set a specific period to end when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and information on the game from the start to the end of the specific period. (The number of big hits and the number of prize balls won) can be accumulated and notified. Further, in a specific case, the information before the transition to the normal game state ST1 is taken over and the addition is performed.

FIGS. 188 (c) to (i) show an example of a transition effect executed when a fall lottery is won or a big hit is obtained in the third specific game state ST4. When the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 188 (c), the variable display is started in the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a, and then the transition is made as shown in FIG. 188 (d). The production starts. This transition effect is an effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight each other, and the result of the special figure variation display game and the presence / absence of a fall lottery are notified based on the result of the battle. Further, the decorative special figure variation display game and the start memory display are performed in the same display as that shown in FIG. 188 (b).

As shown in FIG. 188 (e), the effect of fighting the characters is performed, and the result of the fight is shown when a predetermined time elapses. If the result is missed or a small hit in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 188 (f). After that, the process shifts to the production of the normal gaming state ST1 as shown in FIG. 188 (a). In addition, an instruction is displayed instructing the player to return to the left-handed strike when the production shifts to the normal game state ST1. On the other hand, when the result is a big hit in the special figure variation display game, the ally character 89a wins as shown in FIG. 188 (g). After that, the process shifts to the production of the fourth specific gaming state ST5 as shown in FIG. 188 (b).

Further, when the result is missed or a small hit in the special figure fluctuation display game without winning the fall lottery, the transition effect may be performed as a so-called ghost effect. In this case, after the character fights as shown in FIG. 188 (e), the result of the draw is made as shown in FIG. 188 (h). After that, the process returns to the production of the third specific gaming state ST4 as shown in FIG. 188 (c).

The timing of transition to the fourth specific gaming state is set at the start of the special figure variation display game that is a big hit, but it is sufficient as long as the special figure variation display game that is a big hit is being executed, and even after the start time. good. Further, regardless of the execution of the special figure variation display game that is a big hit, the transition to the fourth specific gaming state may be made when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Predetermined transition conditions include winning a transition lottery, executing a predetermined number of games, and deriving a specific result in a special figure variation display game.

Further, when a plurality of second start memories, which are the execution rights of the special figure 2 variable display game, can be stored, whether or not a big hit is made before the start of the corresponding special figure 2 variable display game for the second start memory. If it is found that there is a second start memory that is a big hit, the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory that is a big hit is entered into the fourth specific gaming state. You may make the transition.

In addition, although the high-probability state is terminated by winning the fall lottery, the high-probability state may be terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state. However, the high probability state may be set until the next derivation of the first special result.

From the above, a game in which a variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The machine can be converted into a control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won. , The normal variable winning device 37 capable of generating the execution right of the variable display game by winning, and the control means sets the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 to the first operating state and the first operating state. A low-probability state and a high-probability state higher than the low-probability state are defined as a second operating state in which a prize is easily won and a probability state in which the result of the variable display game is a special result controlled by any of the operating states. It is set to either one, and when it is in the high probability state, it is configured to perform a fall lottery to shift to the low probability state every time the variable display game is executed, and when it is in the second operation state, the fall lottery is won. In that case, it is possible to shift to the first operating state, and even if the fall lottery is not won in the second operating state, when the variable display game with a special result is executed, the first It is possible to shift to one operating state. Therefore, the change in the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 can be made the same between the case where the fall lottery is won and the case where the big hit is derived, making it difficult to distinguish, and improving the interest of the game. can.

Further, the control means can set the second operation state in a predetermined period from the end of the special gaming state to the execution of the variable display game a predetermined number of times, and after the lapse of the predetermined period, the control means has a high probability state. In a certain case, the second operating state can be set, and in a predetermined period, even if the fall lottery is won in the case of the second operating state, the first operating state is not entered and the second operating state is set. Even if you execute a variable display game that has a special result without winning the fall lottery, you will not shift to the first operation state, and if the high probability state continues after the lapse of a predetermined period, you will win the fall lottery. This means that the game shifts to the first operating state based on the condition of either the case where the game is executed or the case where the variable display game having a special result is executed without winning the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the change in the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 the same between the case where the fall lottery is won and the case where the big hit is derived, making it difficult to distinguish, and improving the interest of the game. can.

In addition, the first starting winning opening 36, which is the starting winning opening, and the starting winning position located on the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37 so as to be able to win a prize via a route that can win the normal variable winning device 37. The second start winning opening 97 and the control means execute the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. , The second variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, and the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and at least the second variable display game can be executed. The result of the game has a second special result in which the probability of being derived is constant regardless of the game state, and the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first variable display game. When the second special gaming state that is advantageous to the person is executed, the first variable display game is interrupted during the execution of the second special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to execute a large number of second variable display games having a high probability of small hits based on the start of the special figure variable display game that is a big hit, and it is possible to give profits to the player. Can be improved.

Further, in the high probability state, the execution time of the variable display game is made shorter than in the low probability state, and the special result is the first special result that can change the probability derived according to the gaming state. , There is a second special result in which the probability of being derived regardless of the game state is constant, and the probability that the second special result is derived in the second variable display game is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. With a high probability, when the result of the variable display game is the first special result, the first special gaming state is executed as a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the result of the variable display game is the second special result. In that case, the second special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first variable display game, and the second special game When the state is executed, the first variable display game is interrupted while the second special gaming state is being executed, and the first variable display game is restarted when the second special gaming state ends. It will be configured. Therefore, it is possible to execute a large number of second variable display games having a high probability of small hits based on the start of the special figure variable display game that is a big hit, and it is possible to give profits to the player. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the other variable display game becomes the second special result and the second special gaming state is executed during the execution of one variable display game, the other variable display game is executed. One of the variable display games is interrupted from the time when the variable time of the second special result is stopped and displayed to the end of the second special gaming state, but the stopped display time of the other variable display game is interrupted. One of the variable display games may be interrupted from the time when the second special gaming state is started to the end of the second special gaming state. The same applies to the modified examples described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the other variable display game becomes the first special result and the first special gaming state is executed during the execution of one variable display game, the other variable display game is executed. When the fluctuation time of the first special result is stopped and displayed, one of the fluctuation display games is forcibly stopped due to the missed result, but the stop display time of the other fluctuation display game ends. When the first special gaming state is started, one of the variable display games may be forcibly stopped as a result of being missed. The same applies to the modified examples described later.

Further, the start time of interruption or forced stop may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and it is selected from the time when the special result is stopped and displayed and the time when the special gaming state is started. You can do it. Further, the interruption or the start of the forced stop is not limited to the time when the special result is stopped and displayed or the special gaming state is started, and may be started at other timings. The end of the interruption may be a timing other than the end of the special gaming state. Further, even when the result of the other variable display game becomes the first special result and the first special gaming state is executed during the execution of one variable display game, the interrupted state may be generated. Further, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether to suspend or forcibly stop when the first special result or the second special result is derived.

Since the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a game ball retention function of retaining a game ball on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, the game ball is placed on the movable member 37b while the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball can be swallowed (the game ball staying on the movable member 37b is dropped to win a prize in the general electric winning opening 37d). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the ordinary variable winning device 37, that is, the game balls that cannot win the general electric winning opening 37d even though they have arrived at the ordinary variable winning device 37.

Further, since the second start winning opening 97 is arranged below the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball that fails to win the normal variable winning device 37 can win the second starting winning opening 97. .. In the case of the present embodiment, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 reduces the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game state in which the main starting area is the normal electric winning opening 37d (No. 1). 1 In the specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4), it is possible to make it difficult for the second start winning opening 97 to win a prize.

The main starting area of the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the third specific gaming state ST4 is the general electric winning opening 37d, and the main starting area of the fourth specific gaming state ST5 is the second starting winning opening. Since it is 97, it is impossible to win a prize in the second start winning opening 97 in the case of the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the third specific gaming state ST4, that is, in the high / low probability support state. It is (difficult), and it is preferable that the second starting winning opening 97 can be won only in the case of the fourth specific gaming state ST5, that is, when there is no high probability support. When a game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97 and a small hit occurs in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, the ball output rate is calculated from the design value. There is a risk of large divergence.

The winning rate for the ordinary variable winning device 37 can be calculated using the following formula (1).
Winning rate [%] = Number of game balls that have won in the Fuden winning opening 37d / Number of game balls that have arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 (game balls that have flowed into the starting point of the flow path 37f) x 100 ... (1) )
In the present embodiment, the second starting winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right of the game area 32, and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is arranged above the second starting winning opening 97. Since the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37. Further, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to the start of the operation and the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 (the game ball rolls from the start point to the end point of the flow path 37f). By adjusting (time required for) etc., the failure to win the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure is made almost 0, that is, the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure is reached. It is also possible to make the winning rate almost 100%. By setting the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure to almost 100%, it is possible to make it difficult for the second starting winning opening 97 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37 to win a prize. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the desired performance (ball ejection rate).

On the other hand, when there is no high probability support (4th specific game state ST5), the normal variable winning device 37 does not open, so that the game ball can be won in the 2nd starting winning opening 97, and a small hit RUSH is realized. can do. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to configure the second start winning opening 97 to win a prize only when there is no high probability support (fourth specific gaming state ST5), and the desired performance can be realized. ..

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the normal map fluctuation time (that is, the normal map fluctuation time) is 200 msec, and the normal map stop time (that is, the normal map display time) is 100 ms. Yes, the time for operating the normal power (that is, the sum of the total normal power release time and the total wait time for each hit state of the normal figure) is 5800 msec, and the ending time (that is, the remaining normal power ball). When the sum of the processing time and the ending time of the normal figure is 700 msec, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is at least 1000 msec (= 700 msec + 200 msec + 100 msec). In this case, the length of the flow path 37f and the detour 37g, the number and shape of the undulations provided on the flow path 37f and the detour 37g, etc. are appropriately designed, and the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is 1000 msec. By approaching to, it becomes possible to make the winning rate of the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure almost 100%.

Of course, as in the example shown here, the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal drawing becomes almost 100% according to the time from the end of the operation to the start of the operation of the movable member 37b. , The residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be set, or conversely, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure according to the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The time from the end of the operation to the start of the operation of the movable member 37b may be set so that the winning rate of the movable member 37b becomes almost 100%.

That is, in the present embodiment, one of the residence time of the game ball in the ordinary variable winning device 37 and the time from the end of the operation to the start of the operation of the movable member 37b is the time corresponding to the other (substantially the same as the other). By setting the time, the time equal to or longer than the other, etc.), the winning rate of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 can be increased. In addition, by increasing the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 by increasing the part that suppresses the ball power such as the rising part and the prone part, it operates from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b during the interval of the normal electric power. (Until the start), more game balls can be retained on the movable member 37b, and when the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game balls accumulated on the movable member 37b are awarded a prize. Therefore, the winning rate of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ordinary variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, and a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38 are arranged below the ordinary variable winning device 37. Therefore, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the second start winning opening 97 or the special variable winning device 38 should be longer than when the normal variable winning device 37 does not have the game ball retention function. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an unrecommended striking method and increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening (opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990).

Left-handedness is recommended in the normal game state ST1, but when the game ball is hit right-handed in the normal game state ST1 and the game ball wins the second start winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. In the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set to be longer than that in the second specific game state, but by performing aiming (stop hitting, timing hitting, etc.), a big winning opening It is possible to aim for a prize. If the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state ST1. By aiming at the start of the small hit game state (start of opening the large winning opening) and starting to hit the game ball, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small hit game state. It is possible to make a prize in the winning opening. Therefore, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility that a non-recommended striking method (right striking) is performed.

On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has the game ball retention function, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state, even if the game ball is started to be hit at the same time as the start of the small hit game state (start of opening the large winning opening), the game ball is started. Cannot reach the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small hit game state. Therefore, since it is useless to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, it is not recommended in the hitting method of executing the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, that is, in the normal game state ST1. It is possible to avoid being hit. As described above, according to the present embodiment, an illegal winning by capture, that is, a small hit is generated by a right-handed hit in the normal game state ST1, and a small hit is won by aiming (to the large winning opening during the small hit period). It is possible to prevent winning).

Further, when the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, it prevents illegal winning due to capture (avoid unrecommended hitting methods). ), It was necessary to set a limit on the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, such as performing the short opening only once. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has the game ball retention function, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, even if the large winning opening is opened multiple times during the small hit game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state. can.

Here, for example, the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, and arrives at the special variable winning device 38 after the game ball is launched. It takes about 2 seconds. In such a case, if the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 189 (b), that is, the pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is performed only once, the small hit Even if you aim to hit the game ball at the start of the game state, the small hit game state is finished by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable prize device 38, so the game ball will be in the big prize opening. I can't win.

On the other hand, in such a case, the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. 189 (c), that is, "0.5 second open state → 1.0 second closed state → 0". If the pattern is "5 seconds open state-> 1.0 seconds closed state-> 0.5 seconds open state", the small hit game state can be achieved by aiming at the start of the small hit game state and starting to hit the game ball. Since the game ball can be delivered to the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the game ball, the game ball can win a prize in the large winning opening. Therefore, in such a case, if an opening pattern for opening the large winning opening a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern for the large winning opening in the small hit game state, it is not possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. On the other hand, as an opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, an opening pattern in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times is adopted, that is, the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state is increased. If it can be done, it is possible to improve the small hit performance (increase the number of balls to be ejected in the small hit game state), but it cannot be realized due to illegal winning by capture.

In order to both prevent illegal winning due to capture and improve small hit performance, a retention device that delays the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (in the present embodiment). In this case, a normal variable winning device 37) or the like will be provided. If the retention device delays by 2 seconds (a delay time of 2 seconds is given), it will take about 4 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38.

As a result, the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. 189 (c), that is, "0.5 second open state → 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state". In the case of the pattern of "→ 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state", it takes 3.5 seconds (= 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.0) until the operation of the opening / closing member 990 ends. It takes about 4 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38. That is, in the present embodiment, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state. In addition, it can be configured to determine the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 according to the opening / closing pattern (opening pattern of the large winning opening) of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state.

The time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (this) rather than the time from the start of operation to the end of operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state (3.5 seconds in this example). In the example, by lengthening (about 4 seconds), even if you aim to hit the game ball at the same time as the start of the small hit game state, the small hit game will be played by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. The state is finished. Therefore, even if an opening pattern in which the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by providing a retention device or the like that gives a delay time to the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38, while preventing illegal winning due to capture. , Small hit performance can be improved. Further, the longer the delay time is, the longer the total time of the small hit game state can be extended, so that the small hit performance can be improved. Further, the longer the delay time is, the longer it takes to arrive at the special variable winning device 38, so that it becomes difficult to illegally win a prize by capturing. Further, providing such a retention device or the like is effective not only for aiming during normal electric support but also for aiming during small hit RUSH. In addition, the longer the delay time, the more difficult it is to aim, so it is necessary to keep hitting, and stable data can be acquired even in the operation of the hall.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, a right-handed hit is made to win a prize in the second start winning opening 97 to generate a small hit, and then the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 and is normally used. When the figure is correct, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game balls are arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. It is possible to make it difficult for the special variable winning device 38 to win a prize. That is, according to the present embodiment, it takes time for the game ball to arrive at the special variable winning device 38 due to the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37, so that it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. Furthermore, the game ball retention function of the normal variable prize device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable prize device 37 (it can be difficult to make the special variable prize device 38 win), so that the illegal prize can be won by capture. The damage caused by can be minimized.

In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state, it is possible not only to improve the small hit performance (increase the number of balls to be ejected in the small hit gaming state), but also to open the large winning opening 38d. Since it is possible to increase the number of times, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball flows into the large winning opening 38d, and the interest of the game is improved. The time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 is about 2 seconds when there is no retention device and about 4 seconds when there is a retention device. The arrival time is just the average value of the measured values, and of course, there is an error in the actual arrival time.

Further, the alert (error notification) to be performed when the player is hit right in the normal game state may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have won the second start winning opening 97 is satisfied. This may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is satisfied, or the number of game balls that have won in the second start winning opening 97 and the normal number of game balls have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. This may be performed when the condition that the sum with the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in interest and a decrease in motivation to play because the player is immediately alerted even if he accidentally hits the right side. Further, in the normal game state, the counter for counting the game balls that have won in the second start winning opening 97 and the counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 are configured to be cleared at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, it may be configured to update by -1 each time the first start winning opening 36 is won.

FIG. 190 shows the probabilities of big hits and small hits, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, and the specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, are shown in the figures. The probability is as shown in 190 (a). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state becomes high after the end of the special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the probability variation jackpot, and when the fall lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed is won, the probability state becomes low. It is configured to be. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 190 (b). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate.

Further, FIG. 190 (c) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the distribution probability of each jackpot type, and FIG. 190 (d) shows the selection in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. The possible small hit types, the opening time, the number of opening times, and the distribution probability of each small hit type are shown. It should be noted that the small hit may not be provided in the special figure 1 and may be set only in the special figure 2.

FIGS. 191 and 192 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 191 (a) shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is out of order in the normal gaming state (low probability state). In the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation. In order for the player to proceed with the game according to this design, for Special Figure 2, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected regardless of which variation pattern is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 The execution of the variable display game is made inefficient in terms of time, and in the normal gaming state, the player is made to proceed mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game.

FIG. 191 (b) shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is different in the specific gaming state (first specific gaming state ST2, second specific gaming state ST3, third specific gaming state ST4, fourth specific gaming state ST5). showed that. In this case, as the variation pattern without reach in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the variation pattern having a shorter variation time than in the normal gaming state is selected. In the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the third specific gaming state ST4, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the main variation, and the variation time is shortened as compared with the normal gaming state. In addition, only the variable pan without reach can be selected for the special figure 2 variable display game. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the main variation, and the variation time is shortened as compared with the normal game state.

FIG. 192 (a) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in the normal gaming state. For the special figure 2, only the fluctuation pattern that does not generate the reach state can be selected. In the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit is longer than the variable time which can be selected when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit.

FIG. 192 (b) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. Special Figure 1 For a variable display game, a variable time variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal gaming state is selected. Further, for the special figure 2 variable display game, a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time equivalent to the SP3 reach of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

FIG. 192 (c) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in the third specific gaming state. Special Figure 1 A very long fluctuation time is set for the fluctuation display game. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient time after shifting to the fourth specific gaming state, and it is possible to secure an opportunity to acquire a prize ball by a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game. Further, the longer the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is, the more chances of small hits are generated, so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained increases, which is advantageous for the player. For this reason, it is possible to select a plurality of types of time having different lengths as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the profits that can be obtained may be different to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game has a short variable time. In the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation occurs in the third specific game state, even if the game shifts to the fourth specific game state, the small hit cannot be frequently generated, so that the big hit can be swiftly made. It is designed to be derived. Since the 4th specific game state shifts when the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit in the 3rd specific game state is started, basically, the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is newly started. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in the fourth specific game state is not specified.

FIG. 192 (d) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in the normal gaming state. As for the special figure 2, the reach state is not generated, and the long fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. FIG. 192 (e) shows changes in the case where the result is a small hit in the specific gaming state (first specific gaming state ST2, second specific gaming state ST3, third specific gaming state ST4, fourth specific gaming state ST5). The pattern is shown. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected.

FIG. 193 shows a special variable winning device in a special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening and closing pattern of is shown. When the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1. In the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, the opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). After that, the rounds in which the interval period of 2000 ms and the open period of 29000 ms are set are repeated up to 10 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms has elapsed, the special gaming state ends. Further, when the jackpot type is a 4R probability variable jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 2. This opening / closing pattern differs from the opening / closing pattern of the 10R jackpot only in the number of rounds.

The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening / closing pattern is the time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the latter half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the latter half is the ending time.

The opening / closing pattern of the small hit is a fanfare period, an opening period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and the special variable winning device 38 is according to this. Is released. In addition, in both the opening and closing patterns of big hits and small hits, if a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point. The opening time of the small hit is shorter than the opening time of the big hit, and the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the special gaming state is small. Therefore, the small hit has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the big hit. That is, as special results, a first special result (big hit) capable of generating a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the gaming value that can be given to the player is lower than that of the first special gaming state are generated. The second special result (small hit) that is possible is included.

The opening / closing pattern of the small hit has different lengths of the fanfare period and the ending period depending on whether or not it is in the fourth specific gaming state, and is set to be longer in the case of the fourth specific gaming state. In the fourth specific game state, these times are secured in order to perform effects such as notification regarding small hits and notification of the number of prize balls by winning a prize. In addition, since small hits occur frequently in the 4th specific game state, the time required to digest the special game state is lengthened by lengthening the fanfare period and the ending period so that the number of prize balls per unit time does not become too large. I have to. Further, the opening time of the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the fourth specific gaming state. Here, in the opening / closing pattern of each small hit, only one opening is performed, but it is also possible to perform a plurality of opening. In this case, the interval time for temporarily closing the special variable winning device 38 is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the specific gaming state.

Although it is said that both the fanfare period and the ending period are different depending on whether or not the fourth specific gaming state is reached, only one of them may be different. Further, regarding the opening / closing pattern of the big hit, one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period may be different depending on whether or not the fourth specific gaming state is reached.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97, and the special variable winning device 38 are either won, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and are discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning slot 35, the first starting winning slot 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning slot 97, and the special variable winning slot 38, the number of winning slots is increased according to the type of winning slot. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 183) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed) to obtain the first starting winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for a prize in the general prize opening 35 arranged on the left side of the game, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the normal variable winning device 37 are special. It is possible to aim for winning in the variable winning device 38, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 arranged above the second starting winning opening 97.

The winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. As one start storage, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) is stored as a limit. Special Figure 1 When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 while the variable display game can be started and the first starting memory number is 0, the starting right is generated. Along with this, the first start memory is stored, the number of the first start memory is added by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately started based on the first start memory. At this time, the first start memory is stored. The number is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is added by 1 and the first start memory is one. It will be remembered. Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the end of the previous special figure 1 variable display game or the end of the special game state) in the state where the first start storage number is 1 or more, the first The start memory number is subtracted by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting opening 3 switch 97a provided inside. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. In addition, even if the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97, the second start memory does not occur. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second start memory is temporarily generated for the convenience of processing, but the second start memory is Since it will be digested immediately, the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a big hit random value, a big hit symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 183). The special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times for the first start memory). Then, the stored number of the special figure start storage is displayed on the storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Decorative special figure Displayed as a start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the first start memory, and is special based on winning a prize in the second start winning opening 97. FIG. 2 A special figure 2 variation display game is played on the display 52 (second variation display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure fluctuation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball to the general electric winning opening 37d (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). 1 It serves as a first execution control means for controlling execution of a variable display game (first special figure variable display game). Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area). It serves as a second execution control means for controlling the execution of.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). It becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the first variation in which the special figure 1 display 51 can display the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Make a display means. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97.

Further, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and the probability of hitting is high). It is possible to control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed by (with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device 41. The display game is now running. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special map variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 variablely displays the decorative identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (decorative variable display game). It is a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game, but in the case of the normal gaming state which is a low probability state, the variable time is used as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left to aim at the first start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game. The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

Based on the above, the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (1st starting winning opening 36, 2nd starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), and the result of the game is a special result. In the game machine 10 that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player in the event of such a situation, a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a special variable winning device that is opened in the special game state. (Special variable winning device 38), and the game control means includes a fanfare period, which is a period from the start of the special gaming state to the start of opening of the special variable winning device, and the final special variable winning device in the special gaming state. It is possible to set the ending period, which is the period from the end of the opening of the game to the end of the special game state, and even if the special game state is based on the same special result, when the special result is derived. It is possible to make the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different according to the game state of the game. Therefore, it is possible to make the execution mode according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening 97 forming the starting winning opening, and the first starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variable winning device 37. The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) that executes the first variable display game based on the winning of the prize, and the second variable display game are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97. The second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the specific game state (fourth specific game state) in which the execution time of the second variable display game is set to be shorter than the normal state can be generated. A game state generating means (game control device 100) is provided, and the game control means derives a special result from the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period in the special game state based on the same special result. It means that the game state when the special result is derived is longer when the game state is the specific game state than when the game state is not the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the execution mode according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, in the specific game state, the time for executing the effect can be secured, and in the case of not the specific game state, the game can be advanced quickly.

Further, the special results include a first special result in which the probability of being derived can be changed according to the gaming state, and a second special result in which the probability of being derived regardless of the gaming state is constant. The probability that the second special result is derived is set to be higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. Therefore, it is possible to make the execution mode according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, by making the lengths of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different for the second special result that does not change the probability, the derivation probability does not change, but the execution mode can be changed.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 194 and 195 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 196 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 194, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving the value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that is a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the state of the first input port 122 is read before the start of the standby time to ensure that the initialization switch 112 is operated. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 may be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 may be operated from the power-on to the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Do (step X9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step X12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step X13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step X14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

When the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17), and it is normal. If (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step X20). When the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 of FIG. 195, and processing is performed when the checksum is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X25 in FIG. 195 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step X21 of FIG. 195, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The area to be initialized here is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is considered to be indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (step X22). The interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game means that the second special result (small hit) is derived while both special figure variable display games are being executed as described later. This interrupts the other special figure variation display game, and interrupts the special figure variation display game in the restart control that resumes after the end of the special gaming state. If it is interrupted, the special figure 1 game interruption flag or the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set according to the interrupted special figure fluctuation display game, and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped for these flags. It is designed to retain memory even while it is being played.

If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (step X22; N), the process proceeds to step X24. When the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (step X22; Y), a suspended command corresponding to the suspended special figure is set (step X23).

After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24), and the step. Proceed to X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X24, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command, and a suspended command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being executed, the customer is waiting. Send the command of the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X25, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X25), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X26), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X27). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X28). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X29), and the process proceeds to step X30. In the case of this embodiment, in step X29, a model specification command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and light and sound are displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). Send multiple commands such as (command to notify RAM initialization). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a production count information command and a support count information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with normal power support, are also transmitted.

In step X30, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step X30, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X31). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the winning symbol of the special figure). After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X32), interrupting is permitted (step X33). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X34) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step X34, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X35), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X36; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X34). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X34) (step X33), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X34, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, which causes the main process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X35 (step X37). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X37; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step X37; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X38) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step X39) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X40), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X41). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X42) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X43) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X44). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 196 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step X104) for controlling the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105), a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and setting the prize ball, A winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X108) is performed to monitor errors such as opening the front frame and the glass frame and illegally winning the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning device 38.

Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97. Then, the special figure 1 game process (step X110) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that checks the detection signal from and determines whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 197, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step X494). Then, in the case of the normal gaming state (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. When not in the normal gaming state (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure start port 1 switch process is performed (step X498).

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform a right-handed strike by display, voice, or the like. Right-handed is more advantageous for the player when in a specific game state or special game state, and the first start winning opening 36, which is designed so that a prize is not won unless it is left-handed, is in a specific game state or special. When a prize is detected during the game state, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Next, the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) prepares a winning monitoring table (step X499), performs a hard random number acquisition process (step X500), and acquires a big hit random number based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning that is set in the case of (step X501).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97 (step X501; N), the process proceeds to step X509. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97 (step X501; Y), is the Fuden (ordinary variable winning device 37) operating, that is, It is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state where it is possible to win a prize (step X502), and when the normal electric power is operating (step X502; Y), step X504 Move to. On the other hand, when the normal electric power is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the normal electric power is being generated (step X503).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If a normal electric phone fraud is occurring (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X509. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more. Further, when the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step X503; N), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step X504). Then, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step X504; N), the process proceeds to step X507. Further, in the normal gaming state (step X504; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X507), the special figure start port 2 switch process is performed (step X508), and the process proceeds to step X509.

Based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform left-handed by display, voice, or the like. Left-handed is more advantageous for the player when in the normal game state, and left when a prize is detected in the normal game state by the normal variable winning device 37 which is designed so that the player does not win unless it is right-handed. I am trying to give a hit instruction notification.

Next, the starting port 3 (second starting winning opening 97) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X509), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X510). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X511).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step X512). Then, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step X512; N), the process proceeds to step X515. Further, in the normal gaming state (step X512; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X513), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X514). After that, a table for setting the hold information by the start port 3 is prepared (step X515), the special figure start port 3 switch process is performed (step X516), and the start port switch monitoring process is completed.

Based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform left-handed by display, voice, or the like. Left-handed is more advantageous for the player when in the normal game state, and when the prize is detected in the normal game state at the second starting winning opening 97, which is designed so that the player does not win unless it is right-handed. I am trying to give a left-handed instruction notification.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 198 shows a special figure start port 1 switch process (step X498) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the number of times the start port signal 1 is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times the prize is won to the first start winning port 36 is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (Step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X523). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 1 output count area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number). Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because it loops due to +1 update and becomes 0.

When the number of special figure 1 hold is less than the upper limit value (4 in this case) (step X525; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process described later is set (step X525; Y). Step X526), the number of reserved special figures 1 is updated by +1 (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is used as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the storage area (step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, the special figure hold information determination process (step X534), which is the look-ahead process, is performed, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step X535), and the effect command setting process is performed (step X535). Step X536), the special figure start port 1 switch processing is completed.

In the special start port 2 switch process (step X508) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process, in steps X521 to X524 regarding the start port signal, information regarding the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 is won is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. The process is the same as that shown in FIG. 198, except that the start port signal 2 to be output to the external management device is processed. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and the predetermined random number is used as the first starting memory. It is a first starting storage means that can store up to the maximum number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
FIG. 199 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X534) in the above-mentioned special figure start port 1 switch process. The same process is performed in the special figure start port 2 switch process, which is not shown. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step X543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). Prepare a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551).

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop symbol information of the small hit is set (step X549), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step X550), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

After preparing the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), the effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, the special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing is performed (step X554).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step X556), and end the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are the processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal processing. Is similar to.

By the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory are included. A look-ahead variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is changed to the special figure 1 change based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game is started. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. Make the first possible decision-making measure. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment, etc.) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

Note that this special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Further, in the case of the fourth specific gaming state, the look-ahead processing may not be performed. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is the main body during the fourth specific game state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly derived by deriving a special result in this special figure 2 variable display game. This is because it is almost always stopped as a result of the loss. In other words, it is not so meaningful to notify the look-ahead result because most of them are out of order, and it is forcibly changed to the off-reading result after notifying the look-ahead result which is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because the contradiction may occur.

However, since the special figure 2 variable display game does not generate the start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure is as long as the first start memory is available during the first period of the fourth specific gaming state. There is a high possibility that only one variable display game will be played, and in such a case, a look-ahead effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memory that performs such look-ahead effect, the one that occurred before the start of the fourth specific gaming state is pre-reading, so the result is used and it occurs after the start of the fourth specific gaming state. For those that have been pre-read, the pre-reading process is performed for those that are the target of such pre-reading effect. Of course, the look-ahead process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead process in another process.

[Special figure start port 3 switch processing]
FIG. 200 shows the special figure start port 3 switch process (step X516) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 3 switch process, first, the start port signal 3 output number of times, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times of winning to the second start winning opening 97 is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X563). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 3 output count area of the RWM (step X564), and the start port 3 (second start winning port 97) wins. Determine if it is invalid.

The start opening 3 winning invalidity means that the special figure 1 variable display game that has a special result (big hit or small hit) is stopped (during processing during special figure display described later), during the first or second special gaming state, and Special Figure 2 The variable display game is being executed. When the start port 3 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special figure start port 3 switch process is terminated. If the starting port 3 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the special figure 2 hold number is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure start port 3 switch processing is completed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a start winning prize storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the second start winning opening 97. Since there are few types of fluctuation patterns in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is not used.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 201 shows the special figure 1 game processing (step X110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. Special Figure 1 Variable display Controls the entire process related to the game and sets the display of Special Figure 1. In this special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption interruption flag, which is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, is set (step Y100). If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 Performs processing related to the variable display game. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game of steps Y101 to Y118. Is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Y119. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In step Y101, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being the big hit or the small hit. (Step Y101). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y102). Step Y103). Further, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening switch 38 is monitored and transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening. Performs processing to set the winning opening count command and processing to close the winning opening when a specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). Special figure 1 When the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in the above is set in the register (step Y105). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game are monitored. FIG. 1 Special figure 1 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 1 Performs normal processing (step Y108). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, and the like. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y109).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. The special figure 1 display processing (step Y110) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y112) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special drawing 1 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs is set, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare process (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y116) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. conduct.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed to perform the special figure 1 fluctuation control process. FIG. 1 Ends game processing. This special figure 1 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 202 shows the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. This special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 interruption interruption flag, which is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, is set (step Y130). If this special figure 2 interruption flag is not set (step Y130; N), that is, if the special figure 2 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y131, and the subsequent special figure 2 Performs processing related to the variable display game. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 interruption flag is set (step Y130; Y), that is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 2 variation display game of steps Y131 to Y151. Is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Y152. As a result, while the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In step Y131, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit or the small hit. (Step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y132). Step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening switch 38 is monitored and transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening. Performs processing to set the winning opening count command and processing to close the winning opening when a specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). Special figure 2 When the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, is the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer 0? Is determined (step Y135).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is extended to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The variable timer value (here, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at one time even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for the specified time (here, 60,000 ms).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y138).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are monitored. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Ordinary processing (step Y139) is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y140).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. The special figure 2 display processing (step Y141) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y142). In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y143) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special drawing 2 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs is set, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare process (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. conduct.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed to perform the special figure 2 fluctuation control process. FIG. 2 The game process is terminated. This special figure 2 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing. The corresponding processing will be explained in parallel in.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 203 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 2 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 is not variable startable (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y204). After that, the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the second specific gaming state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal gaming state.

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y210), and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). , Performs the effect command setting process (step Y212). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates that there is a second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the fourth specific gaming state (step Y213). Then, in the case of the fourth specific gaming state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the player is not in the fourth specific gaming state (step Y213; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a state other than the fourth specific gaming state, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed during the period when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation. It is possible to confirm the execution of the game. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 204 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y139) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 is not variable startable (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is based on the prize when the second start winning opening 97 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. Special figure 2 This is temporarily generated to perform the start processing of the variable display game, and is not intended to suspend the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

Then, when the number of reserved figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 changing is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y227). Then, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step Y227; N), the process proceeds to step Y230. Further, in the case of the normal gaming state (step Y227; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started during the period when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes irregular fluctuation. As a result, it can be confirmed that the player intentionally executes the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which irregular fluctuations occur. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233), and when it has not been disclosed (step Y233; N), it is in the customer waiting state. Performs the processing related to the setting. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y231; N), when special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233; Y). , Step Y237.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y234), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235), and the effect is produced. The command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the information on the gaming state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). This makes it possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 205 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process. This special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. First, a fall lottery process for drawing a transition from a high probability state to a normal probability state is performed (step Y239), and a support management process for managing a period for setting a normal probability state is performed (step Y240). Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is lost. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting information, jackpot information, or small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. 1 Perform the information setting process (step Y244), and prepare the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y245).

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after this, a process for adjusting so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly removed regardless of the lottery result. As a result, it ends. In particular, since there is a high probability that the special figure 2 variable display game will be a small hit, if the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, there is a high possibility that such processing will be performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. .. Therefore, for example, even though the effect is highly expected in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result, and the player feels distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game that is about to start, measures such as preventing the production with high expectations from being selected are taken. I am trying to do it.

For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not the player is in the fourth specific game state (step Y248), and if the player is in the fourth specific game state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of the fourth specific game state, the game is progressed mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and the game is executed frequently, it is known that there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly stopped due to a missed result. , Special Figure 1 In the variable display game, since it is set in advance so that the effect with high expectation is not selected, no special processing is performed here.

Further, when the player is not in the fourth specific gaming state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249). When the special figure 2 is not changing (step Y249; N), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started from now on, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is a very long variable time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, no processing is performed here to prevent a highly expected effect from being selected.

When the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249; Y), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed is out of order (step Y250), and when it is out of order (step Y250; Y). ) Goes to step Y257. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped. Further, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is not out of alignment (step Y250; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier. Therefore, in order to prevent the production with high expectation from being selected. No processing is performed.

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 variable display to be executed from now on is calculated. It is determined whether the fluctuation time of the game is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends first, no processing is performed to prevent the production having a high expectation from being selected.

Further, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the variable time of the special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256), a fourth specific game state setting process for setting a fourth specific game state is performed (step Y257), and special figure 1 fluctuation start. End the process. This command also includes information on whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. Based on receiving a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer, the effect control device 300 regulates the selection of the effect with high expectation for the special figure 1 variation display game or performs a specific execution. Processing such as setting the mode is performed.

When the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of resetting the information regarding the variation pattern (first and second half variation pattern numbers, etc.) may be performed so that the effect control device 300 changes to the variation pattern that does not select the effect with high expectation. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process of preparing the command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Y255) may or may not be performed.

That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern processing (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100 determines the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal game state, the second variation display game. It is a first variation mode determining means capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Further, the process of resetting the above-mentioned variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means. Refers to the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation mode information of the second fluctuation display game, and provides information on the fluctuation pattern without changing the fluctuation time of the determined first fluctuation display game. It serves as a second variation mode determining means that can be redetermined.

Further, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed from now on when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The variation pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning by performing the process (step Y254) of determining whether the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the variation display game. You may do so.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 206 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process. This special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. First, a fall lottery process for drawing a transition from a high probability state to a normal probability state is performed (step Y259), and a support management process for managing a period for setting a normal probability state is performed (step Y260). Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting information, jackpot information, or small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. 2 Performs information setting processing (step Y264), and prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y265).

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y267) is performed, the fourth specific game state setting process for setting the fourth specific game state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the process for adjusting so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which can be executed at the same time is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, so that the special figure 2 variable display game is less likely to be forcibly terminated with a missed result. However, as in the case of the special figure 1 variable display game, if the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, the selection of a highly expected effect may be restricted.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 207 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y239, Y259) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y581), and if the probability is not high (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process is terminated. Further, in the case of high probability (step Y581; Y), a fall lottery random number is acquired (step Y582), and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery is won by referring to the determination value (step Y583).

If the fall lottery has not been won (step Y583; N), the fall lottery process ends. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. Further, when the fall lottery is won (step Y583; Y), a process for shifting to the low probability state is performed. First, the signal relating to the high probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal is set to OFF. Then, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). As a result, the probability of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is set to a low probability.

Next, the process of terminating the Fuden support is performed. In addition, when the fall lottery is won, the Fuden support is terminated when the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state. First, it is determined whether or not the Fuden support is in progress (step Y588), and if the Fuden support is not in progress (step Y588; N), the fall lottery process ends. Further, when the normal power support is in progress (step Y588; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be the normal power support is 0 (step Y589).

When the number of support times is not 0 (step Y589; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game has not been executed since the end of the special game state (in the case of the first specific game state). , The second specific game state is entered and the normal electric support is continued, so the fall lottery process is terminated. Further, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y589; Y), that is, a specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure variation display games are executed from the end of the special gaming state, but the third is not won in the fall lottery. When the game is in the specific game state, the process of terminating the general electric support after step Y590 is performed in order to shift to the normal game state.

In the process of terminating the normal power support, first, the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y590). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y591). Here, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Then, the special figure low probability and no time reduction number are saved in the game state display number area (step Y592), and the special figure low probability and no support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y593). After that, the low probability of the normal figure is set (step Y594), and the fall lottery process is completed. As a result, it becomes a low-probability state and a state without normal electric support, and shifts to a normal game state. Information on the end of the high-probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on this information.

[Support management process]
FIG. 208 shows the support management process (steps Y240, Y260) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this support management process, first, it is determined whether or not the support is being supported (step Y1521), and if the support is not being supported (step Y1521; N), the support management process is terminated. In addition, when the normal power support is in progress (step Y1521; Y), if the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be the normal power support is not 0, the support is updated by -1 (step Y1522). It is determined whether the number of times is 0 (step Y1523).

When the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1523; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure variation display games has not been executed since the end of the special game state (first specific game state or second specific). If the game state continues), the support management process is terminated. Further, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1523; Y), that is, when the special figure variation display game exceeding the specified number (here, 100 times) is started from the end of the special gaming state, or when the special gaming state has already been started. If the special figure variation display game exceeding the specified number is executed from the end but the fall lottery is not won and the third specific game state is reached, it is determined whether the game is in the high probability state (step Y1524).

In the case of a high probability state (step Y1524; Y), the support management process is terminated because the transition to the third specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state continues. Further, when the probability is not high (step Y1524; N), a process of terminating the normal electric support after step Y1525 is performed in order to end the second specific gaming state and shift to the normal gaming state.

In the process of terminating the normal power support, first, the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1525). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1526). Here, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Then, the special figure low probability and no time reduction number are saved in the game state display number area (step Y1527), and the special figure low probability and no support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1528). After that, the low probability of the normal figure is set (step Y1529), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1530), and the left-handed instruction notification is given at the start of the next special figure variation display game, and the support management process is performed. To finish. As a result, the second specific gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 209 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, the big hit random number is loaded and prepared (step Y273) from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the holding number 1) of the RWM, and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the holding number 1) is cleared to 0. It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y275), and if it is a jackpot (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y279) for determining the above is performed.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271. (Step Y281), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 210 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, the big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to 0.

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) for determining the above is performed.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. (Step Y301), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the large hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 211 shows the jackpot determination process (steps Y276, Y296) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process and jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, in the case of a high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). Further, in the case of not in the high probability state (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ..

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 212 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279, Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the judgment is for the special figure 1 variation display game. (Step Y322).

Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, when the judgment is about the special figure 2 variation display game, the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). , It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 213 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 1 Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y338). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and when it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 1. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and prepare the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and the effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), and the special figure The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 214 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the big hit symbol random number from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 2 Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y368). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and when it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and the decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y374), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 2. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and prepare the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and the effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. Clear the area to 0 (step Y381), and end the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 displays the result of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the variation mode information in the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. It is the first decision-making means that can be decided before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the result of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the predetermined random number. And, it serves as a second determination means capable of determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning opening 97 fires on the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and is in a normal state (normal game state). The variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the second variable display game by the second determining means is larger than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the first variable display game by the first determining means. It will be a long time.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the start storage number (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 forms the first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variable time in accordance with the start of the variable display game for each of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, and the measured time has elapsed. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, is off or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, the variation is set. The information about the time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, but a command indicating only the long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, the stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the variation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the burden of control on the effect control device 300.

[4th specific game state setting process]
FIG. 215 shows the fourth specific game state setting process (steps Y257, Y268) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fourth specific game state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric power support is in progress (step Y1501), and if the general electric power support is not in progress (step Y1501; N), the fourth specific game state setting process is terminated. do. Further, when the normal power support is in progress (step Y1501; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be the normal power support is 0 (step Y1502).

When the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1502; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure variation display games has not been executed since the end of the special gaming state (first specific gaming state or second specific). In the case of a game state), the fourth specific game state setting process is terminated. Further, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1502; Y), that is, a specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure variation display games are executed from the end of the special gaming state, but the third is not won in the fall lottery. When the game is in the specific game state, it is determined whether the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is a big hit (step Y1503).

If the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is not a big hit (step Y1503; N), the third specific game state continues, so the fourth specific game state setting process is terminated. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is a big hit (step Y1503; Y), a process of terminating the general electric support after step Y1504 is performed in order to shift to the fourth specific gaming state.

In the process of terminating the normal power support, first, the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1504). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1505). Here, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Then, the special figure high probability and no time reduction number are saved in the game state display number area (step Y1506), and the special figure high probability and no support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1507). After that, the low probability of the normal figure is set (step Y1508), the fourth specific game state flag is saved (step Y1509), and the fourth specific game state setting process is completed. As a result, the state becomes a high probability state and there is no normal electric support, and the state shifts to the fourth specific game state setting.

The 4th specific gaming state flag is a flag set to make it recognizable that it is the 4th specific gaming state, and is cleared when the special gaming state starts. Since this 4th specific game state flag is not cleared even if the fall lottery is won during the 4th specific game state, the game state becomes a low probability state and there is no general electric support due to the fall during the 4th specific game state. Also makes it possible to recognize that it is in the fourth specific gaming state.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during change Transition setting processing]
FIG. 216 shows the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In this special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step Y605). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Further, the initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

The initial value set in the symbol number area during special figure 1 change is 0, so that the change display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Transition processing during fluctuations Transition setting processing]
FIG. 217 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 normal process. In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step Y615). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, the initial value is set in the symbol number area during change in Special Figure 2 (step Y617), and the process shift setting process during change in Special Figure 2 is terminated.

Special figure 2 The initial value set in the symbol number area during fluctuation is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is said that all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variable display is started from at least the state in which the segment is lit. You may try to do it. Further, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always lit each time. Further, the lighting mode when the fluctuation is started in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same or different.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 218 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting process is performed. Do (step Y623).

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms in the case of a miss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. Further, if the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y643. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step Y629). ). If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y629; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (step Y640), and the special figure 2 interruption command is set. (Step Y641), the effect command setting process (step Y642) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y643.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a small hit. It should be noted that even if the variable display game of Special Figure 2 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1 big hit (step Y629; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is in progress (step Y630). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game has a special result, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. It should be noted that even if the variable display game in Special Figure 2 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of Special Figure 2 is in progress (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y632. Further, when the special figure 2 display is not being processed (step Y630; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y631), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. The display time of +4 ms is set (step Y632). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started.

Next, save the display time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y633), set and prepare the decorative special figure 2 off symbol command (step Y634), and send the symbol command to the decorative special figure 2 command area. Save (step Y635) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y636). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y643), and is the special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y644). In the case of a special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. If it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y645). ), Information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y646).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y647), the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y648), and the special figure 1 is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 219 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is performed. Do (step Y653).

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms in the case of a miss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Further, if the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; Y), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit or the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the special figure 1 interruption command is set. (Step Y671), the effect command setting process (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit. It should be noted that even if the variable display game of Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display processing is in progress (step Y660). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. It should be noted that even if the variable display game of Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of Special Figure 1 is in progress (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Further, when the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the process proceeds to step Y663.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), the decorative special figure 1 off symbol command is set and prepared (step Y664), and the symbol command is sent to the decorative special figure 1 command area. Save (step Y665) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y666). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and is the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y674). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675). ), Special figure 2 Loads information from the large winning opening opening information area and saves it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y676).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y678), and the special figure 2 is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 220 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y648) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), Special figure 1 Ends the process transition setting process 1 during the change.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 221 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), Special figure 2 Processing during change The transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 Displaying process Transition setting process 2]
FIG. 222 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1 (step Y704).

Up to this point, it is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information is set to obtain an outlier result. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y710), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 223 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2 (step Y724).

Up to this point, it is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information is set to obtain an outlier result. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y730), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

By the above processing of FIGS. 218 to 223, when one of the special figure fluctuation display games becomes the first special result (big hit), the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss. Become. That is, the first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the disengagement result based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. Based on this, the second end control process is performed in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the deviation.

From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has the first special result, the first variation in which the execution control is performed. It is possible to end the display game as a result other than a special result, and the second variable display game execution control means is the first variable display game execution control means when the execution control of the second variable display game is performed. When the first variable display game for which execution control is performed becomes the first special result, the second variable display game for which the execution control is performed can be terminated as a result other than the special result. It will be. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variable display game, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped at the off result, so that no problem occurs even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed. Can be.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
224 and 225 show the process during display of the special figure 1 (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear one area (step Y752).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 area in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y753), and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, the special figure 1 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. Further, in the case of a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality change release command is prepared (step Y757), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit information (10 or 4 in the case of the present embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special diagram 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y763). After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y765).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). Then, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y770), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y771). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y755, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is the small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y783), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y787).

When not in the normal gaming state (step Y787; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed.

On the other hand, in the normal gaming state (step Y787; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.

After that, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y793), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting is made. The process (step Y797) is performed, and the process during display of the special figure 1 is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806). FIG. 1 Normally, the process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the process during display of the special figure 1 is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
226 and 227 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y141) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. It should be noted that this special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear two areas (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 area in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815), and if it is not a big hit (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. Further, in the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality change release command is prepared (step Y817), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit information (10 or 4 in the case of this embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y823). After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). Then, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y830), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y831). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y834), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is the small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y843), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y847).

When not in the normal gaming state (step Y847; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed.

On the other hand, in the normal gaming state (step Y847; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.

After that, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y853), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting is made. The process (step Y857) is performed, and the process during display of the special figure 2 is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866). FIG. 2 Normally, the process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the process during display of the special figure 2 is terminated.

That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the conditional device. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without the operation of the conditional device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 228 describes the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776, Y836) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display processing and special drawing 2 display processing. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, the signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special gaming state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by the big hit or the small hit is set to ON. Next, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is used. The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are set.

Next, the jackpot information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the game state display number 2 area is in the right-handed state. Save the number (step Y881).

After that, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process is terminated. That is, with the occurrence of a big hit, all the information related to the abnormal change in Special Figure 2 is cleared.

[Special figure 1 Small hit fanfare medium processing Transition setting processing]
FIG. 229 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y797) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893). Here, referring to the current gaming state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of the specific gaming state, and 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of not in the specific gaming state. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by the big hit or the small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process is completed. do.

[Special Figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 230 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903). Here, referring to the current gaming state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of the specific gaming state, and 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of not in the specific gaming state. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by the big hit or the small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process is completed. do.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
FIG. 231 shows the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and the production command setting process is performed. (Step Y953).

Next, the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). Then, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y958), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The opening time of the big winning opening is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, when it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

Then, the signal relating to the opening start of the large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y963). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y964), and the large winning opening is counted. The number of mouth counts is cleared (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 232 shows the processing during opening of the large winning opening (steps Y112 and Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this large winning opening opening process, first, the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. Further, in the case of the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is prepared. I do.

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011).

In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, when it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015). After that, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the large winning opening]
FIG. 233 shows the large winning opening residual ball processing (steps Y113, Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current number of rounds in the running special game state and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041).

Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the interval time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and the fanfare / interval processing 3 is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time, and further from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, so that the interval period is 2000 ms. Will be executed.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), the jackpot end processing transition setting process is performed (step Y1045), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step). Y1046), 6 related to the special figure 1 big hit end process or the special figure 2 big hit end process is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048). In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step). Y1050), the processing of the remaining balls in the big winning opening is completed. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is the period from the end of the final round to the lapse of the remaining ball processing time and the lapse of the remaining ball processing time to the lapse of the ending time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms, and in this ending period, the ending effect is produced by the display device 41 or the like. Will be executed.

[Big hit end processing Transition setting processing]
FIG. 234 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to OFF.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Clear the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special gaming state (step Y1074).

Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the opening information determination flag for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the jackpot is cleared (step Y1077), and the jackpot end processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 235 shows the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 big hit end process, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1104). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1105), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1106), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1106). Y1108). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1109).

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1109, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2 Variable display A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the game from being executed.

Next, it is determined whether the special result is a probabilistic jackpot (step Y1110), and if it is a probabilistic jackpot (step Y1110; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1111). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1112). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, the number with high probability and time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1114), and the special figure high probability and support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1116). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1117), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here, here) is the support number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not a probability variation jackpot (step Y1110; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1119). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1120). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, a number with a low probability and a time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1122), and a flag with a special figure low probability and a support is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1124). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1125), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here, here) is the support number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is ended.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 236 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. This special figure 2 big hit end process is the same process except that step Y1109 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process is not performed. First, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y1131), and the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1132).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1133). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1134). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1135), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1136), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1136). Y1138). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether the special result is a probabilistic jackpot (step Y1110), and if it is a probabilistic jackpot (step Y1139; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1140). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1141). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, the number with high probability and time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1143), and the special figure high probability and support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1145). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1146), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and the initial value (here, here) is the support number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 big hit end process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not a probability variation jackpot (step Y1139; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1148). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1149). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, a number with a low probability and a time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1151), and a flag with a special figure low probability and a support is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1154), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and the initial value (here, here) is the support number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 big hit end process is ended.

By these special figure 1 big hit processing and special figure 2 big hit processing, the first specific gaming state with high probability state and general electric support is set after the end of the special gaming state based on the probability variation big hit. In addition, after the end of the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot, a second specific gaming state with a low probability state and a normal electric support will be set. That is, the probability setting that the game control device 100 can set the probability that the result of the game becomes the first special result among the special results in the high probability state after the end of the special game state is higher than the low probability state. Make a means. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process (steps Y115, Y146) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 237, in this small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1202). Next, the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1203). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory is set to ON. Then, the large winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1204), and the large winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1205).

After that, 8 related to the small hit middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y1206), and it is determined whether the small hit type is the small hit 1 (step Y1207). When the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1207; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1208), and the small hit opening time 1 (here, 48 ms) is set as special figure 1. Save in the game processing timer area (step Y1209), and end the processing during the small hit fanfare.

If the small hit type is not 1 small hit (step Y1207; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1210), and the opening time corresponding to the small hit type is set to the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the processing timer area (step Y1211), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is terminated. As the opening time corresponding to the small hit type, 1000 ms is set for the small hit 2, 1200 ms for the small hit 3, and 1600 ms for the small hit 4.

[Small hit processing]
FIG. 238 shows the small hit medium processing (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit middle process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1243), and 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244).

After that, it is determined whether the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1245). When the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1245; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1246), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is specified. FIG. 1 Saves in the game processing timer area (step Y1209), and ends the small hit middle processing.

When the small hit type is not 1 small hit (step Y1245; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1248), and the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type is set. Special figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (step Y1249), and end the small hit middle processing. As the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type, 600 ms is set in the case of the small hit 2, and 800 ms is set in the case of the small hit 3 or 4.

[Small hit residual ball treatment]
FIG. 239 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117, Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is a small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y1271). In the case of a small hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), 10 related to the special figure 1 small hit end process is set as the processing number (step Y1272), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

If it is not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 related to the special figure 2 small hit process is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Regardless of whether the small hit is in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, in the setting of the small hit ending time (steps Y1274, Y1277), the current gaming state is referred to, and in the case of the specific gaming state, the small hit ending 1200 ms or 1400 ms is set as the time, and 100 ms is set as the small hit ending time when it is not in the specific gaming state. As a result, the length of the ending period including the remaining ball processing time and the ending time is 2000 ms in the specific gaming state, and 700 ms or 900 ms in the non-specific gaming state.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to OFF. Further, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 240 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1306). ). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the normal gaming state (step Y1307), and if the player is not in the normal gaming state (step Y1307; N), the process proceeds to step Y1310. Further, in the normal gaming state (step Y1307; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1310).

When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1310; N), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms is used as the special figure 2 game wait time value. The value corresponding to (here, 2) is saved (step Y1314), and the special figure 1 small hit end process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1310; Y), the decorative special figure 2 restart command is prepared (step Y1311), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1312). After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), the value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms is saved as the special figure 2 game wait time value (step Y1314), and the special figure 1 The small hit end process is terminated.

As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, by saving the value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value, the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. FIG. 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 241 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the normal game state (step Y1337), and if the player is not in the normal game state (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. Further, in the normal gaming state (step Y1337; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

When the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y), the decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1342). After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device 100 is one of the variable display game execution control means of either the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the variable display game of the other is performed, and the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one of the variable display games is played. It serves as a restart control means capable of executing restart control for resuming one of the variable display games that was interrupted after the special gaming state based on the other variable display game was interrupted.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 242 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 242, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44, a board effect setting process (step C20) for controlling the effect, and a process for clearing the WDT (step C8). ).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 243 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to the process of step C204. When it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 244 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that the MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the start memory (holding) in which the special figure change display game has not been executed becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be used. It is a production such as performing a production display. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 245 shows a variable command process (step C236) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special symbol type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are changed. It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process is terminated. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol, a 4R jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent is when the variation command (variation pattern command) that is out of alignment is received, but the symbol command of the 10R jackpot symbol is received. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special map changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, "during special map change" means that the special figure is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
FIG. 246 shows the variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned variation system command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381). When the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the production mode at that time is set (step C382). The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and is naturally different depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, and the like. Further, each mode is provided with a plurality of modes in which the distribution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the reserved number of MODE and special figure type is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of non-reach variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the advance notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the notice lottery that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (step C381; N), the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special symbol type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half is changing using the first half notice distribution group table. The notice lottery that appears in is performed (step C386).

Next, a lottery will be drawn for the advance notice of changes in the second half. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of multiple columns of the special figure is a big hit). Is stopped and variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second half is changing (during reach) using the second half notice distribution group table. A lottery for the notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the effect corresponding to the notice lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the production and notice of the variable time of the decorative special figure variation display game and the main reach contents will be determined. Further, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol is performed with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.), notice content, and game state of the special map variation display game (step C392).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is set (step C393), and the display setting of the advance notice effect is set (step C394). By these processes, it becomes possible to execute the effect and the advance notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decorative start memory display in response to the corresponding decrease in the start memory when the special figure variation display game is started.

Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is performed. Set the display (step C397). Further, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , Ends the variable effect setting process.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 247 shows the one-shot command processing in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing. In this one-shot command process, first, it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the model designation command including the information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), the model setting process for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and the single-shot command process is performed. To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step C261 that the MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Determination (step C263). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, RAM initialization scenario data is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

Further, when it is determined in step C263 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is given a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has been recovered from the power failure without being initialized. It is determined whether they correspond to each other (step C265). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery process is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect at the time of power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that the MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo process is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the customer waiting demo process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demo, and the customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform the customer waiting effect.

Further, when it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is on hold in FIG. 1 (step C269). Then, when the MODE is in the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C270), the one-shot command processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271). Then, when the MODE is on hold in the special figure 2 (step C271; Y), the special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing the process corresponding to the generated hold is performed (step C272), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. do. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for displaying a start memory notification display that displays information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decorative start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

Further, in step C271, when MODE is not reserved in FIG. 2 (step C271; N), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). Then, when the MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), the probability information setting process for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C273, when MODE is not probability information (step C273; N), MODE determines whether it is an error / invalidity (step C275). Then, when the MODE is an error / invalid (step C275; Y), the error / invalid setting process for performing the corresponding process such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the error / invalid setting process (step C276), a notification process when a command related to an error or an error is received, a warning display process when a right-handed instruction notification command or a left-handed instruction notification command is received, and the like are performed. ..

Further, in step C275, when MODE is not an error / invalidity (step C275; N), MODE determines whether or not the effect mode is switched (step C277). Then, when the MODE is the effect mode switching (step C277; Y), the effect mode switching process for switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C277, when the MODE is not the effect mode switching (step C277; N), the MODE determines whether the symbol is stopped (step C279). Then, when MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. Further, when the MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In the determination of whether the command is normal, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decorative special figure stop command is the target of the currently changing special figure.

If the command is not normal (step C280; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure stop setting is made (step C281), and if all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , Ends single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 248 shows the jackpot command process (step C238) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this jackpot command process, first, it is determined whether the MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). When the MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process is performed such as setting a fanfare display image according to a big hit type and a small hit, and adding a value of a continuous number display unit 96. (Step C402), the P machine state is set during fanfare (step C403), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. Then, when the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the round number display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. Then, when the MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), the interval effect setting process for setting the effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminates system command processing. If the MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small hit.

When the MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect at the end of the big hit or the small hit is performed (step C411), and the P machine state is set during the ending (step). C412), the jackpot command processing is terminated. If the MODE is not the ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on winning a prize in the special variable winning device.

If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated. When the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), the count effect setting process (step C414) for setting the effect corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command process is terminated.

By the processing in the effect control device 300 as described above, the effect according to the effect state as shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the effect display on the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 188, and the like are performed. ..

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the distribution of the variation time for the special figure variation display game which is a big hit started in the third specific gaming state ST4.

In this modification, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 249 is distributed instead of the variation pattern distribution when the result is a big hit in the third specific gaming state shown in FIG. 192 (c). In the distribution of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 249, the distribution is different depending on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game executed after the end of the special gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 249 (a), in the case of the 101st to 150th games after the end of the special gaming state, that is, within 50 games from the start of the third specific gaming state, the shortest variation time is 150,000 ms. The fluctuation pattern is selected at the highest rate. Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (b), when it is the 151st to 200th games after the end of the special gaming state, that is, when it is the 51st to 100th games from the start of the third specific gaming state, the fluctuation time is the second. The short variation pattern of 250,000 ms is selected at the highest rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (c), in the case of the 201st to 250th games after the end of the special gaming state, that is, in the case of the 101st to 250th games from the start of the third specific gaming state, the fluctuation time is the third. The short variation pattern of 300,000 ms is selected at the highest rate. Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (d), when it is the 251st game or later after the end of the special gaming state, that is, when it is 251 games or more from the start of the third specific gaming state, the fluctuation time is 450,000 ms, which is the longest. The fluctuation pattern is selected at the highest rate.

That is, as the number of games executed in the third specific game state increases, the ratio of selecting a long fluctuation time increases. The longer the fluctuation time is selected, the longer the stay period in the 4th specific game state becomes, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained increases. The more profits can be given to the player. This makes it possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the big hit is not derived. On the contrary, it is possible to have an interest that is not found in conventional gaming machines, that is, it is expected that the fitted state will continue for a long period of time.

The distribution shown in FIG. 249 is an example, and the division of the number of games for changing the table, the distribution of the variable time in each table, and the like can be arbitrarily set. In order to achieve the above-mentioned effect, it is sufficient to increase the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game in which the longer the staying time in the third specific gaming state is, the larger the hit is. For example, the longer the cumulative value of the execution time of the special figure variation display game executed in the third specific game state, the higher the selection ratio of the long variation time for the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit.

On the contrary, the longer the staying time (number of games or execution time) in the third specific gaming state, the lower the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who was able to derive the special result at an early stage. Further, the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time may be the highest for the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit when the staying time in the third specific gaming state is within a predetermined range. For example, the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time may be the highest for the special figure fluctuation display game, which is a big hit when the game is 101 to 250 games from the start of the third specific gaming state. Further, a plurality of such periods may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to provide an advantageous period and an unfavorable period in the third specific gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the result of the variable display game is executed. Is a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) that controls the game in the game machine that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained, and the first winning opening. 1 Starting winning opening 36, starting winning opening, closed state where the game ball cannot win, and open state where the game ball can easily win, can be converted into, and the right to execute the variable display game is generated by winning. A possible normal variable winning device 37 and a second starting winning opening that forms a starting winning opening arranged at a position on the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37 where a winning path can be made to the normal variable winning device. A mouth 97 is provided, and the control means sets the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 to either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state. The probability state in which the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is set to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state, and the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning is set. The first variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the device 37, and the second variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97. The first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time. In the high probability state, the execution time of the variable display game is shorter than that in the low probability state, and the special result depends on the gaming state. There is a first special result that can change the derived probability and a second special result that has a constant probability of being derived regardless of the gaming state, and the second special result in the second variable display game is derived. The probability of being played is set to be higher than the probability that the first special result is derived, and when the result of the variable display game becomes the first special result, the first special gaming state is set as a special gaming state advantageous to the player. Is executed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes the second special result, the second special gaming state is executed as a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the high probability state and the second operation state are obtained. When executing a variable display game that has a special result, the game shifts to the first operating state, and the execution time of the variable display game is selected according to the number of times the variable display game has been executed since the end of the previous special gaming state. It means that I tried to do it. Therefore, it is possible to make the profit given to the player different according to the number of times the variable display game is executed from the end of the special game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The game machine of this modification has a different transition of the gaming state.

FIG. 250 shows the transition of the gaming state in this modified example. In this modification, the third specific game state ST4 is not set, the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2, and the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a special result. Shifts to the fourth specific gaming state ST5. Then, when the fall lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the probability variation jackpot is derived in the fourth specific gaming state ST5, the transition to the first specific gaming state ST2 is performed after the special gaming state, and when the normal jackpot is derived, the second specific gaming state is after the special gaming state. It is designed to move to ST3.

FIG. 251 shows a variation pattern selected in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 of this modification. FIG. 251 (a) is a fluctuation pattern of the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order and the fall lottery is not won, and FIG. 251 (b) is a case where the result is a small hit and the fall lottery is performed. It is a fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game that does not win. In both cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal gaming state. Further, as shown in FIG. 251 (c), the same fluctuation time is set and a common specific effect is provided for the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is out of order or a small hit and the fall lottery is won. Will be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 251 (d), for the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is a big hit, 20000 ms is set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result is irregular, if the fall lottery is not won. It is set, and 10000 ms is set when the fall lottery is won, and a specific effect common to the case where the fall lottery is won is set when the result is off or a small hit. In addition, 10000 ms is set for the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main fluctuation, regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won, and it is common to the case where the fall lottery is won when the result is off or a small hit. A specific effect is set.

The variation time of the special figure variation display game won in this fall lottery is shorter than the variation time of the special figure variation display game (see FIG. 192), which is a big hit in the normal game state ST1. Therefore, when the special figure change display game won in the fall lottery is started first or at the same time, the special figure change display game won in the fall lottery always ends first. As a result, at least when the special figure fluctuation display game won in the fall lottery is started first or at the same time, the production content can be determined without referring to the fluctuation time of both special figure fluctuation display games, and the processing is easy. Can be.

Since the fall lottery is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern is determined after that, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game won in the fall lottery in FIGS. 251 (c) and 251 (d). Strictly speaking, it is a fluctuation pattern selected in the case of the normal gaming state ST1, but for ease of understanding, it will be described as a fluctuation pattern in the fourth specific gaming state ST5.

FIGS. 252 and 253 show an execution mode of the effect when the fourth specific gaming state ST5 ends. FIG. 252 (a) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order. In the state of the fourth specific game state ST5, the small hit RUSH effect is set. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game (t71, t72). Further, when the small hit is derived with a high probability (t73), the second special gaming state is set (t73 to t76), and the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t74 to t75). Will be.

Then, when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the fall lottery is won, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t76), and the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state ST1. A fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the variable time for the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery (t76 to t77), and the first specific effect is performed during the execution of this special figure variation display game. After the end of this special figure variation display game, the normal mode effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is performed (t78).

In addition, the continuous number display unit 96 maintains the state of displaying the number of big hits (here, 3 times) until the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery ends, and the special figure variation display game With the end, the display ends and the number of big hits is cleared to 0. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this point. , The display ends with the end of the special figure variation display game. This makes it possible to prevent the fact that the fall lottery has been won first.

FIG. 252 (b) shows the case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit. In this case as well, as in FIG. 252 (a), the fall lottery is won when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t81), and the gaming state is normal. The game state is ST1. A fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit (t81 to t82). During the execution of this special figure variation display game, the first specific effect is performed (t81 to t83). Then, after the end of this special figure variation display game, the first special game state is set and the first special game production is performed (t83). If the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the variable time regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won, and the first specific effect is executed. ..

In addition, the continuous number display unit 96 maintains a state in which the number of big hits (here, 3 times) up to that point is displayed until the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery ends. In this example, since the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the number of big hits is updated by +1 with the end of the special figure variation display game. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this point. To. Furthermore, in this case, the jackpot is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, and the start condition of the specific period is satisfied. I try to do. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

FIG. 253 (a) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit. In this case as well, as in FIG. 252 (a), the fall lottery is won when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t91), and the game state is normal. The game state is ST1. For the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, a fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time (t91 to t92). During the execution of this special figure variation display game, the first specific effect is performed (t91 to t93). When the special figure variation display game ends, the second special game state is set (t93), but the first specific effect is continued even in this second special game state (t93 to t94). After that, the normal mode is set with the end of the second special gaming state (t94).

In addition, the continuous number display unit 96 maintains a state in which the number of big hits (here, 3 times) up to that point is displayed until the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery ends and the second special game state ends. Then, the display ends with the end of the second special game state, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this point. , The display is maintained even in the second special gaming state based on the small hit derived in the special figure variation display game. Then, the display ends with the end of the second special gaming state. This makes it possible to prevent the fact that the fall lottery has been won first.

FIG. 253 (b) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit, and the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is started during the execution of the special figure variation display game. The case was shown. In this case as well, as in FIG. 252 (a), the fall lottery is won when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t111), and the game state is normal. The game state is ST1. For the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, a fixed time (10000 ms here) is set as the fluctuation time (t111 to t113), and this special figure fluctuation display game is being executed (t111 to t114) and the second special. During the gaming state (t114 to t115), the first specific effect is performed. The content of this first specific effect is the same as that of the first specific effect shown in FIG. 253 (a).

In this example, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit during the execution of the first specific effect, has been started (t112). Along with this, a second specific effect for suggesting and notifying the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is added to the first specific effect and started (t112). The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t114), after which the second special gaming state is set.

The special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted due to the derivation of a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (t113 to t115), and the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the second special gaming state (t115). ). If the special figure variation display game that is a big hit is not executed, the normal mode is produced with the end of the second special gaming state as shown in FIG. 253 (a), but here, the special figure that is a big hit is produced. The third specific effect is executed during the period in which the variable display game is executed (t115 to 116). As a result, it is possible to suggest or notify the player that the game will be a big hit, and it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped by winning the fall lottery. After that, with the end of the special figure 1 variable display game, the first special gaming state is set (t117).

Further, in the continuous number display unit 96, the number of big hits (here, 3 times) up to that point is displayed even in the second special game state after the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won, as in FIG. 253 (a). The state is maintained. After that, it is temporarily hidden, but it is restarted with the number of big hits updated by +1 with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game which is a big hit. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this point. To. Further, with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit started before the end of the special figure variation display game, the number of big hits before the transition to the normal game state ST1 is taken over and added. This jackpot variable display game is a jackpot variable display game that was started before the end of the special map variable display game that won the fall lottery. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

As described above, by performing the first specific effect in the case of winning the fall lottery or in the case of a big hit, one of the events of greatly different value for the player, such as the transition to a low probability and the derivation of the big hit, will occur. It can be notified, and it is possible to give the player a sense of anxiety and expectation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, if a special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is started during the execution of the first specific effect, the fall lottery is won by the first specific effect by performing the second specific effect or the third specific effect. It is possible to notify the player of the possibility of a big hit even when the game is notified, and it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game due to a fall.

In addition, if the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery becomes a big hit, or if the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the big hit is started before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, the result is Even if the derivation time is the normal game state ST1, it is treated in the same way as the big hit derived in the specific game state, and the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is added by taking over the number of big hits before shifting to the normal game state ST1. I am doing it. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy with a player who is still recognized as being in a specific gaming state due to the execution of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect, and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. can do.

FIG. 254 shows an example of the display in the display device 41. FIGS. 254 (a) to 254 (g) show an example of the first specific effect executed when the fall lottery is won or a big hit is obtained in the fourth specific game state ST5. As shown in FIG. 254 (a), when the special figure 2 variable display game is started, the variable display is started on the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b. , The first specific effect is started. This first specific effect is an effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight each other, and the result of the special figure variation display game and the presence / absence of a fall lottery are notified according to the result of the battle.

As shown in FIG. 254 (b), the effect of fighting the characters is performed, and when the fluctuation time ends, the result of the fight is shown. If the result is out of order in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the result is that the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 254 (c). Further, the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b also display the result mode of the detachment.

After that, as shown in FIG. 254 (d), the shutter display 93, which is a display imitating the shutter, is closed, and as shown in FIG. 254 (e), the shutter display 93 is completely closed to enter the fourth specific gaming state. The end of ST5, the notification of the number of prize balls acquired in the fourth specific gaming state ST5, and the notification of the number of big hits notified by the continuous number display unit 96 are performed. That is, the shutter display 93 forms an image notifying that the fall lottery has been won. Then, it shifts to the effect display of the normal game state ST1.

If the result is a small hit in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 254 (c), and the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b In the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b, the result mode of the small hit is displayed. After that, the second special gaming state is entered with the display of FIG. 254 (c), and the displays of FIGS. 254 (d) and (e) are performed at the end of the second special gaming state.

If the result is a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won, the character fights as shown in FIG. 254 (b) and then the ally as shown in FIG. 254 (f). The result is that the character 89a wins. In addition, the result mode of the big hit is displayed on the first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decoration special figure 2 game display unit 88b. And after this, the special game state is started.

When the result is a big hit in this way, the number of big hits displayed on the continuous number display unit 96 is updated by +1 and is updated from 3 times shown in FIG. 254 (b) to 4 times. If the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit does not win the fall lottery, it is a big hit in the 4th specific game state ST5, and it is a big hit that occurred during the specific period in which the game information is accumulated. The value of is updated by +1.

In addition, when the fall lottery is won in the special figure fluctuation display game which is a big hit, the game is temporarily shifted to the normal game state ST1, but as an exceptional specific case, even if the big hit is in the normal game state ST1, 1 Instead of making it the second time, the addition results up to that point are taken over and added. As mentioned above, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, the first specific effect that suggests or notifies that the fall lottery was won is performed, but in the case of a big hit, it is clear that the player has fallen. Since the player does not clearly know that he / she has won the fall lottery, the notification can be made without any sense of incongruity by taking over and adding the addition results up to that point.

In addition, when the result is missed or a small hit in the special figure fluctuation display game without winning the fall lottery, the first specific effect may be performed as a so-called ghost effect. In this case, after the character fights as shown in FIG. 254 (d), the result of the draw is made as shown in FIG. 254 (g). Further, the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b also display the result mode of the missed or small hit.

FIG. 255 shows an example of the second specific effect and the third specific effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 253 (b), an example of the case where the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit is shown, but the same applies to the case where the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order. As shown in FIG. 255 (a), the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery is started and the first specific effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 255 (b), during the execution of this first specific effect. When the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is started, a band 94 displaying "Warning !!" is displayed as the second specific effect so as to overlap the front side of the first specific effect. This band 94 is also displayed when the result is shown in the first specific effect as shown in FIG. 255 (c), so as to suggest that there is a result different from the result shown by the first specific effect. ing.

As shown in FIG. 255 (d), the band 94 is not displayed during the execution of the second special gaming state. Then, when the second special game state ends and the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is restarted, as shown in FIG. 255 (e), as the third specific effect, "waiting for intense heat !!" The band 95 is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (f), the shutter display 93 is opened so that the normal mode effect can be seen, and as shown in FIG. 255 (g), the band 95 is also displayed when the variable display is performed in the normal mode effect. Continues to be displayed. Then, the result mode of the big hit is displayed as shown in FIG. 255 (h), and the first special gaming state is set as shown in FIG. 255 (i).

The display of the continuous number display unit 96 temporarily ends when it becomes the normal mode effect which is the effect of the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. 255 (f), but the first special as shown in FIG. 255 (i). The display starts when the game state is produced. Here, the special figure fluctuation display game that was started before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is a big hit, and although it has once shifted to the normal game state ST1, the number of big hits before the fall It has been updated from 3 times before the fall to 4 times. Although the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is temporarily terminated when the normal mode effect is achieved, the display may be continuously displayed here as well. This can also suggest or notify that there is a possibility of a big hit.

Although the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed in a band shape, other displays may be used. In addition, although the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first specific effect, the second specific effect and the third specific effect are performed instead of the first specific effect. Is also good. Further, only one of the second specific effect and the third specific effect may be performed.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the result of the variable display game is executed. Is provided with control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for controlling the game in the game machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained, and the control means is the first. When it is decided to change the gaming state with the fulfillment of one condition, the first specific effect for notifying the change in the gaming state can be executed, and the second condition is satisfied during the execution of the first specific effect. When it is decided to change the gaming state in accordance with the above, in addition to the first specific effect or in place of the first specific effect, a second notifying the change of the gaming state due to the fulfillment of the second condition. It means that a specific effect can be executed. Therefore, even if the second condition is satisfied after the start of the first specific effect, the change in the gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) and a second starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) forming a starting winning opening are provided, and the control means is the first starting. The first variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth, the second variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting mouth, and the first variable is executed. The display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and when the first condition is satisfied and it is decided to change the gaming state with the execution of one of the variable display games, the change in the gaming state is notified. When it is possible to execute the first specific effect to be performed, and it is determined that the second condition is satisfied and the gaming state is changed due to the execution of the other variable display game during the execution of the first specific effect, the first specific effect is to be executed. In addition to or in place of the first specific effect, it is possible to execute a second specific effect that notifies a change in the gaming state due to the fulfillment of the second condition. Therefore, even if the second condition is satisfied after the start of the first specific effect, the change in the gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even when two variable display games are changed at the same time, it is possible to notify the change of the game state based on the execution of each variable display game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the control means executes a third specific effect for notifying the change in the gaming state due to the fulfillment of the second condition in the period from the end of the first specific effect to the change in the gaming state due to the fulfillment of the second condition. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to notify the change of the game state based on the establishment of the second condition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In FIG. 256A, a special figure variation display game that is a big hit in a specific game state was started, but a special figure variation display game that won a fall lottery during the execution of the special map variation display game was started. As a result, an example is shown in which the game falls into the normal game state ST1 and the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery ends before the special figure variation display game which is a big hit.

In the example shown in FIG. 256 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit in the fourth specific gaming state ST5, has been started (t121). Then, during the execution of this special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery has started (t122). With the start of this special figure 2 variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1.

Since a fixed time (10000 ms in this case) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is started in the gaming machine. Special Figure 1 Fluctuation display It is possible to grasp which one ends first from the remaining fluctuation time of the game. Here, it is understood that the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery ends with a deviation result before the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit.

After that, the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery ends with a deviation result earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes a big hit (t124), and a new special figure 2 variable display game is started. Then, as the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, ends, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result (t125). After that, when the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the first special gaming state is started (t126).

In the example shown in FIG. 256A, either the effect state 1 or the effect state 2 can be executed as the effect. The effect state 1 is an effect as shown in FIG. 255. First, in the fourth specific game state ST5, since the game progresses with the special figure 2 variation display game as the main variation, there is no change in the production state at the time when the special figure 1 variation display game, which is a big hit, is started (t121). The game progresses. Then, when the special figure 2 variable display game won in the fall lottery is started (t122), the first specific effect is started. The content of this first specific effect is an effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight as shown in FIGS. 255 (a) to 255 (e), and since the fall lottery is won here, finally. An effect is performed to the effect that the ally character 89a is defeated, the shutter display 93 is closed, and the fourth specific gaming state ST5 ends (t122 to t124).

When the predetermined timing during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery while the first specific effect is being executed (t123), the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit is suggested or notified. A second specific effect for this is added. The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game. The content of this second effect is an effect of displaying the band 94 displayed as "Warning !!" as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 255 (c).

After that, the third specific effect is started with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery (t124). As shown in FIGS. 255 (f) and 255 (g), the content of the third specific effect is an effect of displaying the band 95 displayed as "waiting for intense heat !!". By setting such an effect state 1, it is possible to suggest or notify the player that a big hit will occur, and it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped by winning the fall lottery.

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is stopped (t125), the decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a stops at the display corresponding to the result as shown in FIG. 255 (h) and is a big hit. It is shown that it became. Further, at the stop display time (t125 to t126), the result mode is clearly displayed as shown in FIG. 255 (i).

The display of the continuous number display unit 96 is temporarily set to the normal mode effect, which is the effect of the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. 255 (f), due to the end (t124) of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery. However, when the first special game state is produced as shown in FIG. 255 (i), the display is started. Here, the special figure fluctuation display game that was started before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is a big hit, and although it has once shifted to the normal game state ST1, the number of big hits before the fall It is supposed to continue to add, and it will be updated from 3 times before the fall to 4 times.

The effect state 2 is an effect that does not perform the first specific effect that suggests or notifies that the fall lottery has been won for the effect state 1. FIG. 257 shows an example of this effect state 2. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses with the special figure 2 variable display game as the main variable. Therefore, at the time when the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is started (t121 in FIG. 256 (a)), the figure is shown. As shown in 257 (a), there is no change in the effect state and the game progresses.

After that, when the special figure 2 variable display game won in the fall lottery was started (t122 in FIG. 256 (a)), as shown in FIG. 257 (b), there was no change in the production state and the game proceeded. Special Figure 2 When the predetermined timing of the variable display game is reached (t123 in FIG. 256 (a)), as shown in FIG. 257 (c), the first for suggesting or notifying the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit. 2 The specific effect is added to the first specific effect and started. The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t124 in FIG. 256 (a)). The content of this second effect is an effect of displaying the band 94 displayed as "Warning !!" as shown in FIGS. 257 (c) and 257 (d).

After that, the third specific effect is started with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery (t124 in FIG. 256 (a)). As shown in FIG. 257 (e), the content of the third specific effect is an effect of displaying the band 95 displayed as "waiting for intense heat !!". In addition, the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit depending on the content of the dialogue of the character 89a, is suggested or notified. By setting such an effect state 2, it is possible to suggest or notify that the player will be a big hit without being aware that the player has won the fall lottery.

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is stopped (t125 in FIG. 256 (a)), as shown in FIG. 257 (f), the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a, the second decoration Special Figure 1 The game display unit 88a stops at the display corresponding to the result, and the character 89a indicates that the game is a big hit. Further, the result mode is clearly displayed as shown in FIG. 257 (g) at the stop display time (t125 to t126 in FIG. 256 (a)).

The display of the continuous number display unit 96 is maintained even after the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery ends, and the display is started to be updated by +1 when the first special gaming state is produced. In this case as well, although the game state is once shifted to ST1, the number of big hits before the fall is continuously added, and the number is updated from 3 times before the fall to 4 times.

That is, when the end condition is satisfied (winning the fall lottery) during the execution of one of the special figure variation display games started during the specific period, and the other is started before the start of the one variable display game. When a new start condition for a specific period is satisfied (a big hit is derived) after the end condition is satisfied by the variable display game of the above, it is possible not to execute the end effect (first specific effect). Further, it is possible to execute a specific effect (second specific effect, third specific effect) in addition to or in place of the end effect.

It should be noted that the execution mode of the effect is not limited to the above, and for example, since it is known that a big hit will occur later at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, FIG. 254 as the first specific effect. The effect of showing a big hit as shown in (f) may be performed from the start of the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won.

In FIG. 256 (b), a special figure variation display game that is a big hit in a specific game state was started, but a special figure variation display game that won a fall lottery during the execution of the special map variation display game was started. As a result, an example is shown in which the player falls into the normal game state ST1 and the variable time of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, ends first.

In the example shown in FIG. 256 (b), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit in the fourth specific gaming state ST5, has been started (t131). Then, during the execution of this special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery has started (t132). With the start of this special figure 2 variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. At this point, it is known that the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit in the gaming machine, ends the variable time before the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery.

After that, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, ends before the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery, and the special figure 2 variable display game is compulsory accordingly. It is stopped as a result of the loss (t133). After that, when the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the first special gaming state is started (t134).

In such a case, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the fall lottery is won, it is selected not to perform the first specific effect suggesting or notifying that the fall lottery has been won, and FIG. 257 (c). The second specific effect for suggesting or notifying the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit as shown in the above, is performed. By setting such an effect state, it is possible to suggest or notify that the player will be a big hit without being aware that the player has won the fall lottery.

Further, in this example as well, the special figure variation display game that is a big hit in a game state other than ST1 is started, but the special figure variation display game that is won by the fall lottery is started during the execution of the special figure variation display game. In the case of falling to the normal game state ST1, the game has temporarily moved to the normal game state ST1 due to the winning of the fall lottery, but the value of the continuous number display unit 96 should be continuously added to the number of big hits before the fall. It has become.

In addition, during the specific game state or special game state which is a specific period, the game progresses by right-handed, and in the normal game state ST1 which is not a specific period, the game progresses by left-handed. It becomes possible for the player to grasp whether or not it is. Therefore, when the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is continuously added to the number of big hits before the fall, the launch direction of the game ball at the present time is not clearly indicated, or it is specified even during the period when the normal game state ST1 is temporarily entered. By showing the firing direction as it is in the game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player has fallen.

Further, in the above description, the inheritance of the display of the continuous number display unit 96 at the end of the specific period due to the end of the fourth specific game state ST5 has been described, but the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the like have been described. Similarly, even at the end of the specific period due to the end of the third specific game state ST4, if the start condition of the specific period is immediately satisfied, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 may be inherited and added. good.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the result of the variable display game is executed. (Game control device 100) for controlling the game and the effect control means for controlling the effect of the game (game control device 100) in the game machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained. The game control is provided with an effect control device 300), a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) and a second starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) forming a starting winning opening. As a means, the first variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the second variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. The first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and the effect control means is started when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The period can be set, the game information from the start to the end of the specific period can be accumulated and notified, and the end condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the variable display games started during the specific period. If the start condition for a new specific period is satisfied after the end condition is satisfied by the other variable display game started before the end of the one variable display game, the start condition is satisfied. In the specific period newly started based on, it is possible to accumulate the game information following the game information accumulated in the specific period set at the start of the one of the variable display games. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, the game control means can execute an end effect (first specific effect) for notifying that the end condition has been satisfied, and the end condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the variable display games started during the specific period. If the start condition for a new specific period is satisfied after the end condition is satisfied by the other variable display game started before the start of the variable display game, the end effect is not executed. Will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, the game control means can execute the end effect for notifying that the end condition is satisfied, and the end condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the variable display games started during the specific period. If the start condition for a new specific period is satisfied after the end condition is satisfied by the other variable display game started before the start of the one variable display game, in addition to the end effect or in place of the end effect. It means that a specific effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, when the end condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable display game started during the specific period, and the new start condition for the specific period is satisfied with the end of the running variable display game. , In the specific period newly started with the end of the variable display game, the game information may be accumulated following the game information accumulated in the specific period set at the start of the variable display game. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machines of this modification differ in the transition of the gaming state and the execution mode of the effect. Further, depending on this, the case where the value before the fall is inherited for the display on the continuous number display unit 96 is different.

FIG. 258 shows the transition of the gaming state in this modified example. In this modified example, as in the second modified example, the third specific game state ST4 is not set, the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2, and no special result is derived, and the special figure of 100 times. When the variable display game is executed, the process shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5. The probability state and the like in each game state are the same as in the case of the second modification. Then, when the fall lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

Further, the transition destination when the probability variation jackpot is derived in the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the fourth specific gaming state ST5 is different from the second modification, and in this modification, the special gaming state. After that, the game shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5, and when a normal jackpot is derived, the game shifts to the second specific game state ST3 after the special game state. That is, even if the same probability variation jackpot is used, the game state to be shifted differs depending on whether the game is derived in the normal game state ST1 or in the specific game state, and the value obtained for the player is different.

The variation pattern selected in each gaming state in this modification is basically the same as in the case of the second modification, but the variation pattern selected in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 is partially different. Further, the execution mode of the effect in this modified example is basically the same as that in the second modified example, but some of them are different. In this modification, since the transition destination of the subsequent gaming state differs depending on the gaming state when the jackpot is derived, the player is made to clearly grasp the gaming state when the jackpot is derived, giving a sense of discomfort and distrust. You need to avoid it. Therefore, the execution mode of the effect is partially different from that of the second modification. Hereinafter, a case different from the second modification will be described.

FIG. 259 shows a variation pattern selected in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 of this modification. FIGS. 259 (a) to 259 (c) are the same as in the case of the second modification. As shown in FIG. 259 (d), for the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is a big hit, 20000 ms is set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result is irregular, if the fall lottery is not won. If the fall lottery is won, 10000 ms is set. In these cases, the specific effect that is set when the fall lottery is won when the result is off or a small hit is not set.

Further, 10000 ms is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is the main fluctuation, regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won. Of these, if the fall lottery is not won, the specific effect is set, and if the fall lottery is won, the specific effect is not set. The reason why a specific effect is not set for the special figure variation display game that is a big hit that is won in the fall lottery is to perform a normal mode effect in order to let the player know that the fall lottery has been won from an early stage.

FIG. 260 (a) shows a case where a fall lottery is won in a special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit. It is basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 252 (b), but the effect state and the display content of the continuous number display unit 96 are the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 252 (b). Is different.

When the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the fall lottery is won, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t81), and the game state is the normal game state ST1. In addition, with the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit that won the fall lottery, the small hit RUSH effect ends and becomes the normal mode effect, and the big hit effect in the normal mode effect is executed (t81 ~). t82).

By setting the normal mode effect in this way, it is possible to clearly show that the derivation of the jackpot was performed in the normal game state ST1, and the player has doubts about the transition destination of the game state after the end of the special game state. You can prevent it from being held. Further, by shifting to the normal mode effect without executing the first specific effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is different from the normal state, and it is possible to raise the expectation. Then, after the end of this special figure variation display game, the first special game state is set and the first special game production is performed (t83).

In the continuous number display unit 96, since the end condition of the specific period is satisfied with the transition to the normal game state ST1, the display is ended and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t81). After that, with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, a new start condition for a specific period is satisfied, so that the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the jackpot is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is set to 1, and the player can grasp that it is the jackpot derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp that the transition to the fourth specific gaming state ST5 does not occur immediately after the end of the first special gaming state.

When the small hit RUSH effect is ended and the normal mode effect is set, the result display at the end of the small hit RUSH effect as shown in FIG. 255 (d) may be displayed. Further, the effects as shown in FIGS. 255 (e) to 255 (h) may be performed.

FIG. 260 (b) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit, and the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is started during the execution of the special figure variation display game. The case was shown. It is basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 253 (b), but the display content of the continuous number display unit 96 is different from the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 253 (b).

In the continuous number display unit 96, the state of displaying the number of big hits (here, 3 times) up to that point is maintained even in the second special game state after the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this point. To. Then, the display ends with the end of the second special gaming state, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t115).

After that, the first special gaming state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is started. In this case, the gaming state when the jackpot is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, and a new specific period is started. Therefore, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is set to 1, and the jackpot derived in the normal gaming state ST1 is used. It makes it possible for the player to grasp that there is something. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp that the transition to the fourth specific gaming state ST5 does not occur immediately after the end of the first special gaming state.

Further, the display device 41 is designed to perform the effect shown in FIG. 255, and it is understood that the display device 41 has shifted to the normal game state ST1 because the effect is changed to the normal mode with the end of the second special game state. It will be possible. In this example, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 in FIG. 255 (i) is 1.

Further, the execution time (t111 to t113) of the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery is the variation time (t112 to t113 and t115 to t116) of the special figure variation display game which is a big hit started in the normal game state ST1. It is shorter than the total time). Therefore, when the special figure change display game won in the fall lottery is started first or at the same time, the special figure change display game won in the fall lottery always ends first. Therefore, it is possible to secure a time for the player to be informed that the game is in the normal game state ST1 before the jackpot result is derived, and the player is surely aware that the jackpot is derived in the normal game state ST1. It is possible. In addition, at least when the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is started first or at the same time, the production content can be determined without referring to the fluctuation time of both special figure fluctuation display games, and the processing is easy. can do.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the result of the variable display game is executed. Is a game control means (game control device 100) that controls a game and a first start port (a first start port) that forms a start winning opening in a game machine that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when A first starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37) and a second starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) are provided, and the game control means varies based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening. The first variable display game is executed as a game, the second variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port, and the first variable display game and the second variable display game are executed at the same time. It is possible, and it is possible to set a specific period that starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition that can be satisfied at the start of the variable display game is satisfied, and it is possible to derive a special result. The game value given to the player differs depending on whether or not the game is in a specific period, and the execution time of the variable display game in which the end condition of the specific period is satisfied is a variation that is a special result that is started when the specific period is not. It will be shorter than the execution time of the display game. Therefore, when the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied is started after the variable display game in which the end condition is satisfied is started, the special result is derived in the state where the specific period is completed. It is possible to prevent a discrepancy with the recognition of the person and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, the game control means can execute the end effect (first specific effect) for notifying that the end condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable display game in which the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the obtained game value and the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, the start condition of the specific period can be satisfied with the derivation of the special result, but the time when the start condition is satisfied differs depending on which period the specific period is set. That is, when the special gaming state is included in addition to the specific gaming state as the specific period, the start condition is satisfied when the special gaming state accompanying the derivation of the special result in the non-specific gaming state is started. .. In addition, when the specific period is limited to the specific gaming state and does not include the special gaming state, the special gaming state associated with the derivation of the special result in the non-specific gaming state is terminated and the specific gaming state is started. The condition will be satisfied.

In FIG. 261 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is started before the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery, and the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery. Special Figure 1 where the fluctuation time is a big hit An example of the effect state when the fluctuation display game ends before the fluctuation time is shown. It is basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 256 (a), but the effect state and the display content of the continuous number display unit 96 are the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 256 (a). Is different. It should be noted that the effect states 1 and 2 correspond to the effect shown in FIG. 256 (a), and the different parts will be mainly described below.

In the effect state 1, the display of the continuous number display unit 96 ends with the end of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t124). After that, the first special gaming state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the jackpot is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is set to 1, and the player can grasp that it is the jackpot derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And.

In addition, the display device 41 is designed to perform the effect shown in FIG. 255, and since the effect of the normal mode is set with the end of the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. It becomes possible to grasp what is happening. In this example, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 in FIG. 255 (i) is 1.

In the effect state 2, with the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery (t122), the small hit RUSH effect ends and the normal mode effect is performed, and the second specific effect is executed. After the end of the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery (t124), the third specific effect is performed until the end of the special figure variation display game (t126), which is a big hit, and then the first special gaming state is set. By setting the normal mode effect in this way, it is possible to clearly show that the derivation of the jackpot was performed in the normal game state ST1, and the player has doubts about the transition destination of the game state after the end of the special game state. You can prevent it from being held. Further, by shifting to the normal mode effect without executing the first specific effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is different from the normal state, and it is possible to raise the expectation.

In the continuous number display unit 96, the display is terminated and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 with the transition to the normal game state ST1 (t122). After that, the first special gaming state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the jackpot is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is set to 1, and the player can grasp that it is the jackpot derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And. When the small hit RUSH effect is ended and the normal mode effect is set, the result display at the end of the small hit RUSH effect as shown in FIG. 255 (d) may be displayed. Further, the effects as shown in FIGS. 255 (e) to 255 (h) may be performed.

FIG. 261 (b) shows an example of the effect state when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit than the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game won in the fall lottery, ends earlier. .. It is basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 256 (b), but the effect state and the display content of the continuous number display unit 96 are the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 256 (b). Is different.

Special Figure 2 With the start of the variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. At this point, it is known that the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit in the gaming machine, ends before the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game won in the fall lottery. In this case, it is selected that the normal mode effect is set at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the fall lottery, and that the first specific effect that suggests or notifies that the fall lottery has been won is not performed. A specific production is performed.

Further, in the continuous number display unit 96, the display is terminated and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 with the transition to the normal game state ST1 (t132). After that, the first special gaming state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the jackpot is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is set to 1, and the player can grasp that it is the jackpot derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And. When the small hit RUSH effect is ended and the normal mode effect is set, the result display at the end of the small hit RUSH effect as shown in FIG. 255 (d) may be displayed. Further, the effects as shown in FIGS. 255 (e) to 255 (h) may be performed.

In addition, if the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is started within a predetermined period before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal mode effect cannot be displayed for a sufficient time, it will be a big hit. Figure It is also possible to notify that the fall lottery has been won during the stop time of the variable display game.

In addition, in order to show that the big hit after winning the fall lottery is the big hit in the normal game state ST1, the normal mode production is used, but the player can grasp that it is the big hit in the normal game state ST1. It is not limited to the normal mode production. For example, it may be shown that it is the normal game state ST1 only by performing an additional effect such as the second specific effect or the third specific effect instead of the normal mode effect, or the normal game state ST1 may be indicated by voice. It may be shown that it is. In addition, the position where the movable character stays in the specific game state and the normal game state ST1 is made different, and the character is returned to the position of the normal game state ST1 in the normal game state ST1. It may be shown that there is.

In addition, during the specific game state or special game state during the specific period, the game progresses with a right-handed strike, and in the normal game state ST1 which is not a specific period, the game progresses with a left-handed strike. It is also possible to indicate that the player has returned to the normal game state ST1. In particular, in the case shown in FIGS. 260 and 97, the player can be made to recognize more strongly by emphasizing the instruction display instructing the left-handed strike when returning to the normal game state ST1.

Further, although the inheritance of the display of the continuous number display unit 96 at the end of the specific period due to the end of the fourth specific game state ST5 has been described, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state have been described. Similarly, at the end of the specific period due to the end of ST4, it may be clearly shown that the normal game state ST1 has been entered. Further, the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game at which the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 are terminated is a big hit started in the normal game state ST1. It may be made shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, it is determined whether or not to set the high probability state based on the symbol of the special result, but it depends on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game state. It may be decided whether or not to make a high probability state.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. In addition, the configurations of the above-mentioned modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

36 1st start winning opening (starting winning opening)
37 Ordinary variable prize device (starting prize opening)
97 2nd start winning opening (starting winning opening)
100 Game control device (control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a first special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is the first special result.
Equipped with control means to control the game
The control means is
Based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first variable display game is executed as the variable display game, and the first variable display game is executed.
Based on the establishment of the second start condition, the second variable display game is executed as the variable display game, and the second variable display game is executed.
The first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time.
At least in the result of the second variable display game, there is a second special result having a constant probability of being derived regardless of the gaming state.
When the first variable display game that is the first special result is executed, the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first variable display game, so that the player can be informed. It is possible to generate an advantageous second special gaming state,
When the second variable display game that results in the second special result is executed, the first specific effect that suggests or notifies the change in the gaming state can be executed, and the first specific effect is executed during the execution of the first specific effect. When the first variable display game having a special result is executed, a change in the gaming state to the first special gaming state is suggested or notified in addition to or in place of the first specific effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the second specific effect to be performed can be executed so as to straddle a screen for displaying the result of the second variable display game .

Images